559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface

For use with HC900 Hybrid Controller

User Guide

Honeywell Process Solutions

Doc. No.:

51-52-25-108

Revision:

12

Date:

11/08

Notices and Trademarks

Copyright 2008 by Honeywell
Revision 12 November 2008

Warranty/Remedy
Honeywell warrants goods of its manufacture as being free of defective materials and faulty workmanship. Contact
your local sales office for warranty information. If warranted goods are returned to Honeywell during the period of
coverage, Honeywell will repair or replace without charge those items it finds defective. The foregoing is Buyer's sole
remedy and is in lieu of all other warranties, expressed or implied, including those of merchantability and fitness for a
particular purpose. Specifications may change without notice. The information we supply is believed to be accurate
and reliable as of this printing. However, we assume no responsibility for its use.
While we provide application assistance personally, through our literature and the Honeywell web site, it is up to the
customer to determine the suitability of the product in the application.

Honeywell Process Solutions

Honeywell
512 Virginia Drive
Fort Washington, PA 19034

HC900, 559 and 1042 are U.S. registered trademarks of Honeywell

Other brand or product names are trademarks of their respective owners.

ii

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

Revision 12
11/08

About This Document

Abstract
This manual describes the installation and operation of the 559 and 1042 Series Operator Interfaces.

References
The following list identifies all documents that may be sources of reference for material discussed in this
publication.
Document Title

Doc ID

HC900 Controller Installation and User Guide

51-52-25-107

Hybrid Control Designer User Guide

51-52-25-110

Hybrid Control Designer Function Block Reference Guide

51-52-25-109

HC900 Hybrid Controller Communications User Guide

51-52-25-111

HC900 Controller Redundancy Overview & System Operation

51-52-25-133

Contacts
World Wide Web
The following lists Honeywells World Wide Web sites that will be of interest to our customers.
Honeywell Organization

WWW Address (URL)

Corporate

http://www.honeywell.com

Honeywell Process Solutions

http://hpsweb.honeywell.com

Technical tips

http://content.honeywell.com/ipc/faq

Telephone
Contact us by telephone at the numbers listed below.
Organization
United States and Canada

Revision 12
11/08

Honeywell

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

Phone Number
1-800-423-9883
1-800-525-7439

Tech. Support
Service

iii

Symbol Definitions
The following table lists those symbols that may be used in this document to denote certain conditions.
Symbol

Definition

This DANGER symbol indicates an imminently hazardous situation, which,

if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury.
This WARNING symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which, if
not avoided, could result in death or serious injury.
This CAUTION symbol may be present on Control Product instrumentation
and literature. If present on a product, the user must consult the
appropriate part of the accompanying product literature for more
information.
This CAUTION symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which, if
not avoided, may result in property damage.
WARNING
PERSONAL INJURY: Risk of electrical shock. This symbol warns the user of a
potential shock hazard where HAZARDOUS LIVE voltages greater than 30 Vrms,
42.4 Vpeak, or 60 Vdc may be accessible. Failure to comply with these
instructions could result in death or serious injury.
ATTENTION, Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) hazards. Observe precautions for
handling electrostatic sensitive devices
Protective Earth (PE) terminal. Provided for connection of the protective earth
(green or green/yellow) supply system conductor.
Functional earth terminal. Used for non-safety purposes such as noise immunity
improvement. NOTE: This connection shall be bonded to protective earth at the
source of supply in accordance with national local electrical code requirements.
Earth Ground. Functional earth connection. NOTE: This connection shall be bonded
to Protective earth at the source of supply in accordance with national and local
electrical code requirements.
Chassis Ground. Identifies a connection to the chassis or frame of the equipment
shall be bonded to Protective Earth at the source of supply in accordance with
national and local electrical code requirements.

iv

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

Revision 12
11/08

Contents

Contents

Introduction ............................................................................................. 1
Overview.......................................................................................................................1
CE Conformity (Europe) ...............................................................................................2

Overview of Architecture ......................................................................... 3

Description of Components ..........................................................................................3

Specifications/Mounting/Wiring/Startup................................................... 5
Specifications ...............................................................................................................5
Site Preparation............................................................................................................8
OI Mounting ..................................................................................................................8
Wiring..........................................................................................................................16
Noise Protection .........................................................................................................20
Startup ........................................................................................................................20

Keys and Displays Overview................................................................. 21

Overview of Keys........................................................................................................21
Standard Keys ............................................................................................................23
Common Tasks Using Standard Keys .......................................................................25
User-assignable Keys.................................................................................................29
Relabeling Display Group Keys..................................................................................31
Overview of Displays ..................................................................................................33

Main Menu ............................................................................................ 39

Overview.....................................................................................................................39

Recipes ................................................................................................. 44
Setpoint Programmers .......................................................................... 46
Overview.....................................................................................................................46
Setpoint Program Setup .............................................................................................47
Select program ...........................................................................................................48
Edit program ...............................................................................................................49

Revision 12
11/08

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

Contents

Edit segments.............................................................................................................51
Save program .............................................................................................................52
Setpoint Program Operation.......................................................................................53
SPP operation - Model 1042 ......................................................................................54
SPP operation - Model 559 ........................................................................................56
Load program .............................................................................................................60
Edit segments.............................................................................................................63

Setpoint Scheduler ................................................................................ 65

Overview.....................................................................................................................65
Setpoint Scheduler Setup - Model 559 and 1042 ......................................................66
Edit schedule ..............................................................................................................67
Edit segments.............................................................................................................68
Edit setpoints ..............................................................................................................69
Edit segment events ...................................................................................................70
Edit guarantee hold ....................................................................................................71
Save schedule ............................................................................................................72
Setpoint Schedule Operation .....................................................................................74
Setpoint schedule operation - Model 1042.................................................................75
Setpoint schedule operation - Model 559...................................................................77
Load schedule ............................................................................................................81
View schedule events.................................................................................................83
View auxiliary data......................................................................................................84
Edit segments.............................................................................................................85

Sequencers ........................................................................................... 87
Overview.....................................................................................................................87
Sequencer Setup - Model 559 and 1042....................................................................88
Save Sequence ..........................................................................................................95
Sequencer Operation .................................................................................................96
Sequencer Operation - Model 1042 ...........................................................................97
Sequencer Operation - Model 559 .............................................................................98
Load Sequencer .......................................................................................................100
View/Edit Sequence .................................................................................................101
Edit Steps/Edit Step Details .....................................................................................102

vi

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

Revision 12
11/08

Contents

Loops .................................................................................................. 103

Overview...................................................................................................................103
Whats in this section................................................................................................104
Common Loop Tasks ...............................................................................................105
Loop Setup ...............................................................................................................106
Loop Operation Displays ..........................................................................................119

Summary Displays .............................................................................. 129

Analog Input Summary .............................................................................................129
Analog Output Summary ..........................................................................................131
Digital Input Summary ..............................................................................................132
Digital Output Summary ...........................................................................................133
Variable Summary ....................................................................................................134

Alarms ................................................................................................. 137

Overview...................................................................................................................137
Alarm indication ........................................................................................................137
Alarm Summary........................................................................................................138
Alarm Group .............................................................................................................139
Alarm Detail ..............................................................................................................140

Events ................................................................................................. 141

Event Summary ........................................................................................................141

Diagnostics.......................................................................................... 142
Overview...................................................................................................................142
Controller diagnostics ...............................................................................................143
I/O module diagnostics .............................................................................................147
I/O Module Diagnostics physical details...................................................................153
Panel diagnostic log .................................................................................................154
Communication Ports diagnostics ............................................................................155

Unit Setup ........................................................................................... 159

Controller Status.......................................................................................................160
Set Mode ..................................................................................................................160
Write Database to Flash Memory.............................................................................162
Set Time and Date....................................................................................................163

Revision 12
11/08

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

vii

Contents

Set Security/Review Security ...................................................................................163

Set Language ...........................................................................................................167
Communication Ports ...............................................................................................168
File Name Selection .................................................................................................183
Self Tests..................................................................................................................184
Calibrate AI...............................................................................................................185
Calibrate AO .............................................................................................................193
Calibrate Motor .........................................................................................................198
Display brightness ....................................................................................................207

Disk Utilities......................................................................................... 208

Overview...................................................................................................................208
List disk files .............................................................................................................209
Load/store SP profiles ..............................................................................................210
Load/store SP schedules .........................................................................................212
Load/Store sequences..............................................................................................214
Load/store recipes ....................................................................................................216
Format disk...............................................................................................................218
Set Controller Mode..................................................................................................219

Data Storage ....................................................................................... 221

Overview...................................................................................................................221
Data Storage Operation............................................................................................230

Log Off/Log On.................................................................................... 239

Other Operating Displays .................................................................... 241
Overview...................................................................................................................241
Pushbuttons..............................................................................................................242
4-Selector Switch......................................................................................................243
Device Control ..........................................................................................................244
Hand/Off/Auto Switch ...............................................................................................246
Stage ........................................................................................................................247
Ramp ........................................................................................................................249
Alternator ..................................................................................................................252
Calendar Event Block ...............................................................................................256
Calendar Event Operation........................................................................................257

viii

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

Revision 12
11/08

Contents

Monitoring Displays ............................................................................. 265

Overview...................................................................................................................265
Trend Displays..........................................................................................................266
Bar Graph Displays ..................................................................................................270
Panel Displays..........................................................................................................271
Other Monitoring Displays ........................................................................................275

Maintenance........................................................................................ 277
Overview...................................................................................................................277
Parts .........................................................................................................................277

Messages............................................................................................ 279
Overview...................................................................................................................279

Appendix A - HC900-C70R Redundant Controller Displays................ 289

Overview...................................................................................................................289
Communication Ports Displays ................................................................................290
Alarms/Events/Diags ................................................................................................295
Controller Diagnostics Overview ..............................................................................296
Lead CPU Diagnostics Display ................................................................................299
Reserve CPU Diagnostics Display ...........................................................................299
Communication Ports ...............................................................................................302
Rack Diagnostics Displays .......................................................................................303

Appendix B.......................................................................................... 311

Security Bypass Procedure ......................................................................................311

Index ................................................................................................... 313

Sales and Service ............................................................................... 317

Revision 12
11/08

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

ix

Contents

Tables
Table 1 Specifications ..................................................................................................................................................5
Table 2 Mounting .......................................................................................................................................................15
Table 3 Model 1042 Power supply mounting..............................................................................................................16
Table 4 Wiring.............................................................................................................................................................17
Table 5 Standard key actions......................................................................................................................................23
Table 6 Tasks using standard keys .............................................................................................................................25
Table 7 User-assignable key actions...........................................................................................................................30
Table 8 Display areas defined details .........................................................................................................................33
Table 9 User-assignable displays................................................................................................................................36
Table 10 Top level functions of main menu ...............................................................................................................39
Table 11 Main menu tree............................................................................................................................................40
Table 12 Recipe edit/view details...............................................................................................................................44
Table 13 SPP inputs and current state ........................................................................................................................46
Table 14 Edit program details.....................................................................................................................................49
Table 15 Edit segment details.....................................................................................................................................51
Table 16 Save Program details ...................................................................................................................................52
Table 17 SPP details - Model 1042 ............................................................................................................................54
Table 18 Single SPP details - Model 559 ...................................................................................................................56
Table 19 SPP operate details - Model 559..................................................................................................................58
Table 20 SPP popup menu actions according to state ................................................................................................59
Table 21 View program events details - Model 559...................................................................................................59
Table 22 View program details- Model 559 ...............................................................................................................60
Table 23 Program load details ....................................................................................................................................60
Table 24 Edit segments details ...................................................................................................................................63
Table 25 SPS inputs and current state ........................................................................................................................65
Table 26 Edit schedule details ....................................................................................................................................67
Table 27 Edit segment details.....................................................................................................................................68
Table 28 Edit setpoints details ....................................................................................................................................69
Table 29 Edit segment events details..........................................................................................................................70
Table 30 Edit guarantee hold details...........................................................................................................................71
Table 31 Schedule save details ...................................................................................................................................72
Table 32 Edit guarantee hold limits details.................................................................................................................73
Table 33 Setpoint schedule operation details - Model 1042 .......................................................................................75
Table 34 Setpoint schedule operation details - Model 559.........................................................................................77
Table 35 Scheduler operate popup details - Model 559..............................................................................................79
Table 36 SPS popup menu actions according to state ................................................................................................80
Table 37 Schedule load details ...................................................................................................................................81
Table 38 View schedule events details .......................................................................................................................83
Table 39 View auxiliary data details ..........................................................................................................................84
Table 40 Edit segments details ...................................................................................................................................85
Table 41 Edit Sequence ..............................................................................................................................................89
Table 42 Edit Sequence Steps.....................................................................................................................................90
Table 43 Edit Step Details ..........................................................................................................................................91
Table 44 View Sequence Step Details (Model 1042 Example)..................................................................................92
Table 45 View Sequence Step Outputs (Model 1042 Example).................................................................................93
Table 46 Select State ..................................................................................................................................................94
Table 47 Sequence save details ..................................................................................................................................95
Table 48 Sequencer Operation - Model 1042 .............................................................................................................97
Table 49 Sequencer Operation - Model 559 ...............................................................................................................98
Table 50 Sequencer operate popup details - Model 559.............................................................................................99
Table 51 Schedule load details .................................................................................................................................100
Table 52 Edit Sequence Steps...................................................................................................................................101
Table 53 Edit Step Details ........................................................................................................................................102

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

Revision 12
11/08

Contents

Table 54 Loop modes ...............................................................................................................................................103

Table 55 Common loop tasks ...................................................................................................................................105
Table 56 Loop menu visibility..................................................................................................................................106
Table 57 Details of single loop trend........................................................................................................................107
Table 58 Details of Loop Accutune III (listed in order of appearance) ....................................................................108
Table 59 Details of the Tuning Status display ..........................................................................................................110
Table 60 Details of loop Accutune (not listed in order of appearance) ....................................................................112
Table 61 Details of loop tune constants....................................................................................................................113
Table 62 Details of loop control setup......................................................................................................................114
Table 63 Details of carbon loop................................................................................................................................115
Table 64 Details of loop alarm setpoints ..................................................................................................................116
Table 65 Details of loop limits .................................................................................................................................117
Table 66 Details of high output limiting...................................................................................................................118
Table 67 Loop modes ...............................................................................................................................................119
Table 68 Details of loop summary............................................................................................................................120
Table 69 Loop control details ...................................................................................................................................121
Table 70 Details of the Tuning Status display ..........................................................................................................122
Table 71 Multiloop faceplate details ........................................................................................................................124
Table 72 Single loop numeric details .......................................................................................................................125
Table 73 Details of single loop faceplate with loop trend screen .............................................................................126
Table 74 Details of loop tune constants display .......................................................................................................127
Table 75 A/M bias details.........................................................................................................................................128
Table 76 Analog Input Summary details ...................................................................................................................129
Table 77 Analog Output Summary details ................................................................................................................131
Table 78 Digital Input Summary details....................................................................................................................132
Table 79 Digital Output Summary details .................................................................................................................133
Table 80 Variable summary details ..........................................................................................................................134
Table 81 Details of alarm summary..........................................................................................................................138
Table 82 Details of controller diagnostics error status messages .............................................................................143
Table 83 I/O module diagnostics details...................................................................................................................148
Table 84 I/O Module Error Statuses .........................................................................................................................149
Table 85 Bad module details .....................................................................................................................................151
Table 86 Bad Channel details ....................................................................................................................................152
Table 87 I/O module diagnostic details ....................................................................................................................153
Table 88 Serial Port S1/Serial Port S2 (OI) diagnostics and statuses .......................................................................156
Table 89 Network Port diagnostics...........................................................................................................................157
Table 90 Expansion I/O Port diagnostics .................................................................................................................158
Table 91 Controller status details .............................................................................................................................160
Table 92 Set mode details.........................................................................................................................................160
Table 93 Controller modes defined ...........................................................................................................................161
Table 94 Write Database to Flash Memory ...............................................................................................................162
Table 95 Set time and date details .............................................................................................................................163
Table 96 Set security details .....................................................................................................................................163
Table 97 Displays and functions that can be secured ...............................................................................................165
Table 98 Set language details ...................................................................................................................................167
Table 99 Serial Port S1 diagnostic and status information ........................................................................................169
Table 100 Serial Port S1 setup parameters ................................................................................................................170
Table 101 Protocol selection versus setup parameters for the Serial Port S1 ............................................................171
Table 102 Serial Port S2 (OI) details........................................................................................................................172
Table 103 Network port details ................................................................................................................................173
Table 104 View network host details ........................................................................................................................174
Table 105 Host Connection Diagnostics Status Indicators ........................................................................................175
Table 106 View peer connection details....................................................................................................................175
Table 107 View network peer statistics details..........................................................................................................176
Table 108 Peer Connection Status Indicators ............................................................................................................177

Revision 12
11/08

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

xi

Contents

Table 109 Expansion I/O Port details ........................................................................................................................179

Table 110 Modbus Slave Devices display.................................................................................................................180
Table 111 Modbus Slave Details display ..................................................................................................................181
Table 112 File name selection details.......................................................................................................................183
Table 113 Self tests details .......................................................................................................................................184
Table 114 Calibrate AI channel details.....................................................................................................................187
Table 115 Example of AI calibration .......................................................................................................................188
Table 116 Calibrate CJ temp details .........................................................................................................................189
Table 117 Example of CJ calibration ........................................................................................................................190
Table 118 Restore AI factory calibration details ......................................................................................................191
Table 119 Restore CJ factory calibration details ......................................................................................................192
Table 120 Calibrate AO channel details ...................................................................................................................195
Table 121 Example of AO calibration.......................................................................................................................196
Table 122 Restore AO factory calibration details.....................................................................................................197
Table 123 Motor Setup Procedure ............................................................................................................................199
Table 124 Motor Calibration Entry Procedure .........................................................................................................200
Table 125 Calibration Errors .....................................................................................................................................201
Table 126 Auto Calibration Procedure ....................................................................................................................202
Table 127 Semi-Auto Calibration Procedure.............................................................................................................203
Table 128 Hand Calibration Procedure ....................................................................................................................205
Table 129 List disk files details ................................................................................................................................209
Table 130 Load/store profiles details........................................................................................................................211
Table 131 Load/store schedules details ....................................................................................................................213
Table 132 Load/store sequence details .....................................................................................................................214
Table 133 Load/store recipes details ........................................................................................................................216
Table 134 Format disk details...................................................................................................................................218
Table 135 Set mode details.......................................................................................................................................219
Table 136 Controller modes defined ........................................................................................................................219
Table 137 Data storage point factors ........................................................................................................................222
Table 138 Preinitializing ZIP Disk - Model 1042 only ............................................................................................224
Table 139 Storage modes .........................................................................................................................................225
Table 140 View storage status details.......................................................................................................................231
Table 141 Storage controls details............................................................................................................................233
Table 142 View storage setting details .....................................................................................................................236
Table 143 Log off display details .............................................................................................................................239
Table 144 Pushbutton details....................................................................................................................................242
Table 145 Four selector switch details .....................................................................................................................243
Table 146 Device control display details..................................................................................................................244
Table 147 Edit device display details .......................................................................................................................245
Table 148 Hand/Off/Auto switch display details......................................................................................................246
Table 149 Set HOA switch state display details.......................................................................................................246
Table 150 Stage operator display details ..................................................................................................................247
Table 151 Edit stage display details .........................................................................................................................248
Table 152 Ramp operator display details..................................................................................................................249
Table 153 Edit ramp sub-menu display details.........................................................................................................250
Table 154 Edit ramp display details .........................................................................................................................251
Table 155 Alternator operator display details...........................................................................................................253
Table 156 Edit alternator display details ..................................................................................................................254
Table 157 Edit output sequence display details ........................................................................................................255
Table 158 Calendar Event Operator Display details..................................................................................................257
Table 159 Calendar Event Block Menu details .........................................................................................................258
Table 160 SELECT GROUP FOR EDITING menu details ......................................................................................258
Table 161 EDIT EVENT SETPOINTS menu details...............................................................................................259
Table 162 EDIT EVENT SETPOINT display details ..............................................................................................260
Table 163 SET ACTIVE SETPOINT GROUP menu details ...................................................................................261

xii

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

Revision 12
11/08

Contents

Table 164 EDIT SPECIAL DAYS menu details......................................................................................................262

Table 165 EDIT SPECIAL DAY menu details ........................................................................................................263
Table 166 VIEW SPECIAL DAYS EVENT SETUP display details.......................................................................263
Table 167 Example of trend details ..........................................................................................................................267
Table 168 Trend menu..............................................................................................................................................268
Table 169 Sampling rates of trends ..........................................................................................................................269
Table 170 Bar graph display details .........................................................................................................................270
Table 171 4-point panel details.................................................................................................................................272
Table 172 Multi-point panel details..........................................................................................................................273
Table 173 Overview details ......................................................................................................................................274
Table 174 Parts .........................................................................................................................................................277
Table 175 Messages..................................................................................................................................................279
Table 176 Location of Redundant Controller Displays .............................................................................................289
Table 177 Communication Ports Diagnostics and Statuses......................................................................................291
Table 178 Network Ports E1 and E2 display ............................................................................................................293
Table 179 Network Port E1 and Network Port E2 Display details...........................................................................294
Table 180 Details of Controller Diagnostics Overview status messages..................................................................296
Table 181 Details of Lead or Reserve CPU diagnostics error status messages ........................................................299
Table 182 Details of Rack diagnostics error status messages...................................................................................303

Revision 12
11/08

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

xiii

Contents

Figures
Figure 1 559-T12 operator interface.............................................................................................................................1
Figure 2 559-T4 operator interface...............................................................................................................................1
Figure 3 1042 operator interface...................................................................................................................................1
Figure 4 Overview example of HC900 architecture .....................................................................................................4
Figure 5 Cutout dimensions for bracket mounting - Model 559 Type 12.....................................................................9
Figure 6 Mounting in a side enclosure - Model 559 Type 12.....................................................................................10
Figure 7 Panel mounting with brackets - Model 559 Type 12....................................................................................11
Figure 8 Cutout for panel mounting with screws - Model 559 Type 12......................................................................12
Figure 9 Panel mounting with screws - Model 559 Type 12 ......................................................................................13
Figure 10 Model 559 Type 4 operator interface panel cutout.....................................................................................14
Figure 11 Panel mounting dimensions - Model 1042 ..................................................................................................15
Figure 12 Startup display............................................................................................................................................20
Figure 13 View of a 559 operator interface ................................................................................................................21
Figure 14 View of 1042 OI.........................................................................................................................................22
Figure 15 Model 559 Display key label dimensions...................................................................................................32
Figure 16 Model 1042 Display Group key label dimensions .....................................................................................32
Figure 17 Display areas defined .................................................................................................................................33
Figure 18 Display organization ..................................................................................................................................35
Figure 19 Example of saving a program on Model 1042 ...........................................................................................52
Figure 20 SPP operation - Model 1042 ......................................................................................................................54
Figure 21 Single SPP operation - Model 559 .............................................................................................................56
Figure 22 SPP operate popup menu - Model 559 .......................................................................................................58
Figure 23 View program events - Model 559.............................................................................................................59
Figure 24 View program details - Model 559.............................................................................................................60
Figure 25 Example of loading a program from a profile number - Model 1042 ........................................................61
Figure 26 Example of loading a program from a profile list - Model 1042................................................................62
Figure 27 Example of saving a schedule ....................................................................................................................72
Figure 28 Setpoint schedule operation - Model 1042 .................................................................................................75
Figure 29 Setpoint schedule operation - Model 559 ...................................................................................................77
Figure 30 Scheduler operate popup menu - Model 559..............................................................................................79
Figure 31 Example of loading a schedule from schedule number ..............................................................................81
Figure 32 Example of loading a schedule from schedule list .....................................................................................82
Figure 33 View schedule events .................................................................................................................................83
Figure 34 View auxiliary data ....................................................................................................................................84
Figure 35 Edit segments .............................................................................................................................................85
Figure 36 Edit Sequence Steps (Model 1042 Example) .............................................................................................90
Figure 37 Sequencer Operation Display - Model 1042 ..............................................................................................97
Figure 38 Sequencer Operation Display - Model 559 ................................................................................................98
Figure 39 Sequencer operate popup menu - Model 559 .............................................................................................99
Figure 40 Edit Sequence Steps .................................................................................................................................101
Figure 41 IMAN loop mode .....................................................................................................................................103
Figure 42 Single loop trend ......................................................................................................................................107
Figure 43 Multiloop faceplate (Example of 8 Loop faceplate for Model 1042 only)...............................................124
Figure 44 Single loop numeric .................................................................................................................................125
Figure 45 Single loop faceplate with loop trend screen............................................................................................126
Figure 46 A/M bias...................................................................................................................................................128
Figure 47 Alarm group display.................................................................................................................................139
Figure 48 Event summary.........................................................................................................................................141
Figure 49 Controller diagnostics ..............................................................................................................................143
Figure 50 I/O module diagnostics - Model 1042 view .............................................................................................147
Figure 51 I/O module diagnostics - Model 559 view ...............................................................................................147

xiv

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

Revision 12
11/08

Contents

Figure 52 Panel diagnostic log .................................................................................................................................154

Figure 53 Communication ports ................................................................................................................................155
Figure 54 Communications ports display .................................................................................................................168
Figure 55 View host connections (Model 1042 example*) ......................................................................................174
Figure 56 Model 1042 view network host connections ............................................................................................179
Figure 57 Model 559 view network host connections ..............................................................................................179
Figure 58 File name selection...................................................................................................................................183
Figure 59 Self tests ...................................................................................................................................................184
Figure 60 Brightness display ....................................................................................................................................207
Figure 61 Relationship between disk, profile memory, and setpoint programmer ...................................................210
Figure 62 Relationship between disk, schedule memory, and scheduler...................................................................212
Figure 63 Relationship between disk, sequence memory, and sequencer ................................................................214
Figure 64 Required enabled controls for storage......................................................................................................226
Figure 65 Storage control menu with all enablers shown.........................................................................................227
Figure 66 Trend storage: enable conditions..............................................................................................................228
Figure 67 Alarm/event storage: enable conditions ...................................................................................................228
Figure 68 Point log storage: enable conditions.........................................................................................................229
Figure 69 View storage status...................................................................................................................................231
Figure 70 Storage controls........................................................................................................................................233
Figure 71 Initialize storage disk ...............................................................................................................................234
Figure 72 Load storage settings................................................................................................................................235
Figure 73 View storage settings ...............................................................................................................................236
Figure 74 Start new storage settings .........................................................................................................................237
Figure 75 Store storage settings................................................................................................................................238
Figure 76 Pushbutton menu with function keys .......................................................................................................242
Figure 77 Four selector switch display .....................................................................................................................243
Figure 78 Four selector switch popup menu.............................................................................................................243
Figure 79 Device control display..............................................................................................................................244
Figure 80 Edit device display ...................................................................................................................................245
Figure 81 Hand/Off/Auto switch display..................................................................................................................246
Figure 82 Stage operator display ..............................................................................................................................247
Figure 83 Ramp operator display .............................................................................................................................249
Figure 84 Alternator operator displays .....................................................................................................................252
Figure 85 Trend displays ..........................................................................................................................................266
Figure 86 Vertical trend at 2X zoom ........................................................................................................................269
Figure 87 Bar graph displays....................................................................................................................................270
Figure 88 Panel display ............................................................................................................................................271
Figure 89 4-point panel display ................................................................................................................................272
Figure 90 Multi-point panel display .........................................................................................................................273
Figure 91 Panel meter...............................................................................................................................................273
Figure 92 Overview ..................................................................................................................................................274
Figure 93 Help (messages) display...........................................................................................................................275
Figure 94 Main Menu ................................................................................................................................................289
Figure 95 Communication Ports Display...................................................................................................................290
Figure 96 Alarm/Events/Diag Menu..........................................................................................................................295
Figure 97 Controller Diagnostics Overview .............................................................................................................296
Figure 98 Lead or Reserve CPU diagnostics .............................................................................................................299
Figure 99 Rack Diagnostics Display .........................................................................................................................303

Revision 12
11/08

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

xv

Introduction
Overview
Whats in this guide
This guide contains instructions on assembly, installation, wiring, and operation of the 559, and 1042
Series Operator Interface, shown in Figure 1, Figure 2 and Figure 3.

F1

ALARM

F1

F2

ALARM

F2

F3
F3

F4

ESC

F4

ESC

KB

Figure 2 559-T4 operator interface

Figure 1 559-T12 operator interface

Honeywell
F1

F2
F3
F4

ALARM

ESC

Figure 3 1042 operator interface

Revision 12
11/08

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

Introduction
CE Conformity (Europe)

Typical readers of this guide

The typical users of this guide are:

the technician who installs the OI,

the engineer who configures the OI,

the operator who views/controls/monitors the process.

What you can do with the OI

The OI lets you perform these tasks:

Monitor and control a process.

Load/Store/Run Recipes, Profiles, Schedules, Sequences, and Unit Configurations.

Display various process data such as trends, alarms, diagnostics, setpoint profiles, and control loops.

Store process data to disk.

CE Conformity (Europe)
This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of the following European Council
Directives: 73/23/EEC, the Low Voltage Directive, and 89/336/EEC, the EMC Directive. Conformity of
this product with any other CE Mark Directive(s) shall not be assumed.
ATTENTION
The emission limits of EN 50081-2 are designed to provide reasonable protection against
harmful interference when this equipment is operated in an industrial environment. Operation
of this equipment in a residential area may cause harmful interference. This equipment
generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and may cause interference to radio
and television reception when the equipment is used closer than 30 meters to the antenna(e).
In special cases, when highly susceptible apparatus is used in close proximity, the user may
have to employ additional mitigating measures to further reduce the electromagnetic
emissions of this equipment.

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

Revision 12
11/08

Overview of Architecture
Description of Components
The OI is an optional component of a control system that contains:

Controller - As the heart of the system, this supports the following features.

Control loops

Analog and digital I/O

Setpoint programming

Setpoint scheduler

Sequencer

Recipe management

Start/stop controls

Function blocks

Fast logic.

Hybrid Control Designer - An external PC based configuration tool that is used to graphically
configure the control strategies used by the Controller. It is also used to configure displays and function
keys on the OI. Control strategy configurations are downloaded from Hybrid Control Designer to the
Controller Module through communications or are loaded via the disk drive on the OI.

Operator Interface - Provides the operator interface for the Controller Module. It lets the operator

Operate the process through various menus and displays,

Monitor the process with trends and other graphical displays,

View and acknowledge alarms.

See Figure 4.

Revision 12
11/08

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

Overview of Architecture
Description of Components

Hybrid Control Designer

Control Strategy Configuration
Operator Interface Display Configuration
Operator Interface Function Key Configuration
Configuration Upload/Download
Test and Debug Control Strategies

Controller
Integrate Loops of Control with
Digital I/O
Setpoint Programming
Setpoint Scheduling
Sequencing
Alarm Processing
PID Control, Advanced Control,
and Auto-Tuning/Fuzzy Logic
Boolean Logic Via Function Blocks
Advanced Math Computations

Honeywell
F1

F2

ALARM

Operator Interface - Example is Model 1042 View

F3

F4
ESC

Monitor and Control the Process

Load/Store/Run Recipes, Profiles, Data Storage Sets,
Provide organized, visual presentation of information
Data Storage

Figure 4 Overview example of HC900 architecture

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

Revision 12
11/08

Specifications/Mounting/Wiring/Startup
Specifications
Table 1 Specifications
Design
CE Conformity (Europe)

This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of the following

European Council Directives: 73/23/EEC, the Low Voltage Directive, and 89/336/EEC,
the EMC Directive. Conformity of this product with any other CE Mark Directive(s)
shall not be assumed. EN61326: Electrical Equipment for Measurement, Control and
Laboratory use. EMC requirements.

Installation Category
(Overvoltage Category)

Category II: Energy-consuming equipment supplied from the fixed installation

(Multiloop Process Controller). Local level appliances, and Industrial Control
Equipment. (EN 61010-1)

Pollution Degree

Pollution Degree 2: Normally non-conductive pollution with occasional conductivity

caused by condensation. (ref. IEC 664-1)

EMC Classification

Group 1, Class A, ISM Equipment

Operator Interface
Components

Model 559
includes a Passive color LCD, 320 x 240 pixels ( VGA), full-function front panel keys,
3.5 1.44 MB diskette for file load and store functions, data storage, and an optional
QWERTY keyboard port.
Model 1042
Includes a TFT Active Matrix Color LCD, 640 x 480 pixels (Std VGA), full-function front
panel keys, standard 3.5 1.44 MB disk for file load and store functions, data storage,
QWERTY keyboard port, and an optional 100 mb Zip Drive.
The OI software provides a view into the controller, and allows the user to monitor and
control the process through predefined screens.

Power

External 24 Vdc +/- 10% @ 1.0 amp minimum

Enclosure

Material:
Model 559 Type 12:
Structural Foam (Glass filled polycarbonate, UL 94V-1)
Model 559-Type 4:
304 Stainless Steel
Model 1042 Type 4:
Bezel - 20 % glass filled polycarbonate (GE Lexan 3412R)
Chassis - Zinc plated steel with Yellow Chromate coating
Dimensions:
Model 559 Type 12:
Inches: 11.3 wide x 5.7 high x 5.4 deep
Millimeters: 288 wide x 144 high x 136 deep
Model 559-Type 4
Inches: 9.4 wide x 6.25 high x 5.5 deep (3.5" + 2" for Plug and Cabling)
Millimeters: 240 wide x 159 high x 148 deep
Model 1042 Type 4
Inches: 15.8 wide x 9.8 high x 7.2 deep
Millimeters: 400 wide x 248 high x 183 deep

System Interconnection

Revision 12
11/08

Connected to controller through its dedicated RS485 port.

Maximum Distance Between Controller and OI: 601 meters (2000 feet.)
Cable Type: 2 conductor with shield, Belden 9271 or equivalent
Cable termination: 3 position connector at the controller end; screw type terminal strip
required at OI end

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

Specifications/Mounting/Wiring/Startup
Specifications

Performance

Average Screen Update Rate: 1.0 seconds

Average Data Entry Response Time: 1.5 seconds
Average Screen Call-up Time: 1.5 seconds

Product Classification

Class I: Fixed, Permanently Connected, Industrial Control Equipment with protective

earthing (grounding). (EN 61010-1)

Mounting

559 Type 12: DIN (288 x 144) compatible panel mounted. May be panel mounted (IP
54, NEMA 12) in indoor non-hazardous locations. This must be panel mounted for a
Type 12 rating.
559 Type 4: Panel mounted indoor only
Model 1042 Type 4: Panel mounted only. Indoor/outdoor.

Display

Model 559
Type: Color (passive LCD), 320 x 240 pixels resolution
Viewing Area: 119 mm wide x 90 mm high (4.7 inches wide x 3.5 inches high)
Model 1042
Type: TFT Active Matrix Color LCD, 640 x 480 pixels resolution
Viewing Area: 211 mm wide x 158 mm high (8.3 inches wide x 6.2 inches high)

Back-Light

Cold Cathode Fluorescent Lamp (CFL)

10K Hours to half brightness

Front Panel

Model 559
Keys: Membrane22 keys
101-key AT Keyboard: Plug-in connector with front access (optional rear access on
559 Type 4 model)
Model 1042
Keys: Membrane37 keys
101-key AT Keyboard: Plug-in connector with rear access

Disk Drive

Format: 3.5 inch, 1.44 megabytes

Model 559: Standard
Model 1041: Standard (120mb Zip Drive is optional)

Certifications

Model 1042 CSA C22.2 No. 1010-1, Safety Requirements for Electrical Equipment for
Measurement, Control, and Laboratory Equipment, Part 1: General Requirements.
UL 3121-1, Process Control Equipment
FM Class I, Div. 2 groups A, B, C, D
Environmental Conditions

Ambient Operating
Temperature

Model 559 Type 12

Model 559 Type 4

Model 1042 Type 4

32 F to 122 F
0 C to 50 C

41 F to 126 F
5 C to 52 C

Floppy drive:
32 F to 122 F
0 C to 50 C
Zip drive:
32 F to 113 F
0 C to 45 C

Ambient Storage
Temperature

4 F to 140 F
20 C to 60 C

4 F to 140 F
20 C to 60 C

Ambient Operating
Relative Humidity

10 % to 90 % RH
non-condensing

10 % to 90 % RH
non-condensing

20 % to 80 % RH
non-condensing

Ambient Storage
Relative Humidity

5 % to 95 % RH
non-condensing

5 % to 95 % RH
non-condensing

5 % to 90 % RH
non-condensing

4 F to 140 F
20 C to 60 C

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

Revision 12
11/08

Specifications/Mounting/Wiring/Startup
Specifications

Revision 12
11/08

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

Specifications/Mounting/Wiring/Startup
Site Preparation

Site Preparation
The cable that connects the OI to the controller module contains low voltages. Keep the cable away from
high voltage wires that can cause interference.

OI Mounting
The Operator Interface comes available in three models: Model 559 (type 12 enclosure),
Model 559 (type 4 enclosure), and Model 1042. Refer to the section for your model.
Model 559 (Type 12)
The 559-T12 Operator Interface case can be mounted the following ways.

Panel-mounted using brackets

Panel-mounted using screws

Whichever mounting method you choose, the supplied mounting kit contains the following hardware to
secure the Operator Interface case.
Part

Quantity

M6 Lock washer

M6 x 8 mm/0.312 long hex head screw

12.7 mm/0.500 long Plastite #6 screw

8 mm/0.312 long Plastite #6 screw

Mounting bracket

Procedures for each mounting method are given on the following pages.

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

Revision 12
11/08

Specifications/Mounting/Wiring/Startup
OI Mounting

Panel mounting with brackets

The 559-T12 Operator Interface case can be flush mounted in a cutout and secured using brackets supplied
with the mounting kit.
Step

Action
At the appropriate mounting location, make a rectangular cutout in the panel measuring
10.625 0.030 inches by 5.190 0.030 inches (269.875 0.76 by 131.825 0.76
millimeters). See Figure 5.
If you are mounting the Operator Interface to a side enclosure as in Figure 6, make sure the
cutout allows for clearance from the enclosures internal panel. The left side of the rear of
the Operator Interface is offset to the right to accommodate that internal panel.

Orient the Operator Interface properly and slide it into the cutout from the front of the panel.
Support the panel as shown in steps 3 and 4.

Refer to Figure 7. From the back of the panel, attach a mounting bracket to the top and
bottom of the interface case. Insert the provided M6 hex head screw and lock washer
through the slotted hole in each bracket. Leave the screws slightly loose so you can adjust
the brackets.

While holding the Operator Interface firmly against the panel, slide each bracket against the
back of the panel and tighten the screws.

10.625
269.875

5.190
131.825

inches
Dimensions = _________
millimeters

Figure 5 Cutout dimensions for bracket mounting - Model 559 Type 12

Revision 12
11/08

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

Specifications/Mounting/Wiring/Startup
OI Mounting

Operator
Interface

Enclosure
containing
Operator Interface
and
Controller Module

Process
being
controlled

Figure 6 Mounting in a side enclosure - Model 559 Type 12

10

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

Revision 12
11/08

Specifications/Mounting/Wiring/Startup
OI Mounting

Mounting
Panel

Install Mounting Brackets

on top and bottom of case

Insert screw in slot

Rear View
Figure 7 Panel mounting with brackets - Model 559 Type 12
Panel mounting with screws
The 559-T12 Operator Interface can also be panel mounted using screws.
ATTENTION
Make sure you have a clearance of at least 5.35 inches (135.9 millimeters) behind the panel to
accommodate the case of the Model 559-T12 Operator Interface.

Step

Revision 12
11/08

Action

At the appropriate mounting location, make a rectangular cutout in the panel measuring
10.625 0.030 inches by 5.190 0.030 inches (269.875 0.76 by 131.825 0.76
millimeters). See Figure 8.

Measure and make four cutouts in the panel to accommodate the mounting screws. Refer to
Figure 9 for dimensions.

Orient the Operator Interface properly and slide it into the cutout from the front of the panel.
See Figure 9.

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

11

Specifications/Mounting/Wiring/Startup
OI Mounting

Step

Action
Orient the Operator Interface case against the mounting surface and attach using 4 screws
from the rear.
For panels up to 3 mm (0.125) thick, use 9.5 mm (0.375) long Plastite screws provided.
For panels 3 mm (0.125) to 6.4 mm (0.25) thick, use 12.5 mm (0.5) long Plastite screws
provided.
For panels greater than 6.4 mm (0.25) thick, tap the case holes with M3.5 or #6-32 threads
and use screws of appropriate length.

Position the Operator Interface firmly against the panel and tighten the screws.

10.808
274.52

5.190
131.825

10.625
269.875

inches
Dimensions = _________
millimeters

3.67 + .03
93.218 + 0.76

0.76
19.3

0.156
(4 places)
3.96

Figure 8 Cutout for panel mounting with screws - Model 559 Type 12

12

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

Revision 12
11/08

Specifications/Mounting/Wiring/Startup
OI Mounting

Panel

5.35
135.9

5.669
144

Operator
Panel
Case

3.67 + 0.15
93.2 + 3.8

inches
Dimensions = _________
millimeters

Figure 9 Panel mounting with screws - Model 559 Type 12

Revision 12
11/08

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

13

Specifications/Mounting/Wiring/Startup
OI Mounting

Model 559 (Type 4)

The 559-T4 Operator Interface must be panel mounted using the supplied hardware.
ATTENTION
Make sure you have a clearance of at least 5.5 inches (140 millimeters) behind the panel to
accommodate the case of the Model 559 Type 4 Operator Interface.

Step

Action

If installing new button label below the display, do so now before continuing this procedure.
See Relabeling Display Group Keys (page 31) for details.

See Figure 10. Make a cutout in the panel as shown. Drill 12 holes as shown.

Install gasket over the 12 threaded studs on the front.

Install spacers on each of the 12 studs. If there are 14 spacers (2 extra), install one per
stud.

Insert Operator Interface into the panel, left side (latch side) first.

Have a helper hold the unit snugly against the panel. Attach the 12 nuts to the 12 threaded
studs.

Tighten nuts to 12 inch-lbs. (1 ft.-lb.)

2.23
56.6

2.23
56.6

2.23
56.6

0.189
4.8

2.23
56.6

2.87
72.8
5.25
133.3
2.87
72.8
0.242
6.15

0.241
6.12

8.44
214.3
Dimensions =

inches
millimeters

Figure 10 Model 559 Type 4 operator interface panel cutout

14

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

Revision 12
11/08

Specifications/Mounting/Wiring/Startup
OI Mounting

Model 1042
The 1042 OI case can be panel mounted using the supplied clamps.
ATTENTION
Make sure you have a clearance of at least 7.2 inches (183 millimeters) behind the panel to
accommodate the case of the 1042 OI.
The 1042 OI must be panel mounted in a suitable enclosure to maintain the Type 4 enclosure
rating. Failure to follow these mounting instructions could impair the Type 4 enclosure rating.

Table 2 Mounting
Step

Action

If installing new button label below the display, do so now before continuing this procedure.
See Relabeling Display Group Keys (page 31) for details.

See Figure 11. Make a cutout in the panel using cutout dimensions shown.

Carefully assemble the gasket into the groove molded into the back of the bezel. The
adhesive side should contact the bezel.

Insert OI into the panel. Have a helper hold the unit snugly against the panel.

Attach the 18 mounting brackets as shown in Figure 11. Tighten the screws against the
panel thereby compressing the foam gasket. Continue tightening until the back of the plastic
bezel just makes contact with the panel.

Dimensions =

inches
millimeters

Panel
Max. thickness
7/16
11.1

Panel cutout width:

14.88 0.03
Front 1042 dimensions 378.0 0.8
(W x H x D)
15.8 x 9.8 x 1.1
400 x 248 x 27

Attach 18 mounting brackets

as shown. Tighten screws
against panel until front gasket
forms a watertight seal.

Gasket between
bezel and panel

Panel cutout height:

8.18 0.03
207.8 0.8

Rear 1042 dimensions (W x H x D)

15.9 x 9.2 x 7.2
403 x 233 x 183
Dimensions include mounting brackets

Figure 11 Panel mounting dimensions - Model 1042

Revision 12
11/08

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

15

Specifications/Mounting/Wiring/Startup
Wiring

Wiring
EXPLOSION HAZARD
Do not disconnect equipment unless power has been switched off or the area is
known to be non-hazardous. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

Power requirement
The OI runs off an external 24 Vdc power supply. Use optional Honeywell part # 51452041-501 or any
UL/CE approved 24 Vdc 1.0A minimum supply.
Power supply mounting
You can mount the optional Honeywell power supply to the rear of the 1042 OI (Table 3). For the 559 OI,
the Honeywell power supply must be mounted separately. Otherwise, provide a 24Vdc power supply and
proceed to Table 4 Wiring.
Table 3 Model 1042 Power supply mounting
Step

Action
Attach rail:
On the left rear of the OI (below the wiring label), locate the two threaded holes. Using the 2
4M x 6mm screws provided, attach the DIN rail with the flanged edges facing out (see 1 and 2
in figure).

16

Attach power supply:

Hold power supply over the rail, with tab (see 3 in figure) facing away from wiring label on
OI.

Engage the left side (as you look at figure) of the power supply with the rail, engaging the
tabs on the power supplys bottom left side.

With tab (see 3 in figure) pulled out (use a slot screwdriver), lower the right side onto the rail
and press down hard until it clicks into place.

Push tab in until it locks.

Grasp the power supply and rock it back and forth to check for snugness against the rail.

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

Revision 12
11/08

Specifications/Mounting/Wiring/Startup
Wiring

Step

Action

With AC supply power disconnected, connect 3 AC supply wires (ground, positive, and neutral)
to the corresponding terminals of the mounted power supply. There are two screws per
terminaluse either screw.

Using 22-gage wire, connect wires to the mounted power supplys COM (-) and 24V (+)
terminals. These wires will connect later to the OI.

Connections
The Honeywell cable that connects the Controller to the OI is 50 (15.42 m) long and can be cut to length.
It is shielded to protect from noise. Up to 2000 (601 m) separation can be obtained by using a Belden
cable #9271 or equivalent.
Table 4 Wiring
Step

Action
Connect RS485 signal wiring to the controllers 3-position terminal block as shown. If using
redundant controller, repeat for each CPUs RS485 port.
Note 1: If you are using a Honeywell OI (OI-559 or OI-1042) it must be connected to Serial Port
S2 to insure proper operation of the OI. Also note that only one Honeywell OI may be
connected to the controller (you cannot connect a second OI-559 or OI-1042 to Serial Port S1).
Note 2: Wiring is available from Honeywell or from third-party suppliers.

Communications Shield
(Connect at controller only.
Do not connect at OI.)
(-)

(To Operator
Interface)
Controller
Connector

(+)

Orient the 10-position terminal block as shown (terminals at bottom), the left terminal is RX-, the
right terminal is V+. Connect wires as shown in terminal assignments (next page). (Note:
Disregard wire colors shown on the back of the 1042 OI.)
Jumper RX- to TXJumper RX+ to TX+

1
RX-

Jumper RX- to TXJumper RX+ to TX+

10
V+

Comm Signal:
1 (RX-)
2 (RX+)
3 (Shielddo not connect)

24 Vdc Power
(+)
(-)

From controller
From power supply

Connection from non-redundant controller

Revision 12
11/08

V+

RXComm Signal:
RXRX+
Shield do not connect

24 Vdc Power
(+)
(-)

From CPU-A
From CPU-B

From power supply

Connection from redundant controller

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

17

Specifications/Mounting/Wiring/Startup
Wiring

Step

Action
Connector block terminal assignments (left to right)
Signal Name

Signal Name

Receive
Receive +
Unused (do not connect)
Transmit
Transmit +
24VDC return
Unused
Unused
Unused
+24 Vdc

Receive
Receive +
Unused (do not connect)
Transmit
Transmit +
24VDC return
Unused
Unused
Unused
+24 Vdc

For CE compliance attach a ferrite clamp (Honeywell Part No. 51191902-101) close to the
terminals (within 1/2"). The ferrite clamp should overlap the cable shield that encloses the wires.
To prevent the clamp from sliding, attach cable ties (Honeywell Part No. 089037) snugly against
each end of the clamp.
Trim the cable ties, leaving a "tail" of approximately one inch. (example is Model 1042)

RX-

V+
RX-

V+

Ferrite Clamp
Ferrite Clamp

Cable Ties

Non-redundant controller

18

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

Cable Ties

Redundant controller

Revision 12
11/08

Specifications/Mounting/Wiring/Startup
Wiring

Step

Action

Attached the assembled wiring connectors to the OI as shown. Use keyboard connector for
data entry with optional AT keyboard. OI models have different connector orientations (below).

Model 1042

Pin 1

Pin 10

Power and Signal

Keyboard

559-T12
Operator Interface
Rear

559-T4
Operator Interface
Rear

Pin 1

Pin 10

Pin 10

Pin 1
Connector for
power and signal

Revision 12
11/08

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

19

Specifications/Mounting/Wiring/Startup
Noise Protection

Noise Protection
See document 51-52-05-01, How to Apply Digital Instrumentation in Severe Electrical Noise
Environments.

Startup
After connecting the Controller and OI and applying power to the Controller, the startup display appears.

YOUR TEXT
HERE
SUPPORTING TEXT LINE 1
SUPPORTING TEXT LINE 2
SUPPORTING TEXT LINE 3
SUPPORTING TEXT LINE 4

Figure 12 Startup display

What to do if the OI has difficulty starting up
During power up the OI may get stuck in a cycle of alternating between the startup screen and shutting
down. This problem may be caused by a weak capacitor or it may occur after power has been disconnected
for an unusually long time. Long time depends on the condition of the capacitor, the ambient
temperature, or other factors. To correct this problem you must manually perform a cold start. A cold
start clears the OI memory.
Performing a cold start
Step

Action

Turn the OIs power off.

Press and hold the ESC key.

While holding the ESC key turn the OIs power on. The startup screen should appear normally.
ATTENTION
If the OI has been powered OFF for more than 18 hours, the default start-up screen
will display instead of the user-configured text until communications has started to the
controller and the user-configured text is uploaded.

20

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

Revision 12
11/08

Keys and Displays Overview

Overview of Keys
The Operator Interface (Figure 13) and (Figure 14) consists of standard and custom keys, a floppy drive
(optional Zip Drive for Model 1042) for storing and loading data, and an optional keyboard connector for
data entry through an AT keyboard.

Display

Display Function Keys

( pushbuttons)

Keys (top to bottom)

Help
Details
Decrement/Down
Enter
Page Down

Main Menu
Auto/Manual
Next Digit
Escape

F1

Alarms
Optional 3.5
Tab Forward
Floppy drive
Increment/Up (
rear access on
Enter
Model 559 - T4
Page Up

ALARM

F2
F3
F4

ESC

5
KB

Keys 1 - 5: Access up to 10

Displays each

Keyboard connector
(rear access on the OI-559 T4 model )

Figure 13 View of a 559 operator interface

You can attach an AT keyboard to the front for easier data entry (rear access on the OI-559 T4 model).
Simply plug the keyboard into the port under the floppy drive. See Table 5 for key equivalents.

Revision 12
11/08

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

21

Keys and Displays Overview

Overview of Keys

3.5 floppy drive (standard)

100 Mbyte Zip drive (optional)

F1 - F4 keys (pushbuttons)

Honeywell
F1

F2
F3

Numeric entry

F4

ALARM

Menu - Help - Alarm

Auto/Manual - Detail - Tab
Left Arrow - Decrement - Increment

ESC

Display Group keys

Escape - Enter

Page Up
Page Down

Figure 14 View of 1042 OI

You can attach an AT keyboard to the rear of Model 1042 for easier data entry. Simply plug the keyboard
into the port. See Table 5 for key equivalents.

22

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

Revision 12
11/08

Keys and Displays Overview

Standard Keys

Standard Keys
Overview
The appearance and action of the standard keys are given in Table 5. Refer to this table for direction with
any display. Unless otherwise noted, standard keys always behave as described here regardless of which
display or menu is displayed.
You can attach an AT keyboard for easier data entry. Just plug the keyboard into the port. See Table 5.
Table 5 Standard key actions
Key

Key Name

AT
keyboard
equivalent

Menu

Home

Action

Accesses the Main Menu.

See Overview of Displays (page 33).

Help

End

Accesses the Help Text Displays, which contain help on

various procedures. See Other Monitoring Displays (page

275).
Alarm

F3

From the Alarm Group Display, this key acknowledges all

Alarms on the page.

ALARM

See NOTE: The Alarm Summary Display for Model 559 consists
of two pages. Use the page Up and Down keys to view up to 3
pages of 30 Alarm Groups.
Auto/Manual

F2

On a loop display, toggles the selected loop between

Automatic and Manual modes.

Detail

F1

On Loop displays, moves cursor to SP and Output.

On Trend and Panel Displays, accesses a submenu

containing further detailed functions.

On Alarm Group display, moves cursor down a column.

Tab

Tab

On multiple Loop displays, moves cursor between the loop

tags on the display. Press Enter to access a more detailed

display related to the selected loop tag.
On Alarm Group display, moves cursor across a row.

Left Arrow

When cursor is on a value or setting that can be changed, this

key moves cursor one position to the left, eventually wrapping

around to the rightmost position.
Decrement

Moves cursor down a menu or list of choices. Selecting down

on the last menu item sets the focus on the first menu item.
When cursor is on a data entry field, decrements value or

state.
On a trend display, scrolls trend backward in time.

Revision 12
11/08

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

23

Keys and Displays Overview

Standard Keys

Key

Key Name

Action

AT
keyboard
equivalent

Moves cursor up a menu or list of choices. Selecting up on the

Increment

first menu item sets the focus on the last menu item.
On a selected data entry field, increments value or state.
On a trend display, scrolls trend forward in time.

Escape

Esc

Backs you out of the current display or cursor position to the

previous one. Any data entered or changes you made are not
saved, except changes to a loops live values (output and
setpoint value).

ESC

Enter

Enter

Selects the field highlighted by the green cursor, taking you to

another display or enabling you to change the fields value or

setting.
Saves a new value or setting.

Page Down

Page
Down

Accesses the next page of a multi-page display.

Accesses the next display in the sequence of the Display

Group key.
Page Up

Page
Up

Accesses the previous page of a multi-page display.

Accesses the previous display in the sequence of the Display

Group key.
0

thru
9

Numeric

Same
keys

Facilitates easy data entry for setpoints, variables, setpoint

programs, and other numeric setup parameters

Model
1042 Only

24

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

Revision 12
11/08

Keys and Displays Overview

Common Tasks Using Standard Keys

Common Tasks Using Standard Keys

Table 6 Tasks using standard keys
Task

Procedure

To see the Main Menu

Press Menu
To move the cursor up or down any menu or list

To see helpful text

Press Increment
or Decrement
.
Menu wrap is enabled for menus that do not scroll and
disabled for scrolling menus.
Press Help

To select a menu item to view its submenu or choices

or value

With the cursor on the desired item, press Enter

.
The submenu appears, or the cursor moves to the right
side of the display so you can select another choice or
value.

To change a menu items value or setting

Model 559/1042
With the cursor on the value or setting on the right side of
the display, press Increment

and Decrement

to

change a digits value or to see other choices. Press

to move to another digit in the value.
Model 1042 only
Use the numeric keys

thru

to enter a value.

The new value or setting does not take effect until you
press Enter
. If you change your mind and decide
to leave the value or setting unchanged, press Escape
ESC

To toggle a selected loop between AUTO and

MANUAL
To ignore changes you made or are about to make to
a value or setting

To back out of a display or menu or to return to a

previous display or menu item
To see a detailed popup menu related to an operating
or monitoring display (such as a trend). (An operating
or monitoring display is accessed by pressing one of
the keys below the display. See Other Operating
Displays section and Monitoring Displays section.)

Press Auto/Manual
ESC

Press Escape
. The cursor moves from the right to
the left side of the display, and the value or setting
remains unchanged.
Press Escape
Press Detail

ESC

.
AI2

2200.00

DEGF
2500.0

07:35

07:55

08:15

08:35

SCROLL
SET HOLD
DETAIL
ZOOM
1500.0

Revision 12
11/08

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

25

Keys and Displays Overview

Common Tasks Using Standard Keys

Task

Procedure

To manually change a control loops output or setpoint

value

Model 1042 only: Use the numeric keys

to manually enter a value. Press Enter
the value, press Escape

ESC

thru 9
to accept

to leave it unchanged.

Model 559/1042: Press Increment

or Decrement
to manually select a value. Changes to a value are done
live and do not require pressing Enter, you cannot
cancel the changes by pressing Escape

26

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

ESC

Revision 12
11/08

Keys and Displays Overview

Common Tasks Using Standard Keys

Task

Procedure

To adjust a loops setpoint, output, or switch between

Local and Remote setpoints

Access one of the following displays:

Loop Trend:

Loop Summary:

LOOPTAG1
AUTO RSP

TUNE
ENGU

MAY06
11:30

LOOP SUMMARY

2500.0
07:35

07:55

MODE

08:15

PV
1234567
2000.
2000.
AUTO LSP
AUTO RSP
2000.
2000.
AUTO RSP
AUTO LSP
2000.
MAN LSP
2000.
2000.
MAN LSP

LOOPTAG1 MAN LSP

100.

2000.

50.

LOOPTAG3

2000.

50.

2000.

50.

2000.

50.

LOOPTAG4
LOOPTAG5
LOOPTAG6
LOOPTAG7
1500.0

PV
OUT

2205.0
83.5

SP
DEV

SP OUT
1234567

LOOPTAG2 AUTO RSP

LOOPTAG8

2000.

50.

2000.

50.

2000.

50.

2000.0
205.0

2, 3, 4, or 8 Multi-Loop
Faceplates:
LOOPTAG1

LOOPTAG2

LOOPTAG3

2500.0

2500.0

2500.0

Single Loop Numeric:

2500.0

LOOPTAG1
AUTO LSP
TUNE
AL1 AL2
PV

2205.0
ENGU
1500.0

1500.0

1500.0

PV 2205.0
SP 2000.0
OUT
83.5

PV 2205.0
SP 2000.0
OUT
83.5

PV 2205.0
SP 2000.0
OUT
83.5

AUTO LSP

AUTO RSP

MAN LSP

SP
OUT

2000.0
83.5

1500.0

Notice these displays have a cursor around the loop tag

at the top of the display. Press Tab

to move cursor

to move
to the desired loop tag. Press Detail
between the loop tag, SP value, and Output value (if in
Manual). Adjust values as in previous task in this table.
With cursor on the loop tag, press Enter
that loops control screen:

to jump to

LOOP CONTROL
LOOPTAG1 AUTO LSP ENGU
TYPE
PID
PV
1234567
OUTPUT
1234567
LOCAL SP
1234567
REMOTE SP
1234567
SWITCH SP

See Loop control (page 121).

To see an overview list of alarms
To acknowledge all alarms in the currently displayed
group of alarms (up to 12 alarms)

Revision 12
11/08

Press Alarm

ALARM

Press Alarm

ALARM

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

27

Keys and Displays Overview

Common Tasks Using Standard Keys

Task

Procedure

To see other operating and monitoring displays

Up to 10 displays can be accessed with each Display

and Page Down
Group key. Press Page Up
see other displays assigned to a key.

To scroll backward and forward in time through vertical

or horizontal trends

With a trend display, press Increment

to

or Decrement

. Or, press Detail

to show the popup menu. For
other trend actions, see Trend Displays (page 266).

28

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

Revision 12
11/08

Keys and Displays Overview

User-assignable Keys

User-assignable Keys
The function and factory-shipped appearance of the user-assignable keys is described in Table 7. A display
group key's appearance can be changed [see Relabeling Display Group Keys (page 31)] so their appearance
may vary from Table 6 and Figure 13 and Figure 14. Specific functions of these keys are programmed
with the Hybrid Control Designer, a tool for configuring the OI for its end user.
Keys F1-F4
The keys F1-F4 are active on certain user-assignable displays and on a few standard displays. The use of
the keys is explained with the displays in which they are used. For all other displays these keys are
inactive.
Display Group keys 1-5 (Model 1042, keys 1- 8)
Each Display Group Key can be programmed to access up to 10 operating and monitoring displays. Refer
to Other Operating Displays section and Monitoring Displays section for descriptions and tasks related to
these displays. Model 1042 has 8 Display Group Keys, and Model 559 has 5 keys. These keys are located
along the bottom of the Operator Interface, as shown in Figure 13 and Figure 14.
Task

Revision 12
11/08

Procedure

To see the last display shown from this group

Press the desired Display Group key.

To see the next or previous display assigned to a key

Press Page Down or Page Up.

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

29

Keys and Displays Overview

User-assignable Keys

Table 7 User-assignable key actions

Key

Key Name

AT keyboard
equivalent

Pushbutton 1

F5

Pushbutton 2

F6

Pushbutton 3

F7

Pushbutton 4

F8

Display Group 1

F9

Display Group 2

F10

Display Group 3

F11

Display Group 4

F12

Display Group 5

F4

Display Group 6

Shift + F10

Display Group 7

Shift + F11

Display Group 8

Shift + F12

Action
The use of the F1 - F4 keys are discussed throughout the
manual for the displays in which they are used.

F1

F2

F3

F4

Each Display Group key displays the last display shown from
a group of up to ten pre-configured operating and monitoring
displays.
Press Page Up or Page Down to show the next display in the
keys sequence, eventually wrapping around to the first
display.

MODEL 1042 ONLY

30

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

Revision 12
11/08

Keys and Displays Overview

Relabeling Display Group Keys

Relabeling Display Group Keys

You may customize the appearance of the Display Group keys 1-5[8] by giving them names that describe
your application. For example, if you have configured Display Group #1 key to show all the Loop displays,
you could replace the label "1"with a more descriptive label like LOOPS.
Step

Action

All models:
Disconnect power or disconnect the cable from the rear of the Operator Interface.

Model 559 Type 12:

Unscrew the bolts under the floppy drive cover on the right front.
Model 559 Type 4:
Remove the 4 screws on the left and right sides of the unit.
Model 1042:
Remove the 4 screws on the rear of the unit.

Model 559 Type 12:

Pry off the right side of the front, towards you, as if opening a door. The left side will remain
engaged on hinge-like appendages.
Model 559 Type 4:
Carefully remove the front without breaking the wire cable connection.
Model 1042:
Carefully remove the front without breaking the wire cable connection.

Revision 12
11/08

Model 559:
Disengage the left side by pulling the front out and to the right. Be careful not to stretch or break
attached wires and cables.

All models:
Disconnect all wires and cables connected to the front.

All models:
Looking at the rear of the front you just removed; notice the slots containing the labels for the
keys. Remove the labels by pulling them out.

All models:
Create new label strips from clear or white plastic. Most word processors on a personal
computer let you create custom documents. Use the dimensions shown in Figure 15 and Figure
16 and keep text or symbols within the boxes shown. Round off the corners of the strip to allow
easy insertion.

All models:
To replace the labels, reverse steps 1 through 6. If you have difficulty inserting the new label,
try gripping it with needle nose pliers and inserting it.

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

31

Keys and Displays Overview

Relabeling Display Group Keys

2 1/16

10 3/8

16 5/8
13 1/2

119 4 5/8

14 9/16

39 1 5/8

158 6 1/4
Key:
mm inches
Figure 15 Model 559 Display key label dimensions

3/8

3/16
4.7
1

5/8
16

10
2

3 13/16
97

6 13/16
173

0.05
13

9/16
14

3.0
76

Dimensions = Inches
millimeters

Note: There are 2 labels of 4 keys each

Figure 16 Model 1042 Display Group key label dimensions

32

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

Revision 12
11/08

Keys and Displays Overview

Overview of Displays

Overview of Displays
Display areas defined
Displays have certain areas in common. See Figure 17 and Table 8.

Title
PAGE N OF M

Time:Date

Body of Display
Contains menu or
graphics
ALARM D MESSAGE TXT

EVENT SHZ RUN

Figure 17 Display areas defined

Table 8 Display areas defined details
Area of Display

Purpose/Description

Title

Describes display contents.

PAGE N OF M

Current page number of the active display. Appears when more information is
accessible through Page Up and Page Down keys.
Indicates there is more information off screen. Press Increment or Decrement
keys to scroll to more information.

Time: Date

Time and Date

Body of Display

Area between the title and the bottom area contains graphical data or a text
menu.

ALARM

Red. Indicates an alarm exists. When flashing, indicates an alarm is

unacknowledged. See Alarms section.

Blue. Indicates a diagnostic exists. See Diagnostics (page 142).

MESSAGE TXT

Blue: Diagnostic message. See Diagnostics (page 142).

Green: Data Storage message. See Messages (page 279).

EVENT

Revision 12
11/08

Yellow: User-configured events.

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

33

Keys and Displays Overview

Overview of Displays

Area of Display
RUN

Purpose/Description
Controllers mode of operation:
RUN: Controller is running normally.
PROG: Controller is in Program mode.
OFLN: Controller is in Offline mode.
FAULT: A fault was found reading the Controller switch.
NO COMM: This is displayed if controller is not responding or briefly during
mode changes or during hot or cold starts.
RUN (flashing green): Download to OI in progress.
PROG (flashing green): Download to OI in progress. This is not a controller
cold start.
OFLN (flashing green): Download to OI in progress.
Flashing green mode indicator can also mean one of the following changes are
being downloaded to the controller:
New language
New filename prefix
New security settings
New Data Storage Setting (.DSS)
New recipe, profile, schedule, or sequence

SHZ

Indicates special conditions are in effect for this display.

Storage: Data Storage is actively collecting data and saving it to the floppy disk
or to the internal buffer. See Data Storage section.
Hold: A display that usually rotates through several points is on Hold on a single
point. See Hold in Table 168.
Zoom: A trend display is in zoom (magnification) view mode. See Zoom in
Table 168.

Display organization
Displays are accessed according to the following hierarchy. Notice that the keys in Figure 18 give you
direct access to displays. The remaining keys let you navigate within displays and switch to other displays.

NOTE: Model 1042 has eight Display Group keys and a numeric keypad.
Model 559 has five Display Groups and no numeric keypad.

34

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

Revision 12
11/08

Keys and Displays Overview

Overview of Displays

ALARM

. . .

1042

559
MAIN MENU
Access to loops,
recipes, setpoints ,
I/O summary,
variables, storage,
utilities.

MESSAGES
Up to 10 pages
of helpful messages.

ALARM SUMMARY
Shows status of all alarm
groups.

ALARM GROUP
Shows individual
status of each
alarm in a group.

.
.
.

USER-DEFINED
DISPLAY #1
Trend, bar graph, loop,
setpoint program,
alarms, recipes,
sequencer, scheduler,
pushbuttons, panel,
overview, messages.

USER-DEFINED
DISPLAY #1
Trend, bar graph, loop,
setpoint program,
alarms, recipes,
sequencer, scheduler,
pushbuttons, panel,
overview, messages.

USER-DEFINED
DISPLAY #1
Trend, bar graph, loop,
setpoint program,
alarms, recipes,
sequencer, scheduler,
pushbuttons, panel,
overview, messages.

USER-DEFINED
DISPLAY #2
Trend, bar graph, loop,
setpoint program,
alarms, recipes,
sequencer, scheduler,
pushbuttons, panel,
overview, messages.

USER-DEFINED
DISPLAY #2
Trend, bar graph, loop,
setpoint program,
alarms, recipes,
sequencer, scheduler,
pushbuttons, panel,
overview, messages.

USER-DEFINED
DISPLAY #2
Trend, bar graph, loop,
setpoint program,
alarms, recipes,
sequencer, scheduler,
pushbuttons, panel,
overview, messages.

USER-DEFINED
DISPLAY #10
Trend, bar graph, loop,
setpoint program,
alarms, recipes,
sequencer, scheduler,
pushbuttons, panel,
overview, messages.

USER-DEFINED
DISPLAY #10
Trend, bar graph, loop,
setpoint program,
alarms, recipes,
sequencer, scheduler,
pushbuttons, panel,
overview, messages.

USER-DEFINED
DISPLAY #10
Trend, bar graph, loop,
setpoint program,
alarms, recipes,
sequencer, scheduler,
pushbuttons, panel,
overview, messages.

.
.
.

ALARM GROUP
Shows individual
status of each
alarm in a group.

.
.
.

.
.
.

Figure 18 Display organization

Standard and user-assignable displays
Standard displays are accessed under the Menu key, that is, they are not user-assignable. They contain
textual descriptions of functions you can choose from. See Main Menu tree in Table 11.
User-assignable displays are configured using the Hybrid Control Designer configuration tool and are
accessed with the Display Group keys

through

] . See Table 9.

User-assignable displays
The displays accessed under the Display Group keys
using the Hybrid Control Designer tool.

through

] are assigned to those keys

TIP
Since the Display Group keys are selectable in the Hybrid Control Designer, consider taking
advantage of this feature by grouping related displays under each Display Group key. For
example, on each key you can configure a sequence of 10 displays in order of importance to
the process. You can also configure Help text (messages) to appear on these keys.

Revision 12
11/08

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

35

Keys and Displays Overview

Overview of Displays

Table 9 shows all displays that can be assigned to keys

to the item to its left or upper left.

through

]. Each item is subordinate

Table 9 User-assignable displays

See Page

119

45

Top level

Level 2

Level 3

Level 4

Level 5

Loops:

ILOOP SUMMARY

LOOP CONTROL

8-LOOPS

LOOP CONTROL

4-LOOPS

LOOP CONTROL

3-LOOPS

LOOP CONTROL

2-LOOPS

LOOP CONTROL

1-LOOP NUMERIC

LOOP CONTROL

LOOP W/TREND

LOOP CONTROL

AUTO/MANUAL BIAS

LOOP CONTROL

Recipes:

LOAD RECIPE
53

Set point programmers:

SPP OPERATE (1)

LOAD

LOAD PROGRAM

LOAD PROGRAM
FROM LIST

LOAD SCHEDULE

LOAD SCHEDULE
FROM LIST

EDIT STEP DETAILS

EDIT STEPS

CLEAR
EDIT
SAVE
74

Set point schedulers:

SPS OPERATE

LOAD
CLEAR
VIEW EVENTS
VIEW AUX
EDIT
SAVE

87

Sequencer

SEQUENCER OPERATE VIEW/EDIT SEQUENCE

VIEW STEP DETAILS

LOAD SEQUENCE

LOAD SEQUENCE

LOAD SEQUENCE
FROM LIST

EDIT STEPS
SAVE SEQUENCE
CLEAR SEQUENCER

36

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

Revision 12
11/08

Keys and Displays Overview

Overview of Displays

See Page

231

Top level

Level 2

Level 3

Level 4

Level 5

Data Storage

DATA STORAGE
STATUS

241

Other operating displays:

Pushbuttons F1-F4:

PUSHBUTTONS
SELECTOR SWITCHES

SWITCH CONTROL

DEVICE CONTROL
OPERATE

EDIT DEVICE

HOA SWITCH

SET HOA SWITCH

Other:

STAGE OPERATE

EDIT STAGE MENU

EDIT STAGE

RAMP OPERATE

EDIT RAMP MENU

EDIT RAMP

ALTERNATOR
OPERATE

EDIT ALTERNATOR

EDIT OUTPUT
SELECTIONS
EDIT INPUT
SELECTIONS
EDIT OUTPUT
SEQUENCE

266

Trends:

VERTICAL TREND
VERTICAL TREND
W/HORIZ. BARS
HORIZ. TREND
HORIZ. TREND
W/DIGITALS
HORIZ. TRENDS
W/VERT. BARS

Revision 12
11/08

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

37

Keys and Displays Overview

Overview of Displays

See Page

270

Top level

Level 2

Level 3

Level 4

Level 5

Bar graphs:

3 HORIZ. BAR GRAPHS

6 HORIZ. BAR GRAPHS
3 VERT. BAR GRAPHS
6 VERT. BAR GRAPHS
271

Panels:

SINGLE PT. ROTATING

PANEL
MULTI-PT (4) PANEL
MULTI-PT (7) PANEL
12-PT PANEL METER
OVERVIEW
ALARM GROUP
275

ALARM DETAILS

Other

MESSAGE TEXT

38

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

Revision 12
11/08

Main Menu
Overview

Main Menu
Overview
What is the Main Menu?
The Main Menu is accessed any time from any display by pressing Menu
. It contains functions for
setting up or adjusting the controller for operation. For example, you can tune control loops, view events,
edit setpoint profiles, calibrate analog inputs or analog outputs, and load and store profiles and recipes.
ATTENTION
The 559 and 1042 have different menu structures. Program must be in READY state to be
edited. In some cases, a single screen on the 1042 can serve to replace multiple related
screens on the 559 since there is more display space available
Starting with Version 2.100 of the HC900, the items on the Main Menu display can be
individually disabled via the HC Designer configuration software. Only those items that have
been enabled via HC Designer will be shown on the Main Menu display.

Table 6 describes how to use the keys to interact with all the menus.
Table 10 explains the Main Menu functions
Table 10 Top level functions of main menu
Menu Item

Revision 12
11/08

Function

Recipes

View, load, and edit recipes. A recipe is a group of variables whose values are
changed when the recipe is loaded.

SP Programmers

Adjust and set up setpoint programs. A setpoint program is a time-varying

setpoint and associated discrete states.

SP Schedulers

Adjust and set up setpoint schedules. A setpoint schedule is a sequence of

segments, where each segment contains multiple setpoints, auxiliary outputs, and
events.

Sequencers

Adjust and set up sequences. A sequence can be a very rigid series of interrelated events used to start-up or shut-down a unit process, or it can be a series
of timed and process measurement dependent events that are executed to
produce a final product.

Loops

Adjust and set up control loops.

Alarms/Events/
Diags

View status of alarms, events, and diagnostics.

Summary Displays

Review I/O summaries and variables in the controllers configuration.

Unit Setup

Perform unit maintenance activities such as calibrating inputs and outputs, setting
security, and testing the instruments functions.

Disk Utilities

Load and store disk files.

Data Storage

Store process data to the disk.

Log Off

Secure the instrument when leaving it unattended.

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

39

Main Menu
Overview

Main menu tree

Access the Main Menu by pressing

. The menu is organized as shown in Table 11.

For more details on a top-level item, go to the specified page.

ATTENTION
The 559 and 1042 have different menu structures. Program must be in READY state to be
edited. In some cases, a single screen on the 1042 can serve to replace multiple related
screens on the 559 since there is more display space available
Starting with Version 2.100 of the HC900, the items on the Main Menu display can be
individually disabled via the HC Designer configuration software. Only those items that have
been enabled via HC Designer will be shown on the Main Menu display.

Table 11 Main menu tree

See Page

44

Top level

RECIPES

Level 2

SELECT RECIPE

Level 3

EDIT

Level 4

Level 5

EDIT RECIPE

LOAD
46

SP PROGRAMMERS

SELECT PROGRAM

EDIT PROGRAM

EDIT SEGMENT

EDIT SEG>EVENTS

SAVE PROGRAM
65

SP SCHEDULERS

SELECT SCHEDULE

EDIT SCHEDULE

EDIT SEGMENTS

EDIT SETPOINTS
EDIT EVENTS
EDIT GUAR HOLD

SAVE SCHEDULE
EDIT GUAR HOLD
LIMITS

87

SEQUENCERS

SELECT SEQUENCE

EDIT SEQUENCE

EDIT STEPS

EDIT STEP DETAILS

VIEW STEP DETAILS

SAVE SEQUENCE
103

LOOPS

SELECT LOOP

LOOP TREND

LOOP TUNE
CONSTANTS

ACCUTUNE or
ACCUTUNE I I I

TUNING STATUS

LOOP TUNE
CONSTANTS
CONTROL SETUP
CARBON LOOP SETUP
ALARM SETPOINTS
LIMITS
HIGH OUTPUT LIMITING

40

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

Revision 12
11/08

Main Menu
Overview

See Page

129

Top level

SUMMARY DISPLAYS

Level 2

Level 3

Level 4

Level 5

ANALOG INPUT
SUMMARY
ANALOG OUTPUT
SUMMARY
DIGITAL INPUT
SUMMARY
DIGITAL OUTPUT
SUMMARY
VARIABLE SUMMARY

ALARM/EVENT/DIAG
137

For HC900-C70R Redundant Controller See Appendix A - HC900-C70R Redundant Controller

Displays
ALARM SUMMARY

141

EVENT SUMMARY

142

CONTROLLER
DIAGNOSTICS

ALARM GROUP

ALARM DETAIL

I/O MODULE
DIAGNOSTICS

MODULE DETAILS

COMMUNICATIONS

CONFIGURATION PORT
OI PORT
NETWORK PORT

VIEW HOST
CONNECTIONS
VIEW PEER
CONNECTIONS

EXPANSION IO PORT
I/O MODULE
DIAGNOSTICS

MODULE DETAILS

PANEL DIAGNOSTIC
LOG

Revision 12
11/08

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

41

Main Menu
Overview

See Page

159

Top level

UNIT SETUP
Attention:
For additional selections for
the HC900 Redundant
Controller See
Appendix A - HC900C70R Redundant
Controller Displays

Level 2

Level 3

Level 4

Level 5

CONTROLLER STATUS
SET MODE
SET TIME AND DATE
SET SECURITY
REVIEW SECURITY
SET LANGUAGE*
COMMUNICATIONS

CONFIGURATION PORT
OI PORT
NETWORK PORT

VIEW HOST
CONNECTIONS

NETWORK HOST
STATISTICS

VIEW PEER
CONNECTIONS

NETWORK PEER
STATISTICS

EXPANSION I/O PORT

FILE NAME SELECTIONS
SELF TESTS

KEYBOARD TEST
DISPLAY TEST
DISK TEST

CALIBRATE AI

SET CONTROLLER
MODE
CALIBRATE CHANNEL
CALIBRATE CJ TEMP
RESTORE AI FACTORY
CAL
RESTORE CJ FACTORY
CAL

CALIBRATE AO

SET CONTROLLER
MODE
CALIBRATE AO
CHANNEL
RESTORE AO CAL

DISPLAY BRIGHTNESS
*Model 1042 only.

42

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

Revision 12
11/08

Main Menu
Overview

See Page

208

Top level

DISK UTILITIES

Level 2

Level 3

Level 4

Level 5

LIST DISK FILES

LOAD/STORE PROFILES LOAD

LOAD FROM DISK

STORE

STORE TO DISK

LOAD/STORE RECIPES

LOAD

LOAD FROM DISK

STORE

STORE TO DISK

LOAD/STORE
SCHEDULES

LOAD

LOAD FROM DISK

STORE

STORE TO DISK

LOAD/STORE
SEQUENCES

LOAD

LOAD FROM DISK

STORE

STORE TO DISK

FORMAT DISK
SET CONTROLLER
MODE
STORAGE STATUS
STORAGE CONTROLS
221

DATA STORAGE

INITIALIZE STORAGE
DISK
LOAD STORAGE
SETTINGS
VIEW STORAGE
SETTINGS

TREND 1 STORAGE
TREND 2 STORAGE
POINT LOG STORAGE
ALARM/EVENT
STORAGE

START NEW STORAGE

SETTINGS
STORE STORAGE
SETTINGS

239

LOG OFF

Revision 12
11/08

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

43

Recipes
Overview

Recipes
Access
Main menu.
Load Recipe is also accessible from the Display Group keys, if so configured.
Description
A recipe is a collection of variables and their values or states. When you load a recipe, the values or states
of the variables in the recipe replace the values of those variables in the controllers configuration.
Procedure
Select a recipe to edit or load. Select Cancel to return to the Main Menu.
Edit/View recipe
A recipes variable is analog or digital. The setting for an analog point can be any numerical value, and a
digital point can be set in its ON or OFF state.
Starting with Version 2.100 of the HC900, recipe editing can be disabled via the HC Designer
configuration software. If recipe editing has been disabled you will still be able to view the contents of any
recipe using the VIEW selection.
Table 12 Recipe edit/view details
Feature
TAGNAME n

The name of the variable in the recipe.

Value or State

Indicates the current value or state of the variable. Press Enter to edit.

Engineering Units

44

Description

The engineering units associated with the variable.

Page number

Indicates multiple pages

DESCRIPTOR(1042)

Optional descriptor of recipe. If descriptor not entered, TAGNAME is repeated.

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

Revision 12
11/08

Recipes
Overview

Load recipe
This display is also accessible from the Display Group keys, if so configured.
Select Load to load the recipe into the controller configuration. A message confirms when the load is
completed.
TIP
When you load a recipe, you are in effect writing new values to those variables in the
configuration. Be aware that the controller configuration may contain a Recipe Load function
block that, without your knowledge, can load a second recipe after you loaded one here. If this
second recipe is loaded, the values you just loaded may be overwritten by different values.
The effect is that some or all of the recipe values or states you intended to load are not in
effect.
To check that your recipe load took effect, after loading a recipe you can view the variables to
see they are set to the desired recipe values or states. See Summary Displays (page 129).
If a recipes variables do not seem to be loading properly, consider reconfiguring the controller
to eliminate the Recipe Load function block that is causing the conflict.

Revision 12
11/08

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

45

Setpoint Programmers
Overview
Access
Main menu.
Description
A setpoint programmer supplies a time-varying setpoint to a control loop. A program contains multiple
segments; each segment can be a ramp or a soak and has digital switches called events. This menu lets
you edit setpoint program segments, segment events, or other parameters and save the changes to the
controllers memory.
Each program contains multiple segments. Each segment of the program may be a ramp or soak except the
last segment must be a soak.
Multiple programs can be running concurrently. Programmers can run any of the profiles in controller
memory. Once loaded from memory into the Setpoint Programmer (SPP) function, these profiles are
referred to as programs. Any program can be edited and saved as a profile in one of the slots in the
controllers memory.
In addition to the main output value, a second analog value is available for each step of the program. This
output is a fixed soak value, which may be used as an input to another function or to provide a setpoint
value for a secondary control loop in the process.
A Setpoint guarantee function (known as guaranteed hold) is provided that holds the program if a process
variable exceeds a predefined deviation from setpoint. Selections allow setpoint guarantee to be active for
the entire program, for soak segments only, or for user specified segments.
Up to 3 Process Variables may be configured as inputs to the block for setpoint guarantee.
The program may be changed (with some exceptions) from the current state to a new state by the operator
as well as by inputs to the SPP block. Table 13 lists the resulting states.
Table 13 SPP inputs and current state
Input

Current State
READY

HOLD

RUN

GHOLD

STOP

RESET

READY

READY

RUN

READY

READY

HOLD

HOLD

HOLD

HOLD

HOLD

STOP

RUN

RUN

RUN

RUN

GHOLD

STOP

GHOLD

READY

HOLD

GHOLD

GHOLD

STOP

With regard to changing program state, if more than one function block input is on in the same execution
cycle, RESET has priority over HOLD and RUN, and GHOLD has priority over RUN.
Also, function block inputs will override inputs from the Operator Panel, which occur during the same
execution cycle. Finally, state changes from the Operator Panel are processed on the basis of the last
change wins.

Revision 12
11/08

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

46

Setpoint Programmers
Setpoint Program Setup

Setpoint Program Setup

Access
Setpoint Program setup is done through the SP Programmers Menu, accessed through the Main Menu.
Press "Enter" for Select Program menu. Press "Enter" again to Edit Program.
See also
While operating Setpoint Program functions, messages may be displayed. See Table 175 for message
descriptions.
Whats in this section
Topic

Revision 12
11/08

See Page

Select Program

48

Edit Program

49

Edit Program Segments

51

Save Program

52

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

47

Setpoint Programmers
Select program

Select program
Select a program to edit. The Edit Program menu is then displayed.
NOTE: On Model 559, the Up and Down arrow keys let you scroll through the complete menu.
TIP
Program must be in READY to be edited.

See also
While operating Setpoint Programming functions, messages may be displayed. See Table 175 for message
descriptions.

48

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

Revision 12
11/08

Setpoint Programmers
Edit program

Edit program
This display lets you edit parameters of the selected program. Edits affect only the currently working
program, not the profile in memory, unless you save the program.
ATTENTION
Program must be in READY state to be edited.

Table 14 Edit program details

Feature

Description

EDIT SEGMENTS

Accesses Edit Segments menu (page 51) where you can edit each
segment.

SAVE PROGRAM

Saves changes you make to this display. Program is saved in the

controllers profile memory where it can be loaded and run later.

LABEL, DESCRIPTION

Identifies the program with text.

RAMP TYPE

TIME: Each ramp segments time is the TIME allotted to the profiles
output to reach the next soak segments value in hours or minutes.
OR
RATE: Each ramp segments time specifies the RATE at which that
profiles output will reach the next soak segment, where the rate is
specified in EU/hour or EU/minute.
Make this selection before entering any Ramp during Profile Edit.
NOTE: When Ramp unit is configured for TIME, entering 0 will imply an
immediate step change in setpoint to the next soak.

TIME UNITS

This selection assigns the time units (hours or minutes) for the ramp type
selected.
For Time ramp type: Time = Hours or Minutes
For Rate ramp type: Rate = EU/Hour or EU/Minutes

PRIMARY OUTPUT LABEL

Label associated with the PV.

PRIMARY ENG UNITS

Engineering Units of the PV

GUAR HOLD TYPE

Guaranteed Hold, if enabled here, will hold the profile value if a PV to the
profile (typically a control loops PV) deviates specified amounts above or
below the profile output.
None: No segments have guaranteed hold enabled.
Per Seg: Lets you select specific segments for guaranteed hold where
you set up the profile ramps and soaks.
All Soaks: All soak segments will have a guaranteed hold enabled.
All Segs: All segments will have guaranteed hold enabled.

GUAR HOLD LO LIM

Revision 12
11/08

The profile will hold if a PV deviates more than this amount below the
profile setpoint.

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

49

Setpoint Programmers
Edit program

Feature

Description

GUAR HOLD HI LIM

The profile will hold if a PV deviates more than this amount above the
profile setpoint.

LOOP START SEGMENT

The first segment of the loop.

LOOP END SEGMENT

The last segment of the loop.

LOOP CYCLES

Number of times the loop segments will execute. Zero (0) means the
segments will be repeated forever.

JOG SEGMENT

Segment to which the program will jump to when the JOG discrete input is
pulsed.

RESTART RATE

This recovery ramp rate is provided in the event of a power loss while a
program is running. The Restart Rate value is used to return the process
to the last operating setpoint prior to power loss.

AUX OUT LABEL

A second analog value is available for each segment of the program. It is

a fixed soak value and can be used to provide a setpoint value for a
secondary control loop in the process.
Enter up to 8 characters for the label.

AUX ENG UNITS

Up to 4 characters. This is the engineering unit text associated with the

AUX OUT.

FAST FORWARD

Fast Forward is a way to check for proper functioning of the profiles

events and outputs, without having to wait for the profile to execute at its
normal speed. When FAST FORWARD is ON, the program will run at a
speed 60 times faster. When FAST FORWARD is OFF, the program will
run at normal speed.

50

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

Revision 12
11/08

Setpoint Programmers
Edit segments

Edit segments
This menu lets you specify segment parameters.
Table 15 Edit segment details
Feature

Description

F1 NEXT SEG

Press F1 to edit next segment.

F2 PREV SEG

Press F2 to edit previous segment.

EDITING PROGRAM #

Number of program being edited and its label.

SEGMENT #

Segment being edited.

SEGMENT TYPE

Ramp or Soak. Last segment must be a soak.

STARTING VALUE

Starting value of the segment.

TIME/RATE

Range = 0.00 hr. to 999.99 hr. or 0.00 min. to 999.99 min. The function of
this value depends on the Ramp Type (see Table 14).

GUAR HOLD

Select ON to enable setpoint guarantee if GHOLD is Per Segment.

AUX START VALUE

Select a fixed soak value for this segment.

EVENTS

Model 559:
Select "EVENTS" to access the Edit Segment Events menu.
Model 1042:
Edit the segment events on this display (ON or OFF).

Edit Segment Events

You can configure 1 to 16 segment events to turn ON or OFF at the beginning of each segment. Segment
events are digital switches that provide ON/OFF outputs. When a segment event is turned ON, it remains
ON until the end of the segment at which time it is turned OFF unless it is configured to turn ON in the
next segment. Note that segment events are not interrupted by soak time delays when the process variable
is outside the guaranteed soak band. Events turn ON as soon as the previous segment is completed even if
the process variable has not reached the soak setpoint.
TIP
Events can be edited only while program is in READY state.

Revision 12
11/08

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

51

Setpoint Programmers
Save program

Save program
This function saves a program to the controllers profile memory. A programmer can run any of the
profiles in controller memory. Once loaded from controller memory into the Setpoint Programmer function,
these profiles are known as programs. You can choose to save a program (profile) back to controller
memory after editing it. See Figure 19.
Table 16 Save Program details
Feature

Description

CURRENT PROFILE NUMBER

CURRENT PROFILE NAME
CURRENT PROFILE DESCR

The number, name, and description of the profile currently

loaded into the programmer.

SAVE TO PROFILE NUMBER

There are multiple slots available in memory for profiles.

ATTENTION: You will overwrite any profile in the slot. Select
the desired slot and press Enter to save the profile. The profile
is also saved in the program.
NOTE: This item will not be displayed if the Save Program
function has been disabled via the HC Designer configuration
software (Version 2.100 and later).

SAVE IS NOT PERMITTED

The Save Program function has been disabled via the HC

Designer configuration software (Version 2.100 and later).

Bold items are read only.

Profiles in RAM

Step 1

Profile #1

RUN
PV
SP

Profile #2
Profile #3
.
.
.

Profile #3 was
previously
loaded into SP
Program #1.

ELAPSED SEGMENT TIME

ELAPSED PGM TIME
SEG TIME REMAIN

0001:30:00
0006:00:00
0000:10:00

PV2
PV3

0
0

MESSAG E TEXT

SP PROGRAMMER SPTAG1
STATE PROFILE SEGMENT

MAY 05
11:30

0001:30:00
0006:00:00
0000:10:00

PV2
PV3

0
0

RAMP

MESSAGE TEXT

OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF

Step 4

F1
RUN

Profile #1

F2
HOLD

Profile #2

F3
RESET

EV1
EV1
EV1
EV1
EV1
EV1
EV1
EV1

LOAD
CLEAR
EDIT
SAVE

OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF

EV9
EV9
EV9
EV9
EV9
EV9
EV9
EV9

OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF

HZ

* On Model 559, select

"More Commands"
then SAVE in the dialog box.

F4
ADV

RUN

Select SAVE*

Program #1 is saved as
Profile #2 in RAM

EV9
EV9
EV9
EV9
EV9
EV9
EV9
EV9

OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF

HZ

F4
ADV

Profile #3
.
.
.

SAVE PROGRAM 1
CURRENT PROFILE NUMBER
SAVE TO PROFILE NUMBER

Profiles in RAM

2
2
PRIMARY
AUXLABEL
31.0 ENGU
1450.0 ENGU
1449.0 ENGU
31.1 ENGU

ELAPSED SEGMENT TIME

ELAPSED PGM TIME
SEG TIME REMAIN

ALARM

F2
HOLD

ENGU

Step 2

Program #1 now contains

Profile #2.

PV
SP

F1
RUN
ENGU

F3
RESET
EV1
EV1
EV1
EV1
EV1
EV1
EV1
EV1

LOAD
CLEAR
EDIT
SAVE

ALARM

RAMP

3
2
PRIMARY
AUXLABEL
31.0
1450.0 ENGU
1449.0 ENGU
31.1

Step 5
RUN

MAY 05
11:30

SP PROGRAMMER SPTAG1
STATE PROFILE SEGMENT

3
2

Step 3
Select SAVE TO
PROFILE NUMBER 2

RUN

Figure 19 Example of saving a program on Model 1042

52

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

Revision 12
11/08

Setpoint Programmers
Setpoint Program Operation

Setpoint Program Operation

Overview
1

through
[ 8 ]
Setpoint program operation displays are accessed by the Display Group keys
Selection of display formats is performed using the Hybrid Control Designer. All available displays are
described in this section.
See also
While performing setpoint program operations, messages may be displayed. See Table 175 for message
descriptions.
Whats in this section
Topic

See Page

Single SP Program Operation - Model 1042

54

Single SP Program Operation - Model 559

56

Operate Popup Menu (More Commands) - Model 559

58

View Program Events - Model 559

59

View Program Details -- Model 559

60

Load Program

60

Edit Segments

63

Security
When Security is enabled (see Set Security), the SPP operate display works as follows:
When the display is initially called, the security pop-up appears. Enter the proper security code then reselect the function. Access is permitted without further interruption of the security pop-up until the
display is removed from view.

Revision 12
11/08

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

53

Setpoint Programmers
SPP operation - Model 1042

SPP operation - Model 1042

This display shows live values of a setpoint programmer.
It includes SPP Operate details as well as Program Event details on one screen.
SP PROGRAMMER

Date
11:30

SPTAG1

MYPROFIL
MY TEST PROFILE
STATE
PROF
SEG
SOAK
RUN
# 3
# 2
PRIMARY
1450.0
1449.0

PV
SP

ELAPSED SEG TIME

PGM ELAPSED TIME
SEG TIME REMAIN
PV2
PV3

LOAD
CLEAR
EDIT
SAVE

00:30:00
02:00:00
01:30:00
0.0
0.0
EV1
EV2
EV3
EV4
EV5
EV6
EV7
EV8

F1
RUN

AUXLABEL
31.0
31.1

F2
HOLD

F3
RESET
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF

EV9
EV10
EV11
EV12
EV13
EV14
EV15
EV16

OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF

F4
ADV

RUN

Figure 20 SPP operation - Model 1042

Table 17 SPP details - Model 1042
Feature

Description

SPTAG1

Name of the selected programmer block.

MYPROFIL

Name of the selected profile.

MY TEST PROFILE

Description of the selected profile.

STATE

READY: Profile is at the beginning of segment and is ready to run. All

events are OFF.
HOLD: Profile is paused at the setpoint value shown.
RUN: Profile is executing normally.
GHOLD: Profile is paused because of excessive deviation.
STOP: Profile has reached the end of the last segment.
DISABLE: Profile is prevented from starting until the programmer disable
control is ON.

PROFILE

Profile # is the memory location of this profile.

SEGMENT

Current segment

RAMP or
SOAK

Type of current segment: ramp or soak

Current segment, next segment indicators.
Left box: current segment type.
Right box: next segment type.

Ramp up

Soak

Ramp down

Blank

In Ready state, there are no segment type indicators displayed.

54

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

Revision 12
11/08

Setpoint Programmers
SPP operation - Model 1042

Feature

Description

PRIMARY PV

Value of PV.

PRIMARY SP

Value of setpoint.

ELAPSED SEG TIME

Time elapsed in the segment

ELAPSED PGM TIME

Time elapsed in RUN, HOLD, and GHOLD states.

SEG TIME REMAIN

Time remaining in the indicated segment.

PV2

Process Variable #2 value, for deviation check.

PV3

Process Variable #3 value, for deviation check.

LOAD

Accesses the Load Program display. See Load program (Page 60).
Program must be in READY state.

CLEAR

Erases the program from the programmer. Program must be in READY

state. Do not clear a program if you need to save it first.

EDIT

Displays the Edit Segment menu. See

Edit segments (Page 63 ). Program must be in READY, HOLD, or STOP
state.

SAVE

Accesses the Save Program display. See Save Program (Page 52)
Program must be in READY, HOLD, or STOP state.

EVENT #

State of 16 events associated with this segment. ON or OFF.

Push F1 button to start a program that is in HOLD or READY state.

F1
RUN
Push F2 button to put program in HOLD.

F2
HOLD

F3
RESET

Push F3 button to reset a HOLD or STOP program to the first segment.

Any edits made to the program are lost unless they were SAVED. See
SAVE on the display.
Push F4 button to cause the program to jump to the next segment.

F4
ADV

When the program is already in the last segment, the advance request is
ignored.
Programs cannot be advanced to the first segment. Current state must
either READY or HOLD.

Bold items are read-only.

Revision 12
11/08

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

55

Setpoint Programmers
SPP operation - Model 559

SPP operation - Model 559

This display shows live values of a setpoint programmer.
SP PROGRAMMER SPTAG111:30
MYPROFILE MY TEST PROFILE

STATE PROF SEG RAMP

RUN
# 3
# 2
PRIMARY
ENGU

PV
SP

1450.0
1449.0

F1
RUN
F2

AUXLABEL HOLD
ENGU

31.0
31.1

SEG TIME REM

01:30:00
PGM ELAPSED TIME 00:00:00

F3
RESET
F4
ADV

LOAD
MORE COMMANDS

Figure 21 Single SPP operation - Model 559

Table 18 Single SPP details - Model 559
Feature

Description

MY PROFIL

Name of the selected profile.

MY TEST PROFILE

Description of the selected profile.

STATE

READY: Profile is at the beginning of segment and is ready to run. All

events are OFF.
HOLD: Profile is paused at the setpoint value shown.
RUN: Profile is executing normally.
GHOLD: Profile is paused because of excessive deviation.
STOP: Profile has reached the end of the last segment.

PROF

Profile # is the memory location, 1 to 70, of this profile.

SEG

Current segment

RAMP or
SOAK

Type of current segment: ramp or soak

56

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

Revision 12
11/08

Setpoint Programmers
SPP operation - Model 559

Feature

Description

Current segment, next segment indicators.

Left box: current segment type.
Right box: next segment type.

Ramp up

Soak

Ramp down

Blank
In Ready state, there are no segment type boxes displayed.
PRIMARY PV

Value of PV.

PRIMARY SP

Value of setpoint.

AUXILIARY PV (AUX LABEL)

Value of auxiliary PV.

AUXILIARY SP (AUX LABEL)

Value of auxiliary setpoint.

SEG TIME REM

Time remaining in the indicated segment.

PGM ELAPSED TIME

Time elapsed in RUN, HOLD, and GHOLD states.

LOAD

Accesses the Load Program display. See Load Program (Page 60).
Program must be in READY state.

MORE COMMANDS

Accesses the Popup Operate menu. See SPP operate popup menu
(Page 58).

F1
RUN

Push F1 button to start a program that is in HOLD or READY state.

F2
HOLD

Push F2 button to put program in HOLD.

F3
RESET

Push F3 button to reset a HOLD or STOP program to the first segment.

Any edits made to the program are lost unless they were SAVED. See
SAVE on the popup menu (Figure 22).

F4
ADV

Push F4 button to cause the program to jump to the next segment.

When the program is already in the last segment, the advance request is
ignored.
Programs cannot be advanced to the first segment. Current state must
either READY or HOLD.

Bold items are read-only.

Revision 12
11/08

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

57

Setpoint Programmers
SPP operation - Model 559

SPP operate popup menu - Model 559

This menu lets you adjust and view parameters of the program. Some actions require the program to be in
certain states (RUN, READY, etc.).
For Model 1042 Operate details - See Figure 20 "Single Setpoint Operation - Model 1042".

SP PROGRAMMER SPTAG1
MYPROFIL MY TEST PROFILE

11:30

STATE PROF SEG RAMP

RUN
# 3
# 2
CLEAR
VIEW EVENTS
PRIMARY
AUXLABEL
ENGU
ENGU
VIEW
DETAIL
PV
1450.0
31.0
EDIT
SP
1449.0
31.1
SAVE

F1
RUN

SEG TIME REM

01:30:00
PGM ELAPSED TIME 00:00:00

F2
HOLD
F3
RESET
F4
ADV

LOAD
MORE COMMANDS

Figure 22 SPP operate popup menu - Model 559

Table 19 SPP operate details - Model 559
Feature

Description

CLEAR

Erases the program from the programmer. Program must be in READY

state. Do not clear a program if you need to save it first.

VIEW EVENTS

Displays the status of 16 events associated with this segment. See View
program events (page 59).

VIEW DETAIL

Displays detailed information on the program. See View program detail

(page 60).

EDIT

Displays the Edit Segment menu. See

Edit segments (page 63). Program must be in READY, HOLD, or STOP
state.

SAVE

Accesses the Save Program display See Save Program (Page 52).
Program must be in READY, HOLD, or STOP state.

In the following table, X indicates the action can be performed when the program is in that state. NA means
the action is not available in that state.

58

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

Revision 12
11/08

Setpoint Programmers
SPP operation - Model 559

Table 20 SPP popup menu actions according to state

Program State
Action

READY

RUN

HOLD

GHOLD

STOP

DISABLE

CLEAR

NA

NA

NA

NA

NA

EDIT

NA

NA

NA

SAVE

NA

NA

NA

View program events - Model 559

This display lets you see the status of up to 16 events associated with each segment.
For Model 1042 Events - See Figure 20 "Single Setpoint Operation - Model 1042".
SP PROGRAMMER SPTAG1
MYPROFIL

11:30

MY TEST PROFILE

STATE PROF SEG RAMP

RUN
# 3
# 2
EVENT #1
EVENT #2
EVENT #3
EVENT #4
EVENT #5
EVENT #6
EVENT #7
EVENT #8

OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF

EVENT #9 ON
EVENT #10 OFF
EVENT #11 ON
EVENT #12 ON
EVENT #13 OFF
EVENT #14 ON
EVENT #15 OFF
EVENT #16 OFF

SEG TIME REM

0:00

Figure 23 View program events - Model 559

Table 21 View program events details - Model 559
Feature

Description

MY PROFILE

Name of the selected profile.

MY TEST PROFILE

Description of the selected profile.

STATE

Current state of program.

PROF #

Profile # is the memory location of this profile

SEG #

Current segment

RAMP or SOAK

Type of current Segment: Ramp or Soak

EVENT #

State of 16 events associated with this segment. ON or OFF.

SEG TIME REM

Time remaining in the indicated segment.

Bold items are read-only.

Revision 12
11/08

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

59

Setpoint Programmers
Load program

View program details - Model 559

This display lets you see details on the program time and auxiliary PVs.
For Model 1042 Program Details - See Figure 20 "Single Setpoint Operation - Model 1042".
SP PROGRAMMER SPTAG111:30
MYPROFIL MY TEST PROFILE
F1

STATE PROF SEG RAMP

RUN
RUN
# 3
# 2
F2
PV 2 PRIMARY AUXLABEL
2207.23
HOLD
PV 3 ENGU
2203.92
ENGU
ELAPSED
SEG TIME 31.0
1:15:45F3
PV
1450.0
RESET
ELAPSED
PGM TIME 31.1
10:36:01
SP
1449.0
SEG TIME REMAIN
0:45:15
SEG TIME REM
01:30:00
PGM ELAPSED TIME 00:00:00

F4
ADV

LOAD
MORE COMMANDS

Figure 24 View program details - Model 559

Table 22 View program details- Model 559
Feature

Description

PV2

Process Variable #2 value, for deviation check.

PV3

Process Variable #3 value, for deviation check.

ELAPSED SEG TIME #

Time elapsed in the indicated segment.

ELAPSED PGM TIME #

Time elapsed in the program.

SEG TIME REMAIN

Time remaining in the indicated segment.

Bold items are read-only.

Load program
This menu lets you load a program from memory, using a profile number or selecting from a profile list,
into a setpoint programmer where it can be run or edited.
Table 23 Program load details
Feature

Description

CURRENT PROFILE NUMBER

Number of program being run by the programmer.

CURRENT PROFILE NAME

Name of program being run by the programmer.

CURRENT PROFILE DESCR

Description of program being run by the programmer.

LOAD FROM PROFILE NUMBER

Number of profile to be loaded from memory. Load profile number 0 (zero)

will clear the working program. See Figure 25.

LOAD FROM PROFILE LIST

Profile number selected from a list of profiles that appears will be loaded
from memory. See Figure 26.

60

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

Revision 12
11/08

Setpoint Programmers
Load program

Feature

Description

After loading, the program will start at this segment. Subsequent runs will
start at Segment #1. If the segment number is within a loop, the profile
cycles through the looped segments according to the number of loop
cycles.

SEGMENT NUMBER

Bold items are read-only.

LOAD PROFILE TO SPPTAG1

MAY 05
11:30

SP PROGRAMMER SPTAG1
STATE PROFILE SEGMENT

RUN

RAMP

1
1
PRIMARY
AUXLABEL
1450.0 ENGU
31.0 ENGU
1449.0 ENGU
31.1 ENGU

PV
SP

ELAPSED SEGMENT TIME

ELAPSED PGM TIME
SEG TIME REMAIN
PV2
PV3

F1
RUN
F2
HOLD

0001:30:00
0006:00:00
0000:10:00

F3
RESET

Program #1
contains Profile #1

Step 1

CURRENT PROFILE NUMBER

1
CURRENT PROFILE NAME
MYPROFIL
CURRENT PROFILE DESCR
MY TEST PROFILE
LOAD FROM PROFILE NUMBER
3
LOAD FROM PROFILE LIST
SEGMENT NUMBER
5

Select LOAD

0
0
EV1
EV1
EV1
EV1
EV1
EV1
EV1
EV1

LOAD
CLEAR
EDIT
SAVE
ALARM

OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF

MESSAGE TEXT

EV9
EV9
EV9
EV9
EV9
EV9
EV9
EV9

OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF

HZ

F4
ADV

RUN

Step 2
Select LOAD FROM
PROFILE NUMBER
and
SEGMENT NUMBER.

ALARM

MESSAGE TEXT

Profiles in RAM.
SP PROGRAMMER SPTAG1
STATE PROFILE SEGMENT

RUN

3
5
PRIMARY
AUXLABEL
1450.0 ENGU
31.0 ENGU
1449.0 ENGU
31.1 ENGU

PV
SP

ELAPSED SEGMENT TIME

ELAPSED PGM TIME
SEG TIME REMAIN
PV2
PV3

F1
RUN
F2
HOLD

0001:30:00
0006:00:00
0000:10:00

F3
RESET

0
0
EV1
EV1
EV1
EV1
EV1
EV1
EV1
EV1

LOAD
CLEAR
EDIT
SAVE
ALARM

MAY 05
11:30

RAMP

MESSAGE TEXT

OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF

EV9
EV9
EV9
EV9
EV9
EV9
EV9
EV9

OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF

HZ

Step 4
Profile #3 is loaded from RAM
to Program #1. Program
will start at Segment #5 during
its first run. Subsequent
runs always start at Segment
#1.

HZ

RUN

Step 3

Profile #1
Profile #2
Profile #3
.
.
.

F4
ADV

RUN

`
Figure 25 Example of loading a program from a profile number - Model 1042

Revision 12
11/08

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

61

Setpoint Programmers
Load program

MAY 05
11:30

SP PROGRAMMER SPTAG1
STATE PROFILE SEGMENT

RUN

RAMP

1
1
PRIMARY
AUXLABEL
1450.0 ENGU
31.0 ENGU
1449.0 ENGU
31.1 ENGU

PV
SP

ELAPSED SEGMENT TIME

ELAPSED PGM TIME
SEG TIME REMAIN
PV2
PV3

F1
RUN
F2
HOLD

0001:30:00
0006:00:00
0000:10:00

F3
RESET

LOAD PROFILE TO SPPTAG1

Program #1
contains Profile #1

Step 1

CURRENT PROFILE NUMBER

1
CURRENT PROFILE NAME
MYPROFIL
CURRENT PROFILE DESCR
MY TEST PROFILE
LOAD FROM PROFILE NUMBER
3
LOAD FROM PROFILE LIST
SEGMENT NUMBER
5

Select LOAD

0
0
EV1
EV1
EV1
EV1
EV1
EV1
EV1
EV1

LOAD
CLEAR
EDIT
SAVE
ALARM

OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF

MESSAGE TEXT

EV9
EV9
EV9
EV9
EV9
EV9
EV9
EV9

OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF

HZ

F4
ADV

RUN

Step 2
Select LOAD FROM
PROFILE LIST
and
SEGMENT NUMBER.

ALARM

MESSAGE TEXT

HZ

RUN

Step 3
SP PROGRAMMER SPTAG1
STATE PROFILE SEGMENT

RUN

3
5
PRIMARY
AUXLABEL
1450.0 ENGU
31.0 ENGU
1449.0 ENGU
31.1 ENGU

PV
SP

ELAPSED SEGMENT TIME

ELAPSED PGM TIME
SEG TIME REMAIN
PV2
PV3

F1
RUN
F2
HOLD

0001:30:00
0006:00:00
0000:10:00

F3
RESET

0
0
EV1
EV1
EV1
EV1
EV1
EV1
EV1
EV1

LOAD
CLEAR
EDIT
SAVE
ALARM

MAY 05
11:30

RAMP

MESSAGE TEXT

OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF

EV9
EV9
EV9
EV9
EV9
EV9
EV9
EV9

OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF

HZ

F4
ADV

Step 4
Profile #3 is loaded from RAM
to Program #1. Program
will start at Segment #5 during
its first run. Subsequent
runs always start at Segment
#1.

PROFILES IN MEMORY
1 PROFILE NAME
2 PROFILE NAME
3 PROFILE NAME
4 PROFILE NAME
5 PROFILE NAME
6 PROFILE NAME
7 PROFILE NAME
8 PROFILE NAME
9 PROFILE NAME
10 PROFILE NAME

RUN

`
Figure 26 Example of loading a program from a profile list - Model 1042

62

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

Revision 12
11/08

Setpoint Programmers
Edit segments

Edit segments
This menu lets you edit the profile segments of the working program. Edits do not affect profiles in
memory unless you save them.
ATTENTION

Program must be in READY, HOLD, or STOP state before segments can be edited.

Table 24 Edit segments details

Feature

Description

F1 - NEXT SEG

Press F1 to edit next segment.

F2 - PREV SEG

Press F2 to edit previous segment.

REFERENCE PROFILE

Number, label, and description of program being edited.

SEGMENT #

Segment being edited.

SEGMENT TYPE

Ramp or Soak

TIME UNITS

Time units of the profile. Minutes or Hours.

RAMP TYPE

TIME: Each ramp segments time is the TIME allotted to the profiles
output to reach the next soak segments value in hours or minutes.
OR
RATE: Each ramp segments time specifies the RATE at which that
profiles output will reach the next soak segment, where the rate is
specified in EU/hour or EU/minute.

STARTING VALUE

Starting value of the segment.

TIME/RATE

Range = 0.00 hr. to 9999.99 hr. or 0.00 min. to 9999.99 min. The function
of this value depends on the Ramp Type.

AUX START VALUE

Select a fixed soak value for this segment.

Bold items are read-only.

Revision 12
11/08

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

63

Setpoint Programmers
Edit segments

TIP
Edits are allowed to any segment of the program, including the current segment.
If edit is to current segment and segment is a ramp:

- If the ramp type is edited, then the time remaining is recalculated and the ramp rate is
adjusted accordingly.
- If the ramp rate is edited, then the time remaining is adjusted accordingly.
- Changes to the ramp starting setpoint will be ignored for the current execution of the
segment, but will be used for subsequent execution if the segment is included in a loop.
If edit is to current segment and segment is a soak:

- Changes to the soak setpoint will result in a step change.

- Changes to the time will cause recalculation of the segment time remaining. If the result is
less than or equal to 0, the program will advance to the next segment upon returning to
RUN state.
If the current segment is a ramp and the starting value of the following segment is changed,
then the time remaining in the ramp segment will be adjusted accordingly but the ramp rate
will remain unchanged.
Edits to soak setpoints will result in a step change at the next segment unless the starting
value of that segment is changed to the same value as well.

64

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

Revision 12
11/08

Setpoint Scheduler
Overview
A setpoint schedule produces multiple setpoint outputs on a common time base. A setpoint schedule
contains multiple segments. Each segment contains multiple ramp or soak setpoints, multiple auxiliary soak
outputs, and multiple events. The last segment setpoint must be a soak.
The Setpoint Scheduler can run any of the schedules in controller memory. Any schedule can be edited and
saved in one of the slots in the controllers memory.
A Setpoint guarantee function (known as guaranteed hold) is provided that holds the Scheduler if a process
variable exceeds a predefined deviation from setpoint. Guaranteed hold is set on a per-segment basis and
can be set for high deviation, low deviation, high and low deviation, or none.
The schedule may be changed (with some exceptions) from the current state to a new state by the operator
as well as by inputs to the Scheduler function block in the controller configuration. Table 25 lists the
resulting states.
Table 25 SPS inputs and current state
Input

Current State
READY

HOLD

RESET

READY

READY

HOLD

HOLD

RUN
GHOLD

RUN

GHOLD

STOP

DISABLE

RUN

READY

READY

READY

HOLD

HOLD

HOLD

STOP

HOLD

RUN

RUN

RUN

GHOLD

STOP

RUN

READY

HOLD

GHOLD

GHOLD

STOP

READY

With regard to changing schedule state, if more than one function block input is on in the same execution
cycle, RESET has priority over HOLD and RUN, and GHOLD has priority over RUN.
Also, function block inputs will override inputs from the Operator Panel, which occur during the same
execution cycle. Finally, state changes from the Operator Panel are processed on the basis of the last
change wins.

Revision 12
11/08

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

65

Setpoint Scheduler
Setpoint Scheduler Setup - Model 559 and 1042

Setpoint Scheduler Setup - Model 559 and 1042

Access
Setpoint Scheduler setup is done through the SP Scheduler menu, accessed through the Main Menu. Press
"Enter" for Select Schedule menu. (Schedule 1 or 2). Press "Enter" again to Edit Schedule.
See also
While operating Setpoint Scheduler functions, messages may be displayed. See Table 175 for message
descriptions.
Whats in this section
Topic

66

See Page

Edit Schedule

67

Edit Segments

68

Edit Setpoints

69

Edit Segment Events

70

Edit Guarantee Hold

71

Save Schedule

72

Edit Guarantee Hold Limits

73

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

Revision 12
11/08

Setpoint Scheduler
Edit schedule

Edit schedule
This display lets you edit parameters of the selected schedule. Edits affect only the currently working
schedule, not the schedule in memory, unless you save the schedule.
ATTENTION

Schedule must be in READY state to edit the values on this display.

Table 26 Edit schedule details

Feature

Description

EDIT SEGMENTS

Accesses Edit Segments menu (page 68) where you can edit each
segment.

SAVE SCHEDULE

Saves changes you make to this display. Schedule is saved in the

controllers schedule memory where it can be loaded and run later.

LABEL

Identifies the schedule with text.

TIME UNITS

This selection assigns the time units (hours or minutes) for the schedule.

JOG SEGMENT

Segment to which the schedule will jump to when the JOG discrete input
is pulsed.

EDIT GUAR HOLD LIMITS

Accesses Edit Guarantee Hold Limits display (page 73) where you can
edit guaranteed hold limits for each setpoint.

Revision 12
11/08

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

67

Setpoint Scheduler
Edit segments

Edit segments
This menu lets you specify segment parameters. Edits do not affect schedules in memory unless you save
them.
ATTENTION

Schedule must be in READY or STOP state before segments can be edited from this menu.

Table 27 Edit segment details

Feature

Description

F1 - NEXT SEG

Select this to edit next segment.

F2 - PREV SEG

Select this to edit previous segment.

EDITING SCHEDULE #

Number of schedule being edited.

SEGMENT #

Segment being edited.

TIME

Range = 0.00 hr. to 9999.999 hr. or 0.00 min. to 9999.999 min.

RECYCLE COUNT

Number of recycles left

RECYCLE SEGMENT #

Recycle segment number

EDIT SETPOINTS

Select this to edit the segment setpoints. See Edit setpoints (page 69).

EDIT EVENTS

Select this to edit the segment events. See Edit segment events (page
70).

EDIT GUARANTEE HOLD

Select this to edit the segments guarantee hold settings. See Edit
guarantee hold (page 71).

68

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

Revision 12
11/08

Setpoint Scheduler
Edit setpoints

Edit setpoints
This lets you edit the setpoints (8 main and 8 auxiliary) of any segment in the schedule.
Table 28 Edit setpoints details
Feature

SPLABEL1 SP1 123456.7 ENGU

.
.
.

Description

Listed are each setpoints label, identifier, value, and engineering units.
Select a setpoint value to change and then press Enter to save the
change.

SPLABEL8 SP8 123456.7 ENGU

AXLABEL1 AX1 123456.7 ENGU
.
.
.

Press "Page Down" to list the auxiliary setpoints. Listed are each auxiliary
setpoints label, identifier, value, and engineering units. Select a setpoint
value to change and then press Enter to save the change.

AXLABEL8 AX8 123456.7 ENGU

Revision 12
11/08

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

69

Setpoint Scheduler
Edit segment events

Edit segment events

This lets you edit the state of up to 16 events for the selected segment. You can configure 1 to 16 segment
events to turn ON or OFF at the beginning of each segment. Segment events are digital switches that
provide ON/OFF outputs. When a segment event is turned ON, it remains ON until the end of the segment
at which time it is turned OFF unless it is configured to turn ON in the next segment.
Table 29 Edit segment events details
Feature

EVENT #1 16

Description

ON or OFF

TIP

Events can be edited only while schedule is in READY state.

70

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

Revision 12
11/08

Setpoint Scheduler
Edit guarantee hold

Edit guarantee hold

This lets you specify the conditions under which a segment will GHOLD when deviation exceeds the
guarantee hold limits. If any setpoints guarantee hold limit is exceeded, the entire schedule enters GHOLD
state (all setpoints, auxiliary setpoints, and segment events freeze on their current value or state) until none
of the limits are exceeded, whereupon the schedule will resume RUN state.
Table 30 Edit guarantee hold details
Feature

SPLABEL SP1
.
.
.

Description

OFF: Segment will not GHOLD when the PV deviates from SP by its
guarantee hold limit.
HIGH: Segment will GHOLD if PV deviates above SP by more than the
SP guarantee hold limit.

SPLABEL SP8

LOW: Segment will GHOLD if PV deviates below SP by more than the SP

guarantee hold limit.
HI/LO: Segment will GHOLD if PV deviates above or below SP by more
than the SP guarantee hold limit.

See also
See Edit guarantee hold limits (page 73).

Revision 12
11/08

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

71

Setpoint Scheduler
Save schedule

Save schedule
This function saves a schedule to the controllers schedule memory. It is accessed through the main menu
or through the Scheduler Popup menu. The Scheduler can run any of the schedules in controller memory.
You can choose to save a schedule back to controller memory after editing it. See Figure 27.

Table 31 Schedule save details

Feature

Description

CURRENT SCHEDULE NUMBER

CURRENT SCHEDULE NAME
CURRENT SCHEDULE DESCR

The number, name, and description of the schedule currently loaded into
the scheduler.

SAVE TO SCHEDULE NUMBER

There are slots available in memory for schedules.

ATTENTION: You will overwrite any schedule in the slot. Select the
desired slot and press Enter to save the schedule. The schedule is also
saved in the Scheduler.
NOTE: This item will not be displayed if the Save Schedule function has
been disabled via the HC Designer configuration software (Version 2.100
and later).

SAVE IS NOT PERMITTED

The Save Schedule function has been disabled via the HC Designer
configuration software (Version 2.100 and later).

Bold items are read-only.

Schedules in RAM
SPSTAG1 SCHED 3 MYSCHED
STATE

Schedule #2

SEG REM 0000:00:00 TOTL 0000:00:00

100

SP
SP1 SPLABEL1 1234567.8
SP2 SPLABEL2 1234567.8
SP3 SPLABEL3 1234567.8
SP4 SPLABEL4 1234567.8
SP5 SPLABEL5 1234567.8
SP6 SPLABEL6 1234567.8
SP7 SPLABEL7 1234567.8
SP8 SPLABEL8 1234567.8

Schedule #3
was previously
loaded into
the Scheduler.

2
SEG

RECYCLES REMAIN

100

F1
RUN

SP
SP1 SPLABEL1 1234567.8
SP2 SPLABEL2 1234567.8
SP3 SPLABEL3 1234567.8
SP4 SPLABEL4 1234567.8
SP5 SPLABEL5 1234567.8
SP6 SPLABEL6 1234567.8
SP7 SPLABEL7 1234567.8
SP8 SPLABEL8 1234567.8

PV
1234567.8
1234567.8
1234567.8
1234567.8
1234567.8
1234567.8
1234567.8
1234567.8

ENGU
ENGU
ENGU
ENGU
ENGU
ENGU
ENGU
ENGU

F2
HOLD
F3
RESET
F4
ADV

SPSTAG1 SCHED 3 MYSCHED

F2
HOLD
F3
RESET
F4
ADV

SEG

Schedule #1
Schedule #2
Schedule #3
.
.
.

11:30

RECYCLES REMAIN

READY
RUN
# 2
100
START
SEG REM 0000:00:00 TOTL 0000:00:00
HOLD
SP
PV
RESET
SP1 SPLABEL1 1234567.8 1234567.8 ENGU
SP2 SPLABEL2CLEAR
1234567.8 1234567.8 ENGU
SP3 SPLABEL3ADVANCE
1234567.8 1234567.8 ENGU
SP4 SPLABEL4 1234567.8 1234567.8 ENGU
EVENTS
SP5 SPLABEL5VIEW
1234567.8
1234567.8 ENGU
SP6 SPLABEL6VIEW
1234567.8
1234567.8 ENGU
AUX
SP7 SPLABEL7 1234567.8 1234567.8 ENGU
EDIT
SP8 SPLABEL8 1234567.8 1234567.8 ENGU
LOAD
LOAD
SAVE
MORE COMMANDS

Select MORE COMMANDS

Schedules in RAM

SEG REM 0000:00:00 TOTL 0000:00:00

ENGU
ENGU
ENGU
ENGU
ENGU
ENGU
ENGU
ENGU

LOAD
MORE COMMANDS

SPSTAG1 SCHED 3 MYSCHED 11:30

READY # 2

F1
RUN

PV
1234567.8
1234567.8
1234567.8
1234567.8
1234567.8
1234567.8
1234567.8
1234567.8

Scheduler now contains

Schedule #2.

STATE

11:30

RECYCLES REMAIN

READY # 2
RUN

Schedule #3
.
.
.

SEG

STATE

Schedule #1

F1
RUN
F2
HOLD
F3
RESET
F4
ADV

...then select SAVE.

SAVE SCHEDULE
Schedule #3 is saved as
Schedule #2 in RAM. CURRENT SCHEDULE NUMBER
SAVE TO SCHEDULE NUMBER

3
2

Select SAVE TO
SCHEDULE # 2

LOAD
MORE COMMANDS

Figure 27 Example of saving a schedule

72

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

Revision 12
11/08

Setpoint Scheduler
Save schedule

Edit guarantee hold limits

This lets you specify the amount of deviation needed between a setpoint and its PV for the schedule to
automatically switch to GHOLD state. If any setpoints guarantee hold limit is exceeded, the entire
schedule enters GHOLD state (all setpoints, auxiliary setpoints, and segment events freeze on their current
value or state) until none of the limits are exceeded, whereupon the schedule will resume RUN state.
Table 32 Edit guarantee hold limits details
Feature

SPLABEL1 SP1
.
.
.

Description

For each setpoint, enter the minimum amount of deviation between the
Setpoint and PV that will GHOLD the schedule.

SPLABEL8 SP8

See also
See Edit guarantee hold (page 71).

Revision 12
11/08

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

73

Setpoint Scheduler
Setpoint Schedule Operation

Setpoint Schedule Operation

Overview
Access the Setpoint schedule operation display by using the Display Group keys

through

].

See also
While performing setpoint schedule operations, messages may be displayed. See Table 175 for message
descriptions.
Whats in this section
Topic

See Page

Setpoint Schedule Operation - Model 1042

75

Setpoint Schedule Operation - Model 559

77

Scheduler Popup Menu - Model 559

79

Load Schedule

81

View Scheduler Events

83

View Auxiliary Data

84

Edit Schedule Segments

85

Security
When Security is enabled, (See Set Security) the SPS operate display works as follows:
When the display is initially called, the security pop-up appears. Enter the proper security code then reselect the function. Access is permitted without further interruption of the security pop-up until the
display is removed from view.

74

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

Revision 12
11/08

Setpoint Scheduler
Setpoint schedule operation - Model 1042

Setpoint schedule operation - Model 1042

This display shows live values of a setpoint scheduler.
There are selections on the display that let you adjust and view parameters of the schedule.
SP SCHEDULER SPSTAG1
MYSCHED
MY TEST SCHEDULE
STATE

SCHED SEG

RUN

SEG REMAIN 0000:00:00

SP1
SP1
SP1
SP1
SP1
SP1
SP1
SP1

USERLBL1
USERLBL1
USERLBL1
USERLBL1
USERLBL1
USERLBL1
USERLBL1
USERLBL1

SP
123456.7
123456.7
123456.7
123456.7
123456.7
123456.7
123456.7
123456.7

MAY 05
11:30

RECYCLES REMAIN

0
TOTAL 0000:00:00
PV
123456.7
123456.7
123456.7
123456.7
123456.7
123456.7
123456.7
123456.7

ENGU
ENGU
ENGU
ENGU
ENGU
ENGU
ENGU
ENGU

F1
RUN
F2
HOLD
F3
RESET

LOAD
CLEAR
VIEW EVENTS
VIEW AUX
EDIT
SAVE

ALARM

F4
ADV

MESSAG E TEXT

HZ

RUN

Figure 28 Setpoint schedule operation - Model 1042

Table 33 Setpoint schedule operation details - Model 1042
Feature

Description

SPSTAG1

Name of the selected Scheduler block.

MYSCHED

Name of the selected schedule.

MY TEST SCHEDULE

Description of the selected schedule.

STATE

READY: Schedule is at the beginning of segment and is ready to run. All

events are OFF.
HOLD: Schedule is paused at the setpoint value shown.
RUN: Schedule is executing normally.
GHOLD: Schedule is paused because of excessive deviation.
STOP: Schedule has reached the end of the last segment.
DISABLE: Schedule is prevented from starting until the Scheduler disable
control is ON.

SCHED

Schedule # is the memory location of this schedule.

SEG

Current segment

RECYCLES REMAIN

Number of recycles remaining, according to the highest numbered

segment so far encountered in the schedule.
Example:

Segment #30 has recycle count = 10 and recycle segment #5. Therefore,
the first time the schedule reaches Segment #30, the schedule will recycle
(repeat) Segments #5 through #30 ten times. During the first recycling,
RECYCLES REMAIN will display 10, during the second recycling it will
display 9, etc.

Revision 12
11/08

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

75

Setpoint Scheduler
Setpoint schedule operation - Model 1042

Feature

Description

SEG REMAIN

Time remaining in the current segment.

TOTAL

Total schedule time elapsed in RUN, HOLD, and GHOLD states.

SP

Each setpoint value in the current segment is shown under this heading.

PV

Each PV value is shown under this heading.

LOAD

Accesses the Load Schedule display (page 77). Schedule must be in

READY state.

CLEAR

Erases the schedule from the scheduler. Schedule must be in READY

state. Attention: If you clear a schedule you cant save it.

VIEW EVENTS

Displays the status of 16 events associated with this segment. See "View
Schedule Events" (Page 83 )

VIEW AUX

Displays the name and value of the 8 auxiliary setpoints and their PVs.
See "View Auxiliary Data" (Page 84 )

EDIT

Displays the Edit Segment menu (Figure 35). Schedule must be in

READY, HOLD, or STOP state.

SAVE

Accesses the Save Schedule display (page 72). Schedule must be in

READY, HOLD, or STOP state.

F1
RUN

F2
HOLD
F3
RESET

F4
ADV

Push F1 button to start a schedule that is in HOLD or READY state.

Push F2 button to put schedule in HOLD.

Push F3 button to reset a HOLD, GHOLD, or STOP schedule to the first

segment. Any edits made to the schedule are lost unless they were
SAVED. See SAVE on the display.
Push F4 to cause the schedule to jump to the next segment. Schedules in
the last segment will jump to the end of the schedule. Schedules cannot
be advanced to the first segment.

Bold items are read-only.

76

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

Revision 12
11/08

Setpoint Scheduler
Setpoint schedule operation - Model 559

Setpoint schedule operation - Model 559

This display shows live values of a setpoint scheduler.
SPSTAG1 SCHED 3 MYSCHED
STATE

SEG

RUN

# 2

11:30

RECYCLES REMAIN

100

F1
RUN

SEG REM 0000:00:00 TOTL 0000:00:00

SP
SP1 SPLABEL1 1234567.8
SP2 SPLABEL2 1234567.8
SP3 SPLABEL3 1234567.8
SP4 SPLABEL4 1234567.8
SP5 SPLABEL5 1234567.8
SP6 SPLABEL6 1234567.8
SP7 SPLABEL7 1234567.8
SP8 SPLABEL8 1234567.8

PV
1234567.8
1234567.8
1234567.8
1234567.8
1234567.8
1234567.8
1234567.8
1234567.8

F2
ENGU HOLD
ENGU
ENGU F3
ENGU RESET
ENGU
ENGU
ENGU F4
ENGU ADV

LOAD
MORE COMMANDS

Figure 29 Setpoint schedule operation - Model 559

Table 34 Setpoint schedule operation details - Model 559
Feature

Description

MY SCHED

Name of the selected schedule.

SCHED #

Schedule # is the memory location, 1 to 10, of this schedule.

SPSTAG1

Name of the selected schedule block.

STATE

READY: Schedule is at the beginning of segment and is ready to run. All

events are OFF.
HOLD: Schedule is paused at the setpoint value shown.
RUN: Schedule is executing normally.
GHOLD: Schedule is paused because of excessive deviation.
STOP: Schedule has reached the end of the last segment.

SEG #

Current segment

RECYCLES REMAIN

Number of recycles remaining, according to the highest numbered

segment so far encountered in the schedule.
Example:

Segment #30 has recycle count = 10 and recycle segment #5. Therefore,
the first time the schedule reaches Segment #30, the schedule will recycle
(repeat) Segments #5 through #30 ten times. During the first recycling,
RECYCLES REMAIN will display 10, during the second recycling it will
display 9, etc.
SEG REM

Time remaining in the current segment.

TOTL

Total schedule time elapsed in RUN, HOLD, and GHOLD states.

SP

Each setpoint value in the current segment is shown under this heading.

PV

Each PV value is shown under this heading.

Revision 12
11/08

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

77

Setpoint Scheduler
Setpoint schedule operation - Model 559

Feature

Description

LOAD

Accesses the Load Schedule display (Page 81). Schedule must be in

READY state.

MORE COMMANDS

Accesses the Popup Operate menu (Page 79)

F1
RUN

F2
HOLD
F3
RESET

F4
ADV

Push F1 button to start a schedule that is in HOLD or READY state.

Push F2 button to put schedule in HOLD.

Push F3 button to reset a HOLD, GHOLD, or STOP schedule to the first

segment. Any edits made to the schedule are lost unless they were
SAVED. See SAVE on the popup menu (Figure 30).
Push F4 to cause the schedule to jump to the next segment. Schedules in
the last segment will jump to the end of the schedule. Schedules cannot
be advanced to the first segment.

Bold items are read-only.

78

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

Revision 12
11/08

Setpoint Scheduler
Setpoint schedule operation - Model 559

Scheduler popup menu - Model 559

By choosing MORE COMMANDS, this menu lets you adjust and view parameters of the schedule. Some
actions require the schedule to be in certain states (RUN, READY, etc.). See Table 35.
SPSTAG1 SCHED3 MYSCHED
STATE

SEG

RUN

# 2

11:30

RECYCLES REMAIN

100

F1
RUN

SEG REM 0000:00:00 TOTL 0000:00:00

SP
PV
SP1 SPLABEL1 1234567.8 1234567.8
SP2 SPLABEL2 1234567.8 1234567.8
SP3 SPLABEL3
1234567.8 1234567.8
CLEAR
SP4 SPLABEL4 1234567.8 1234567.8
VIEW
EVENTS
SP5 SPLABEL5
1234567.8
1234567.8
SP6 SPLABEL6
1234567.8
VIEW
AUX1234567.8
SP7 SPLABEL7
1234567.8
1234567.8
EDIT
SP8 SPLABEL8 1234567.8 1234567.8

SAVE
LOAD
MORE COMMANDS

ENGU
ENGU
ENGU
ENGU
ENGU
ENGU
ENGU
ENGU

F2
HOLD
F3
RESET
F4
ADV

Figure 30 Scheduler operate popup menu - Model 559

Table 35 Scheduler operate popup details - Model 559
Feature

Description

CLEAR

Erases the schedule from the scheduler. Schedule must be in READY

state. Do not clear a schedule if you need to save it first.

VIEW EVENTS

Displays the status of 16 events associated with this segment. See "View
Schedule Events" (Page 83)

VIEW AUX

Displays the name and value of the 8 auxiliary setpoints and their PVs.
See "View Auxiliary Data" (Page 84 )

EDIT

Displays the Edit Segment menu (Figure 35). Schedule must be in

READY, HOLD, or STOP state.

SAVE

Accesses the Save Schedule display (Figure 27). Schedule must be in

READY, HOLD, or STOP state.

F1
RUN

F2
HOLD
F3
RESET

Push F1 button to start a schedule that is in HOLD or READY state.

Push F2 button to put schedule in HOLD.

Push F3 button to reset a HOLD, GHOLD, or STOP schedule to the first

segment. Any edits made to the schedule are lost unless they were
SAVED. See SAVE on the display.
Push F4 button to cause the schedule to jump to the next segment.

F4
ADV

When the schedule is already in the last segment, the advance request is
ignored.
Schedules cannot be advanced to the first segment. Current state must
either READY or HOLD.

Revision 12
11/08

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

79

Setpoint Scheduler
Setpoint schedule operation - Model 559

In the following table, X indicates the action can be performed when the schedule is in that state. NA
means the action is not available in that state.
Table 36 SPS popup menu actions according to state
Schedule state
Action

80

READY

RUN

HOLD

GHOLD

STOP

DISABLE

CLEAR

NA

NA

NA

NA

NA

EDIT

NA

NA

NA

SAVE

NA

NA

NA

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

Revision 12
11/08

Setpoint Scheduler
Load schedule

Load schedule
This menu lets you load a schedule from memory into a setpoint scheduler where it can be run or edited.

Table 37 Schedule load details

Feature

Description

CURRENT SCHEDULE NUMBER

CURRENT SCHEDULE NAME
CURRENT SCHEDULE DESCR

Number, name, description of schedule being run by the scheduler.

LOAD FROM SCHEDULE NUMBER

Number of schedule to be loaded from memory. Loading schedule number

0 (zero) will clear the working schedule.

LOAD FROM SCHEDULE LIST

Schedule number, when selected from a list of schedules, will be loaded

from memory.

SEGMENT NUMBER

After loading, the schedule will start at this segment. Subsequent runs will
start at Segment #1. If the segment number is within a recycle loop, the
schedule cycles through the recycled segments according to the number of
recycles.

Bold items are read-only.

SEG

RUN
# 2
READY

Scheduler
contains SCHEDULE #1

11:30

SPSTAG1 SCHED 1 MYSCHED

STATE

RECYCLES REMAIN

100

F1
RUN

SEG REM 0000:00:00 TOTL 0000:00:00

SP
SP1 SPLABEL1 1234567.8
SP2 SPLABEL2 1234567.8
SP3 SPLABEL3 1234567.8
SP4 SPLABEL4 1234567.8
SP5 SPLABEL5 1234567.8
SP6 SPLABEL6 1234567.8
SP7 SPLABEL7 1234567.8
SP8 SPLABEL8 1234567.8

PV
1234567.8
1234567.8
1234567.8
1234567.8
1234567.8
1234567.8
1234567.8
1234567.8

F2
ENGUHOLD
ENGU
ENGU F3
ENGURESET
ENGU
ENGU
ENGU F4
ENGU ADV

LOAD SCHEDULE
CURRENT SCHED NUMBER 1
LABEL678
LOAD FROM SCHED NUM
3
SEGMENT NUMBER
5

Select LOAD

2
Select LOAD FROM
SCHEDULE NUMBER
and
SEGMENT NUMBER.

LOAD
MORE COMMANDS

Schedules in RAM.

SPSTAG1 SCHED 3 MYSCHED

STATE

SEG

RUN
READY # 5

SCHEDULE #1

11:30

SCHEDULE #2

RECYCLES REMAIN

100

F1
RUN

Schedule #3 is loaded from

RAM to Schedule #1.
Schedule will start at Segment
#5 during its first run.
Subsequent runs always start
at Segment #1.

SEG REM 0000:00:00 TOTL 0000:00:00

SP
SP1 SPLABEL1 1234567.8
SP2 SPLABEL2 1234567.8
SP3 SPLABEL3 1234567.8
SP4 SPLABEL4 1234567.8
SP5 SPLABEL5 1234567.8
SP6 SPLABEL6 1234567.8
SP7 SPLABEL7 1234567.8
SP8 SPLABEL8 1234567.8

LOAD
MORE COMMANDS

PV
1234567.8
1234567.8
1234567.8
1234567.8
1234567.8
1234567.8
1234567.8
1234567.8

F2
HOLD
ENGU
ENGU
ENGU F3
ENGU
RESET
ENGU
ENGU
ENGU F4
ENGUADV

SCHEDULE #3
.
.
.

Figure 31 Example of loading a schedule from schedule number

Revision 12
11/08

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

81

Setpoint Scheduler
Load schedule

SEG

RUN
# 2
READY

Scheduler
contains SCHEDULE #1

11:30

SPSTAG1 SCHED 1 MYSCHED

STATE

RECYCLES REMAIN

100

F1
RUN

SEG REM 0000:00:00 TOTL 0000:00:00

SP
SP1 SPLABEL1 1234567.8
SP2 SPLABEL2 1234567.8
SP3 SPLABEL3 1234567.8
SP4 SPLABEL4 1234567.8
SP5 SPLABEL5 1234567.8
SP6 SPLABEL6 1234567.8
SP7 SPLABEL7 1234567.8
SP8 SPLABEL8 1234567.8

PV
1234567.8
1234567.8
1234567.8
1234567.8
1234567.8
1234567.8
1234567.8
1234567.8

F2
ENGU HOLD
ENGU
ENGU F3
ENGURESET
ENGU
ENGU
ENGU F4
ENGU ADV

LOAD SCHEDULE
CURRENT SCHED NUMBER 1
LABEL678
LOAD FROM SCHED NUMBER
3
LOAD FROM SCHED LIST
SEGMENT NUMBER
5

Select LOAD

LOAD
MORE COMMANDS

Select LOAD FROM

SCHEDULE LIST
and
SEGMENT NUMBER.
Schedules in RAM.
SCHEDULES IN MEMORY

SPSTAG1 SCHED 3 MYSCHED

STATE

SEG

RUN
READY # 5

11:30
SPSTAG01

RECYCLES REMAIN

100

F1
RUN

Schedule #3 is loaded from

RAM to Scheduler.
Schedule will start at Segment
#5 during its first run.
Subsequent runs always start
at Segment #1.

SEG REM 0000:00:00 TOTL 0000:00:00

SP
SP1 SPLABEL1 1234567.8
SP2 SPLABEL2 1234567.8
SP3 SPLABEL3 1234567.8
SP4 SPLABEL4 1234567.8
SP5 SPLABEL5 1234567.8
SP6 SPLABEL6 1234567.8
SP7 SPLABEL7 1234567.8
SP8 SPLABEL8 1234567.8

LOAD
MORE COMMANDS

PV
1234567.8
1234567.8
1234567.8
1234567.8
1234567.8
1234567.8
1234567.8
1234567.8

F2
ENGUHOLD
ENGU
ENGU F3
ENGU
RESET
ENGU
ENGU
ENGU F4
ENGUADV

SCHEDULE 1
SCHEDULE 2
SCHEDULE 3
SCHEDULE 4
SCHEDULE 5

LABEL
LABEL
LABEL
LABEL
LABEL

DESCRIPTOR
DESCRIPTOR
DESCRIPTOR
DESCRIPTOR
DESCRIPTOR

Figure 32 Example of loading a schedule from schedule list

82

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

Revision 12
11/08

Setpoint Scheduler
View schedule events

View schedule events

This display lets you see the status of up to 16 events associated with each segment.
SP SCHEDULER SPSTAG1
MYSCHED
MY TEST SCHEDULE

MAY 05
11:30

STATE SCHED SEGMENT RECYCLES REMAIN

RUN

SEG REMAIN 0000:00:00

EV1
EV2
EV3
EV4
EV5
EV6
EV7
EV8

ALARM

SPS1EV1
SPS1EV2
SPS1EV3
SPS1EV4
SPS1EV5
SPS1EV6
SPS1EV7
SPS1EV8

OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF

TOTAL 0000:00:00
EV9
EV10
EV11
EV12
EV13
EV14
EV15
EV16

SPS1EV1
ON
SPS1EV1
ON
SPS1EV1
ON
SPS1EV1
ON
SPS1EV1
ON
SPS1EV1
ON
SPS1EV1
ON
SPS1EV1
ON

MESSAGE TEXT

HZ

RUN

Figure 33 View schedule events

Table 38 View schedule events details
Feature

Description

SPSTAG1

Name of selected schedule block

SCHED #

Schedule # is the memory location of this schedule.

MYSCHED

Name of the selected schedule.

MY TEST SCHEDULE

Description of selected schedule.

STATE

Current state of program.

SEG #

Current segment.

RECYCLES REMAIN

Number of recycles remaining, according to the highest numbered

segment so far encountered in the schedule.
Example

Segment #30 has recycle count = 10 and recycle segment #5. Therefore,
the first time the schedule reaches Segment #30, the schedule will recycle
(repeat) Segments #5 through #30 ten times. During the first recycling,
RECYCLES REMAIN will display 10, during the second recycling it will
display 9, etc.
SEG REM

Time remaining in the current segment.

TOTL

Total schedule time elapsed in RUN, HOLD, and GHOLD states.

EV# EVENTxxx

State of 16 events associated with this segment. ON or OFF.

Bold items are read-only.

Revision 12
11/08

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

83

Setpoint Scheduler
View auxiliary data

View auxiliary data

This display lets you see details on the schedule auxiliary setpoints and PVs.
SP SCHEDULER SPSTAG1
MYSCHED
MY TEST SCHEDULE
STATE SCHED SEGMENT

RUN

AUX1
AUX2
AUX3
AUX4
AUX5
AUX6
AUX7
AUX8

ALARM

SPS1AUX1
SPS1AUX2
SPS1AUX3
SPS1AUX4
SPS1AUX5
SPS1AUX6
SPS1AUX7
SPS1AUX8

SP
123456.7
123456.7
123456.7
123456.7
123456.7
123456.7
123456.7
123456.7

11:30

RECYCLES REMAIN

SEG REMAIN 0000:00:00

MAY 05

0
TOTAL 0000:00:00
PV
123456.7
123456.7
123456.7
123456.7
123456.7
123456.7
123456.7
123456.7

ENGU
ENGU
ENGU
ENGU
ENGU
ENGU
ENGU
ENGU

MESSAGE TEXT

HZ

RUN

Figure 34 View auxiliary data

Table 39 View auxiliary data details
Feature

Description

SPSTAG1

Name of the selected scheduler block.

MYSCHED

Name of the selected schedule.

STATE

Current state of program.

SCHED #

Schedule # is the memory location of this schedule.

SEG #

Current segment.

RECYCLES REMAIN

Number of recycles remaining, according to the highest numbered

segment so far encountered in the schedule.
Example

Segment #30 has recycle count = 10 and recycle segment #5. Therefore,
the first time the schedule reaches Segment #30, the schedule will recycle
(repeat) Segments #5 through #30 ten times. During the first recycling,
RECYCLES REMAIN will display 10, during the second recycling it will
display 9, etc.
SEG REMAIN

Time remaining in the current segment.

TOTAL

Total schedule time elapsed in RUN, HOLD, and GHOLD states.

AUX# AXLABEL

Labels of the 8 auxiliary setpoints

SP

Under the SP heading are listed the values of the 8 auxiliary setpoints.

PV

Under the PV heading are listed the values of the 8 auxiliary PVs.

Bold items are read-only.

84

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

Revision 12
11/08

Setpoint Scheduler
Edit segments

Edit segments
This menu lets you edit the schedule segments of the working schedule. Edits do not affect schedules in
memory unless you save them.
ATTENTION

Schedule must be in READY, HOLD, or STOP state before segments can be edited.

SPS SCHEDULE EDIT SEGMENT

F1 - NEXT SEG F2 - PREV SEG
EDITING SCHEDULE #
3LABEL
SEGMENT #
10
TIME UNIT
HOURS
TIME
EDIT SETPOINTS

0.000

Figure 35 Edit segments

Table 40 Edit segments details
Feature

Description

F1 - NEXT SEG

Select this to edit next segment.

F2 - PREV SEG

Select this to edit previous segment.

EDITING SCHEDULE # LABEL

Number and label of schedule being edited.

SEGMENT #

Segment being edited.

TIME UNITS

Time units of the schedule. Minutes or Hours.

TIME

Range = 0.00 hr. to 9999.999 hr. or 0.00 min. to 9999.999 min.

EDIT SETPOINTS

Lets you edit the segment setpoints.

Bold items are read-only.

TIP
Edits are allowed to any segment of the schedule, including the current segment.
If edit is to current segment:
Changes to the setpoint will result in a step change.
Changes to the time will cause recalculation of the segment time remaining. If the result is
less than or equal to 0, the schedule will advance to the next segment.
If the starting value of the following segment is changed (F1-NEXT SEG), then the ramp rate
in the current segment will be adjusted accordingly but the time remaining will remain
unchanged.

Revision 12
11/08

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

85

Sequencers
Overview
The Sequencer function block controls the states of up to 16 digital outputs and one analog output. Each
combination of output states represents a "State of the Sequencer block, such as PURGE, FILL, HEAT, or
COOL. Each function block supports up to 50 States. The user sets up these states during the configuration
of the function block.
The user-configurable program that runs within the Sequencer function block is called a Sequence. Each
Sequence contains up to 64 Steps; each Step activates one of the 50 States supported by the function
block. Note that the same State can be used by more than one Step within a Sequence.
Each Step within a Sequence may be configured to advance to any other Step based on time (hours or
minutes), digital event (2 per Step), or manual advance. A separate jog function is also provided.
The controller maintains a pool of 20 user-configurable Sequences in its memory. The Sequences in the
pool can be assigned to run within any of the Sequencer function blocks. Once it has been loaded into a
Sequencer function block, a Sequence can be modified through the menus provided on this Operator
Interface. A modified Sequence can also be saved back to the pool for later recall, if desired.

Revision 12
11/08

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

87

Sequencers
Sequencer Setup - Model 559 and 1042

Sequencer Setup - Model 559 and 1042

Overview
The Sequencer menu lets you view and edit the Sequences that are currently loaded into one of the
available Sequencer function blocks. After editing the Sequence you can save it back to the pool of
Sequences for later recall, if desired. Note that you can only edit the Sequence from this menu if the
Sequencer function block is in the READY or STOP mode.
The Sequencer menu lets you view and edit sequences in controller memory. Operating sequences are not
affected. For viewing and editing live sequences, see Sequencer Operation on page 96.
Access
Main Menu: Sequencers.
See also
While operating Sequencers, messages may be displayed. See Table 175 for message descriptions.
Whats in this section
Topic

88

See Page

Edit Sequence

89

Edit Steps

90

Edit Step Details

91

View Step Details

92

View Sequence Outputs

93

Select State

94

Save Sequence

95

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

Revision 12
11/08

Sequencers
Sequencer Setup - Model 559 and 1042

Edit Sequence
Table 41 Edit Sequence
Feature

Description

EDIT STEPS

Displays Edit Steps screen. See page 90.

SAVE SEQUENCE

Saves a sequence to controller memory. Press Enter. "Save Sequencer" screen lets you
"Save to Sequence Number". See Page 95

SEQUENCE NAME

Allows edits to sequence name.

SEQUENCE
DESCRIPTION

Allows edits to sequence description.

TIME UNITS

Select hours or minutes.

JOG TO STEP

Select a step number. When the sequencers JOG input is triggered, the sequencer will
jump to the start of this step then continue.

Revision 12
11/08

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

89

Sequencers
Sequencer Setup - Model 559 and 1042

Edit Steps
MAY06
11:30

SEQUENCE 1 - SEQLABEL SEQDESCR

PAGE 1

OF 4

CURRENT STEP - 11

OUTPUTS
STEP STATE
1 STATE001LABL
2 STATE002LABL
3 STATE003LABL
4 STATE004LABL
5 STATE005LABL
6 STATE006LABL
7 STATE007LABL
8 STATE008LABL
9 STATE009LABL
10 STATE010LABL
11 STATE011LABL
12 STATE012LABL
13 STATE013LABL
14 STATE014LABL
15 STATE015LABL
16 STATE016LABL

NEXT STEP

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

TIMER
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

EV1 EV2 ADV

3
4
2
3
4
2
3
4
2
3
4
2
3
4
2
3
4
2
3
4
2
3
4
2
3
4
2
3
4
2
3
4
2
3
4
2
3
4
2
3
4
2
3
4
2
3
4
2

EDIT STEP DETAILS

VIEW STEP DETAILS
ALARM

MESSAG E TEXT

HZ

RUN

Figure 36 Edit Sequence Steps (Model 1042 Example)

Table 42 Edit Sequence Steps
Feature

Description

STEP

Step number

STATE

Name of state

OUTPUTS 1 - 16
(Model 1042 only)

Output states: 1 or 0.

TIMER

When the timer duration expires, the sequence will jump to this step.

EV1

When Event1 is triggered the sequence will jump to this step.

EV2

When Event2 is triggered the sequence will jump to this step.

ADV

When manually advanced the sequence will jump to this step.

EDIT STEP DETAILS

Lets you edit step details. See page 91.

VIEW STEP DETAILS

Displays detailed popup window. See page 92.

Bold items are read only.

90

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

Revision 12
11/08

Sequencers
Sequencer Setup - Model 559 and 1042

Edit Step Details

Edits are allowed only when the Sequencer function block is in the Ready or Stop mode.
If you specify a next step of zero, the Sequence will STOP when its next step trigger is received. For
example, if Step 1 has a Timer Duration of one minute and a Timer Next Step of zero, the Sequence will
stay in Step 1 for one minute and then STOP.
If you specify a Timer Duration value of zero, the Sequence will remain at that Step until Event 1 or Event
2 occurs, or an Advance input or command is received.

Table 43 Edit Step Details

Feature

Description

F1 NEXT STEP

Displays next step.

F2 PREV STEP

Displays previous step.

F3 GO TO STEP

Displays chosen step.

SEQUENCE NUMBER

Sequence number.

SEQUENCE NAME

Sequence name.

SEQUENCE
DESCRIPTION

Sequence description.

TIME UNITS

Hours or Minutes

SELECT STATE

Displays the Select State popup window. See page 94. Available only from main menu.

TIMER DURATION

Length of the step in time units.

AUX OUTPUT

Value of auxiliary analog output.

TIMER NEXT STEP

When the timer duration expires the sequence will jump to this step.

EVENT 1 NEXT
STEP

When Event 1 is triggered the sequence will jump to this step.

EVENT 2 NEXT
STEP

When Event 2 is triggered the sequence will jump to this step.

ADVANCE NEXT
STEP

When manually advanced the sequence will jump to this step.

Bold items are read-only.

Revision 12
11/08

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

91

Sequencers
Sequencer Setup - Model 559 and 1042

View Step Details

Press Esc to remove the View Step Details popup window.
MAY06
11:30

SEQUENCE 1 - SEQLABEL SEQDESCR

PAGE 1

OF 4

CURRENT STEP - 11

OUTPUTS
STEP STATE
1 STATE001LABL
2 STATE002LABL
3 STATE003LABL
4 STATE004LABL
5 STATE005LABL
6 STATE006LABL
7 STATE007LABL
8 STATE008LABL
9 STATE009LABL
10 STATE010LABL
11 STATE011LABL
12 STATE012LABL
13 STATE013LABL
14 STATE014LABL
15 STATE015LABL
16 STATE016LABL

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

VIEW STEP DETAILS

EDIT STEP DETAILS
ALARM

STEP
STATE

STATE001LABL
TIMER DURATION
0000:01:06
AUX OUTPUT
100.0
NEXT STEP
TIMER 2
EV 1 3
EV 2 4
ADV 2
EVENT 1
TAGNAME1
EVENT 2
TAGNAME2
PRESS ENTER
FOR OUTPUTS
F1 - NEXT STEP
F2 - PREV STEP
F3 - GO TO STEP

MESSAG E TEXT

HZ

RUN

Table 44 View Sequence Step Details (Model 1042 Example)

Feature

Description

STEP

Step number

STATE

State name

TIMER DURATION

Duration of state (hours or minutes)

AUX OUTPUT

Value of auxiliary analog output.

NEXT STEP TIMER

When the timer duration expires the sequence will jump to this step.

NEXT STEP EVENT1

When Event1 is triggered the sequence will jump to this step.

NEXT STEP EVENT2

When Event2 is triggered the sequence will jump to this step.

NEXT STEP ADV

When manually advanced the sequence will jump to this step.

PRESS ENTER FOR

OUTPUTS

Displays a popup window for the outputs. See page 93.

F1 NEXT STEP

Press F1 to view the next steps details.

F2 PREV STEP

Press F2 to view the previous steps details.

F3 GO TO STEP

Press F3 to select any step and view its details.

Bold items are read only.

92

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

Revision 12
11/08

Sequencers
Sequencer Setup - Model 559 and 1042

View Sequence Outputs

Press Esc to remove the Output popup window.
MAY06
11:30

SEQUENCE 1 - SEQLABEL SEQDESCR

PAGE 1

OF 4

CURRENT STEP - 11

OUTPUTS
STEP STATE
1 STATE001LABL
2 STATE002LABL
3 STATE003LABL
4 STATE004LABL
5 STATE005LABL
6 STATE006LABL
7 STATE007LABL
8 STATE008LABL
9 STATE009LABL
10 STATE010LABL
11 STATE011LABL
12 STATE012LABL
13 STATE013LABL
14 STATE014LABL
15 STATE015LABL
16 STATE016LABL

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

VIEW STEP DETAILS

EDIT STEP DETAILS
ALARM

STEP
STATE

STATE001LABL
OUTPUTS
1 OUTLBL01
2 OUTLBL02
3 OUTLBL03
4 OUTLBL04
5 OUTLBL05
6 OUTLBL06
7 OUTLBL07
8 OUTLBL08
9 OUTLBL09
10 OUTLBL10
11 OUTLBL11
12 OUTLBL12
13 OUTLBL13
14 OUTLBL14
15 OUTLBL15
16 OUTLBL16
ENTER:DETAILS
F1 - NEXT STEP
F2 - PREV STEP
F3 - GO TO STEP

MESSAG E TEXT

HZ

ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF

RUN

Table 45 View Sequence Step Outputs (Model 1042 Example)

Feature

Description

STEP

Step number

STATE

State name

OUTPUTS 1 - 16

The configured state of the function blocks 16 outputs.

ENTER: DETAILS

Press Enter to return to the View Details popup screen. See page 92.

F1 NEXT STEP

Press F1 to view the next steps details..

F2 PREV STEP

Press F2 to view the previous steps details.

F3 GO TO STEP

Press F3 to select any step and view its details.

Bold items are read only.

Revision 12
11/08

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

93

Sequencers
Sequencer Setup - Model 559 and 1042

Select State
Lets you select which state to assign to the step.
A unique State, State 0, can be used to indicate the last step in a Sequence. The Sequencer function
block will go to Stop mode when it encounters any Step whos State is State 0. State 0 is the first item
shown on Page 1 of the Select State popup windows.

EDIT STEP 1

F1 - NEXT STEP
SELECT STATE
F2 - PREV STEP
F3 - PAGE
GO TO
1 STEP
OF 4
SEQUENCE NUMBER
1
STATE
1
4
8
12
16 EVENT 1
EVENT 2
SEQUENCE
NAME
SEQNCABC
-- 1 STATE001LABL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -SEQUENCE
DESCRIPTION
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0MAKEPRODUCTXYZ
0 0 0 TAGNAME1 TAGNAME2
- 2 STATE002LABL
TAGNAME4
STATE003LABL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 TAGNAME3
TIME- 3UNITS
MINUTES
- 4 STATE004LABL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 TAGNAME5 -SELECT
STATE
STATE001LABL
--- 5 STATE005LABL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
- 6 DURATION
STATE006LABL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 TAGNAME6 TAGNAME7
TIMER
1.1
--7 STATE007LABL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
AUX--OUTPUT
100.0
--8 STATE008LABL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
TIMER
STEP 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 --- 2
- 9 NEXT
STATE009LABL
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
--- 3
- 10 STATE010LABL
EVENT
1 NEXT STEP
EVENT 2 NEXT STEP
4
ADVANCE NEXT STEP
2
ALARM

MESSAGE TEXT

HZ

RUN

Table 46 Select State

Feature

Description

STATE

Lists all possible states you can assign to the step. Page up and down
to see all choices. Move cursor up or down to the desired state then
press Enter to select.

12

16

16 (Model 1042)

Headings indicating the digital outputs of the block.

(Model 559)

EVENT 1 (Model 1042 only)

Name of the discrete signal that will cause the sequence to jump to a
specified step.

EVENT 2 (Model 1042 only)

Name of the discrete signal that will cause the sequence to jump to a
specified step.

Bold items are read only.

94

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

Revision 12
11/08

Sequencers
Save Sequence

Save Sequence
This function saves a sequence to the controllers sequencer memory. It is accessed through the main menu
or through the Sequencer Popup menu. The Sequencer can run any of the sequences in controller memory.
You can choose to save a sequence back to controller memory after editing it.

Table 47 Sequence save details

Feature
CURRENT SEQUENCE NUMBER
CURRENT SEQUENCE NAME
CURRENT SEQUENCE DESCR

SAVE TO SEQUENCE NUMBER

Description

The number, name, and description of the sequence currently loaded into
the sequencer.
There are slots available in memory for sequences.
ATTENTION: You will overwrite any sequence in the slot. Select the
desired slot and press Enter to save the sequence. The sequence is also
saved in the sequencer.
NOTE: This item will not be displayed if the Save Sequence function has
been disabled via the HC Designer configuration software (Version 2.100
and later).

SAVE IS NOT PERMITTED

The Save Sequence function has been disabled via the HC Designer
configuration software (Version 2.100 and later).

Bold items are read-only.

Revision 12
11/08

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

95

Sequencers
Sequencer Operation

Sequencer Operation
Overview
The Sequencer operation display is accessed by the Display Group keys

through

,[

].

See also
While performing setpoint schedule operations, messages may be displayed. See Table 175 for message
descriptions.
Whats in this section
Topic

See Page

Sequencer Operation - Model 1042

97

Sequencer Operation - Model 559

98

Sequencer Popup Menu - Model 559

99

Load Sequencer

100

View/Edit Sequence

101

Edit Steps/Edit Step Details

102

Security
When Security is enabled, (See Set Security) the Sequencer operate display works as follows:
When the display is initially called, the security pop-up appears. Enter the proper security code then reselect the function. Access is permitted without further interruption of the security pop-up until the
display is removed from view.

96

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

Revision 12
11/08

Sequencers
Sequencer Operation - Model 1042

Sequencer Operation - Model 1042

Access
1

Sequencer operation displays are accessed by the Display Group keys

through

].

Sequencer Operation Display

SEQBLOK1

SEQUENCER
SEQUENCE 20

HEATING

STATE
STEP

STEP
ELAPSED TIME
0000:00:00.0

12:30

SEQ Description

COGS

F1
RUN

MODE
STEP
TIME REMAINING
0000:00:00.0

RUN
SEQUENCE
ELAPSED TIME
0000:00:00.0

F2
HOLD

AUX OUTPUT - AUX NAME 124.6 DEGF

F4 ADVANCES TO STEP 60

STATE 4

VIEW/EDIT SEQUENCE
LOAD SEQUENCE
EDIT STEPS
SAVE SEQUENCE
CLEAR SEQUENCE

F3
RESET

F4
ADV

Figure 37 Sequencer Operation Display - Model 1042

Table 48 Sequencer Operation - Model 1042
Feature

Description

SEQBLOK1

Name of the selected Sequencer block.

COQS

Name of the selected sequence.

SEQ Description

Description of the selected sequence.

STATE

Name of the currently active State.

STEP n

Current step number.

MODE

Current mode of sequence. RUN, HOLD, STOP, READY.

STEP ELAPSED TIME

Elapsed time of step not including time in HOLD.

STEP TIME REMAINING

Time remaining in the current Step.

SEQUENCE ELAPSED TIME

Elapsed time of Sequence since it was started, including time in HOLD.

AUX OUTPUT

Value of auxiliary analog output for the current step.

F4 ADVANCES TO STEP n

Press F4 to advance to the indicated step. Note that you must place the
Sequencer in Hold mode to use the Advance button.

F1 RUN

Runs the sequence.

F2 HOLD

Holds the sequence.

F3 RESET

Resets the sequence. This erases any edits that were made but not saved.

F4 ADV

Advances to the indicated step.

VIEW/EDIT SEQUENCE

Lets you view/edit the sequence. See page 90.

LOAD SEQUENCE

Loads a sequence from sequence number or sequence list into the Sequencer
function block. Once loaded you can run or edit the sequence. See Page 100.

EDIT STEPS

Lets you edit step details. See page 91.

SAVE SEQUENCE

Saves the current sequence to controller memory. See Page 95.

CLEAR SEQUENCE

Erases the sequence from the sequencer. After a clear, to run another sequence
you must load one first with LOAD SEQUENCE.

Bold items are read only.

Revision 12
11/08

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

97

Sequencers
Sequencer Operation - Model 559

Sequencer Operation - Model 559

Access
Sequencer operation displays are accessed by the Display Group keys

through

].

Sequencer Operation Display

SEQUENCER
SEQUENCE 20

COGS

12:30

SEQ Description

F1
RUN

HEATING

STATE
STEP

SEQBLOK1

MODE

READY

STEP ELAPSED TIME

0000:00:00.0

STEP TIME REMAINING

0000:00:00.0

SEQUENCE ELAPSED TIME

0000:00:00.0

AUX OUTPUT - AUX NAME 124.6 DEGF

F4 ADVANCES TO STEP 60
LOAD SEQUENCE
MORE COMMANDS

F2
HOLD

F3
RESET

STATE 4
F4
ADV

Figure 38 Sequencer Operation Display - Model 559

Table 49 Sequencer Operation - Model 559
Feature

Description

STATE

Name of the currently active State.

STEP n

Current step number.

MODE

Current mode of sequence. RUN, HOLD, STOP, READY.

STEP ELAPSED TIME

Elapsed time of step not including time in HOLD.

STEP TIME REMAINING

Time remaining in the current Step.

SEQUENCE ELAPSED TIME

Elapsed time of Sequence since it was started, including time in HOLD.

AUX OUTPUT

Value of auxiliary analog output for the current step.

F4 ADVANCES TO STEP n

Press F4 to advance to the indicated step. Note that you must place the
Sequencer in Hold mode to use the Advance button.

F1 RUN

Runs the sequence.

F2 HOLD

Holds the sequence.

F3 RESET

Resets the sequence. This erases any edits that were made but not saved.

F4 ADV

Advances to the indicated step.

LOAD SEQUENCE

Loads a sequence from sequence number or sequence list into the Sequencer
function block. Once loaded you can run or edit the sequence. See Page 100

MORE COMMANDS

Accesses the Popup Operate Menu. See page 99

Bold items are read only.

98

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

Revision 12
11/08

Sequencers
Sequencer Operation - Model 559

Sequencer popup menu - Model 559

By choosing MORE COMMANDS, this menu lets you adjust and view parameters of the sequencer. Some
actions require the sequencer to be in certain states (RUN, READY, etc.). See Table 50
SEQUENCER
SEQUENCE 20

12:30

SEQ Description

F1
RUN

HEATING

STATE
STEP

COGS

SEQBLOK1

STEP ELAPSED TIME

STEP TIME REMAINING

MODE

READY

0000:00:00.0

F2
HOLD

0000:00:00.0

CLEAR

F3
RESET

SEQUENCE ELAPSED TIME

0000:00:00.0
EDIT STEPS

VIEW/EDIT SEQUENCE
AUX OUTPUT 124.6
SAVE 60 STATE 4
F4 ADVANCES TO STEP
LOAD SEQUENCE
MORE COMMANDS

F4
ADV

Figure 39 Sequencer operate popup menu - Model 559

Table 50 Sequencer operate popup details - Model 559
Feature

Description

CLEAR

Erases the sequence from the sequencer. After a clear, to run another
sequence you must load one first with LOAD SEQUENCE.

EDIT STEPS

Lets you edit step details. See page 102

VIEW/EDIT SEQUENCE

Lets you view/edit the sequence. See page 100

SAVE

Saves the current sequence to controller memory. See Page 95

Revision 12
11/08

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

99

Sequencers
Load Sequencer

Load Sequencer
This menu lets you load a sequence from a sequence number or sequence list to a sequencer where it can be
run or edited.
Table 51 Schedule load details
Feature

Description

CURRENT SEQUENCE NUMBER

CURRENT SEQUENCE NAME
CURRENT SEQUENCE DESCR

Number, name, description of sequence being run by the sequencer.

LOAD FROM SEQUENCE NUMBER

Number of sequence to be loaded from memory. Loading sequence

number 0 (zero) will clear the working sequence.

LOAD FROM SEQUENCE LIST

Sequence number, when selected from a list of sequences, will be loaded

from memory.

STEP NUMBER

After loading, the sequence will start at this step. Subsequent runs will start
at step #1. If the step number is within a recycle loop, the sequencer cycles
through the recycled steps according to the number of recycles.

Bold items are read-only.

100

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

Revision 12
11/08

Sequencers
View/Edit Sequence

View/Edit Sequence

SEQUENCE 1 - SEQLABEL SEQDESCR

MAY06

PAGE 1

11:30

OF 4

CURRENT STEP - 11
OUTPUTS

STEP STATE
1 STATE001LABL
2 STATE002LABL
3 STATE003LABL
4 STATE004LABL
5 STATE005LABL
6 STATE006LABL
7 STATE007LABL
8 STATE008LABL
9 STATE009LABL
10 STATE010LABL
11 STATE011LABL
12 STATE012LABL
13 STATE013LABL
14 STATE014LABL
15 STATE015LABL
16 STATE016LABL

NEXT STEP

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

EDIT STEP DETAILS

VIEW STEP DETAILS
ALARM D MESSAGE TEXT

TIMER
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

EV1 EV2 ADV

3
4
2
3
4
2
3
4
2
3
4
2
3
4
2
3
4
2
3
4
2
3
4
2
3
4
2
3
4
2
3
4
2
3
4
2
3
4
2
3
4
2
3
4
2
3
4
2

HZ

RUN

Figure 40 Edit Sequence Steps

Table 52 Edit Sequence Steps
Feature

Description

STEP

Step number

STATE

Name of state

OUTPUTS 1 - 16

Output states: 1 or 0.

TIMER

When the timer duration expires the sequence will jump to this step.

EV1

When Event1 is triggered the sequence will jump to this step.

EV2

When Event2 is triggered the sequence will jump to this step.

ADV

When manually advanced the sequence will jump to this step.

EDIT STEP DETAILS

Lets you edit step details. See page 102.

VIEW STEP DETAILS

Displays detailed popup window. See page 92.

Bold items are read only.

Revision 12
11/08

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

101

Sequencers
Edit Steps/Edit Step Details

Edit Steps/Edit Step Details

This menu can be accessed directly from the Sequencer Operation display or from the View/Edit Sequence
display.
The items on this menu cannot be edited while the function block is in the Run mode.

Table 53 Edit Step Details

Feature

Description

F1 NEXT STEP

Displays next step.

F2 PREV STEP

Displays previous step.

F3 GO TO STEP

Displays chosen step.

SEQUENCE NUMBER

Sequence number.

SEQUENCE NAME

Sequence name.

SEQUENCE
DESCRIPTION

Sequence description.

TIME UNITS

Hours or Minutes

TIMER DURATION

Length of the step in time units.

AUX OUTPUT

Value of auxiliary analog output.

Bold items are read-only.

ATTENTION

F3 Reset erases all edits unless you save them first.

102

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

Revision 12
11/08

Loops
Overview
The two main tasks associated with loops are setup and operation. Setup is done through the Loop menu
and is described in Loop Setup. Operation is done through various loop displays accessed through the
Display Group keys

through

] and is described in Loop Operation.

Loop modes
All loop displays indicate the current operating mode of the selected loop. Loop modes are described in
Table 54.
Table 54 Loop modes
Loop mode

Meaning

AUTO RSP

Loop is controlling the process and Remote Setpoint is selected.

MAN RSP

Loop output can only be changed manually. Remote Setpoint is selected.

IMAN RSP

IMAN (Initialization Manual) occurs with Cascade loops only.

Figure 41. Secondary Cascade is in MAN or LSP, therefore Primary Cascade
output is tracking Secondary Cascades PV. Remote Setpoint is selected.

LO RSP

LO (Local Override): loop output is tracking the loops Output Tracking value.
Remote Setpoint is selected or High Limit Override Status Is ON.

AUTO LSP

Loop is controlling the process and Local Setpoint is selected.

MAN LSP

Loop output can only be changed manually. Local Setpoint is selected.

IMAN LSP

IMAN (Initialization Manual) occurs with Cascade loops only.

Figure 41. Secondary Cascade is in MAN or LSP, therefore Primary Cascade
output is tracking Secondary Cascades PV. Local Setpoint is selected.

LO LSP

LO (Local Override): loop output is tracking the loops Output Tracking value.
Local Setpoint is selected or High Limit Override is ON.
PID Primary

PID Secondary
RSP
BCO

BCI

When PID Secondary is in Manual

or when Local Setpoint is selected,
PID Primary mode is IMAN. IMAN
causes the PID Primary output to
track the PID Secondary PV.

Figure 41 IMAN loop mode

Revision 12
11/08

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

103

Loops
Whats in this section

Whats in this section

Loop Function

See page

Common Loop Tasks

106

Loop Setup

106

Loop trend

107

Loop Accutune III

108

Tuning Status

110

Loop Accutune

112

Loop tune constants

113

Loop control setup

114

Carbon parameters

115

Loop alarm setpoints

116

Loop limits

117

Loop Operation Displays

104

119

Loop summary

120

Loop control

121

Multiloop faceplate

124

1 loop numeric

125

Single loop faceplate with loop trend screen

126

Loop Tune Constants display

127

A/M bias

128

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

Revision 12
11/08

Loops
Common Loop Tasks

Common Loop Tasks

You can do these tasks from any live loop display.
Table 55 Common loop tasks
Task

How to do it

To manually change a control loops output or setpoint

value

Model 1042 only:

Use the numeric keys
value. Press Enter
Escape

ESC

thru 9 to manually enter a

to accept the value, press

to leave it unchanged.

Model 559/1042:
or Decrement
to manually
Press Increment
select a value. Changes to a value are done live and do
not require pressing Enter, you cannot cancel the
changes by pressing Escape
To adjust a loops setpoint, output, or switch between
Local and Remote setpoints

ESC

1. Access a display that has a cursor around the loop tag

at the top of the display. If multiple loops, press Tab
to move cursor to the desired loop tag.
to move between the loop tag, SP
2. Press Detail
value, and Output value (if in Manual).
3. Adjust values according to previous task.
4. With cursor on the loop tag, press Enter
to that loops control screen:

to jump

LOOP CONTROL
LOOPTAG1 AUTO LSP ENGU
TYPE
PID
PV
1234567
OUTPUT
1234567
LOCAL SP
1234567
REMOTE SP
1234567
SWITCH SP

See Loop control (page 121).

To toggle a selected loop between AUTO and
MANUAL

Revision 12
11/08

Press Auto/Manual

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

105

Loops
Loop Setup

Loop Setup
Access
Main menu.
Select loop
Select a loop. The loop menu for that loop will appear.
See also
While performing Loop menu functions, messages may be displayed. See Table 175 for message
descriptions.
Loop menu
Items on the Loop menu are visible according to the loop type.
Table 56 Loop menu visibility
Loop type
Menu item

PID

LOOP TREND

ACCUTUNEIII

ON/OFF

3 POS

CARBON

A/M BIAS

ACCUTUNE

TUNE CONSTANTS

CONTROL SETUP

CARBON PARAMETERS

ALARM SETPOINTS

LIMITS

HIGH OUTPUT LIMITING

X indicates item is visible

Select one of the following functions from the Select Loop Menu.
Loop Function

106

See page

Loop Trend

107

AccutuneIII

108

Accutune

112

Tune Constants

113

Control Setup

114

Carbon Parameters

115

Alarm Setpoints

116

Limits

117

High Output Limiting

118

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

Revision 12
11/08

Loops
Loop Setup

Loop trend
The Loop Trend shows a graphical and textual overview of a selected loop.
LOOPTAG1
AUTO RSP

TUNE
ENGU

MAY06
11:30
2500.0

07:35

07:55

08:15

1500.0

PV
OUT

2205.0
83.5

SP
DEV

2000.0
205.0

Figure 42 Single loop trend

Table 57 Details of single loop trend
Feature

Description

Loop mode

See Table 54 for details. To change between AUTO and MAN modes, press
Auto/Manual.

Loop Tag

Press Detail to move cursor to this, then press Enter to display the Loop Tune
Constants display. See Loop tune constants (page 113). You can switch between
these two displays; the trend line will be buffered.
Setpoint value of the loop.

PV bar graph on right

side

Current value of PV

PV value at lower left

Current value of PV

PV trend

Shows PV over the last timebase. Timebase can be changed by switching to Loop
Tune Constants display. See Loop tune constants (page 113).

OUT

Loop output. To change, press Detail to move cursor. Press Increment and Decrement
to change value. Loop must be in MAN.

SP

Setpoint value. To change, press Detail to move cursor. Press Increment and
Decrement to change value.

DEV

PVs deviation from setpoint.

TUNE

When this is visible, Loop is being tuned automatically. See Loop Accutune III (page
108) or Loop Accutune (page 112).

Bold items are read-only.

TIP

This display is not selectable from the Loop Menu for ON/OFF or A/M BIAS loop type.

Revision 12
11/08

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

107

Loops
Loop Setup

Loop Accutune III

This display lets you set up and start the loop Accutune III tuning function. When initiated, the controller
will start controlling to the setpoint while it identifies the process, calculates the tuning constants, and
begins PID control with the correct tuning parameters.
Table 58 Details of Loop Accutune III (listed in order of appearance)
Feature

Description

Loop mode

See Table 54 for details. To change between AUTO and MAN modes, press the Auto/Manual
button.

LSP/RSP

See Table 54 for details. This item indicates the source of this loops Setpoint, Local or Remote.

VIEW
TUNING
STATUS

Select this item to view the status of the tuning process on the TUNING STATUS display (Table
59 below).

FUZZY

Select ON to activate Fuzzy Overshoot Suppression to minimize overshoot after a setpoint

change or a process disturbance.
Select OFF to disable Fuzzy Logic.
The fuzzy logic observes the speed and direction of the PV signal as it approaches the setpoint
and temporarily modifies the internal controller response action as necessary to avoid an
overshoot. There is no change to the PID algorithm, and the fuzzy logic does not alter the PID
tuning parameters. This feature can be independently Enabled or Disabled as required by the
application to work with TUNE On-Demand tuning.

PV
ADAPTIVE
TUNING

Tuning method that continuously learns the process as PV deviations are observed and adapts
the tuning parameters to the process response.
DISABLE - Disables PV Adaptive tune.
ENABLE - This method adapts a tuned process to changing system characteristics over time,
when the PV deviates from the Setpoint by a certain amount for any reason.
See note 3.

ACCUTUNE
III TYPE

DISABLE - Disables ACCUTUNE III.

CYCLE TUNING - Tuning parameter values are derived from the process response to the
resultant action of causing the PV to oscillate about the Setpoint value. See note 1.
SP TUNING Setpoint Tuning based on the process response to a Setpoint change.
See note 2.

TUNING
CRITERIA

NORMAL - Very conservative tuning designed to calculate critically damped tuning parameter
values that produce no overshoot.
FAST - More aggressive tuning than Normal. Designed to calculate under damped parameter
values providing faster control to the setpoint but may have some overshoot.

108

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

Revision 12
11/08

Loops
Loop Setup

Feature

DUPLEX
TUNING

Description

Selection of three tuning actions when performing a Cycle Tuning procedure on a Duplex control
loop.
DISABLE - Duplex type tuning is disabled and simplex type tuning is used instead. The resultant
is blended tuning which is derived from the process response to cycling the output between the
low and the high output limits. The calculated tuning parameter values are stored for each side.
MANUAL - Tuning must be initiated manually for each side. The current LSP or RSP value is
used as the target SP for the desired heat or cool side tuning. For the heat side, the output cycles
between 50 percent and the high output limit and for the cool side the output cycles between 50
percent and the low output limit. Tuning values are calculated and stored only for the side tuned.
AUTOMATIC - Heat and Cool tuning are sequentially performed automatically. During the
operation of this tuning the target SP used is the mid point between the high output limit and 50
percent for the heat side and the low output limit and 50 percent for the cool side. During tuning
for each side the cycling of the output results in the PV oscillating around the target SP value.
From the data gathered during the oscillations, tuning values are calculated and stored for each
side. After tuning on both sides is completed, the process SP is returned to the value of the last
SP used prior to the initiation of the tuning procedure.

SP STEP
CHANGE

Configuration parameter for Setpoint Tuning. Select a value between 5 and 15%. This defines the
value of the initial Setpoint step change that is used as the target Setpoint value for process
identification.

SP TUNE
STEP
DIRECTION

Configuration parameter for Setpoint Tuning. The selection of UP or DOWN results in the Setpoint
change value added to or subtracted from the present Setpoint value.

PROCESS
GAIN

Configuration parameter for Setpoint Tuning. Gain identification value for the process. Select a
value between 0.10 and 10.0. Normal value is 1. This value is used to estimate the size of the
initial output step for a Setpoint Tune.

(SWITCH)
TUNE SET

TSET1 uses Gain #1, Rate #1, and Reset #1.

START TUNE

Select this to begin the Accutune III process.

TSET2 uses Gain #2, Rate #2, and Reset #2.

Bold items are read only.

TIP

This display is selectable only from the Loop Menu for PID and CARBON loop type.

Note 1: CYCLE TUNING - This tuning method uses the measured ultimate gain and period to produce
tuning parameter values. Cycle tuning does not distinguish between process lags and always results in gain
based on PV amplitude and calculates values of Reset and Rate based on time of the SP crossings (The
Reset value is always 4x the Rate value.) This method does not require a stable process initially and the
process may be moving.
Note 2: SETPOINT TUNING - When initiated the control loop is put into an initial temporary manual
state until the process characteristics are identified. This period may last up to a minute. During this time
the Tune status shows Not Ready, and then an initial output step is made using the preconfigured size and
direction parameters along with the preset output value. The resultant process action is used to determine
the tuning parameters and once the process identification has completed, the loop is returned to automatic
control.
Note 3: PV ADAPTIVE TUNING - This method adapts a tuned process to changing system
characteristics over time. It operates by observing a previously tuned process for changes in the system

Revision 12
11/08

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

109

Loops
Loop Setup

such as changes in deadtime or other process characteristics that can make a tuned process become
unstable, unresponsive or over responsive. When the PV deviates from the SP by a certain amount for any
reason, the adaptive tuning algorithm becomes active and begins to observe the resulting PV action. If the
process becomes unstable and oscillates, PV Adaptive Tuning eventually brings the process into control by
retuning parameter values (as needed) using a systematic approach defined by an expert based method of
tuning rules. Should the process not oscillate but be observed as too fast or sluggish, a different expert rules
set is applied to result in the slowing down or speeding up of the process by adjusting certain tuning
parameter values. This method continuously learns the process as PV deviations are observed and adapts
the tuning parameters to the process response.
Tuning Status
This display shows you the current status of the Accutune III loop tuning process. It also shows you the
current values of other important loop values (PV, Setpoint, etc.).
Please note that all of the information shown on this display is read-only.
Table 59 Details of the Tuning Status display
Feature

Description

Loop mode

The current mode of this loop, AUTO or MANUAL.

LSP/RSP

The source of this loops Setpoint, Local or Remote

TUNE
STATUS

Inactive The Accutune III tuning process is not active.

ACTIVE
TUNE SET

Tune set being used by the controller (TSET1 or TSET2).

PV

Value of Process Variable

SETPOINT

Value of setpoint

OUTPUT

Output of loop

OVERRIDE
ON

Appears when high output limit override is active.

PV
ADAPTIVE
TUNING

DISABLE - PV Adaptive Tuning is Disabled.

ACCUTUNE
MODE

110

Tuning The Accutune III tuning progress is active.

ENABLE PV Adaptive Tuning is Enabled.

Status indication of present selection for ACCUTUNE III TYPE (DISABLED, CYCLE TUNING, or
SP TUNING).

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

Revision 12
11/08

Loops
Loop Setup

Feature
ACCUTUNE
STATUS

Description

ACCUTUNE III Status and Error prompts:

NOT READY - This is shown:

- When the control mode is Manual.

- For a Setpoint Tune when the difference between the PV and Setpoint is greater than 3%.
- When a Setpoint Tune is initiated and the PV is determined, by the adaptive logic to not have
enough historical data, or the PV is moving too much to begin a Setpoint Tune. Either of these
conditions will result in the Not Ready status and the Setpoint Tune algorithm will then wait until
the PV is determined to be ready for the Setpoint Tune to begin.
READY - Indicates that the PV is at lineout in regards to the Setpoint. Lineout occurs when the
PV is within .2% of the Setpoint value.
TUNE RUNNING - Accutune lll process still active.
ID FAILURE - SP Tune failed to properly identify the process. This usually occurs when SP Tune
is initiated with a process that is moving. Retry the SP Tune making sure that the process is
stable and not moving in any direction.
SP ERROR - For Cycle Tuning this occurs for Duplex, Manual Tuning when the SP value is not in
the proper range. For cool side tuning the SP must be less than 48% and for heat side tuning the
SP must be greater then 52% of the PV range. For SP Tune this error condition occurs if the
deviation between the PV and SP is greater than 3% of the PV range when SP Tune is initiated.
Retry the SP Tune after adjusting the deviation to be less than 3%.
GAIN ERROR - This error condition occurs when the process gain value (Kpg) is not within the
range of 0.10 to 10. Adjust this value to 1.00 and retry the SP Tune making sure that the process
is stable and not moving in any direction.
OUTPUT ERROR - For SP Tune this occurs when the initial output is not within the configured
output limits. Check the SP step direction and size to make sure they are correct or modify the
SP to use a value closer to the PV middle range.
PV ADT RUNNING - PV tuning is active monitoring the process.
ABORT - Current Accutune III process was aborted. An active Accutune III process will be
aborted is if the loop is placed in the Manual mode.
Bold items are read only.

Revision 12
11/08

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

111

Loops
Loop Setup

Loop Accutune
This display lets you set up and start the loop tuning function. When initiated, the controller will start
controlling to the setpoint while it identifies the process, calculates the tuning constants, and begins PID
control with the correct tuning parameters.
Table 60 Details of loop Accutune (not listed in order of appearance)
Feature

Description

Loop mode

See Table 54 for details. To change between AUTO and MAN modes, press Auto/Manual.

STATUS

Inactive, Tuning (is in progress)

PV

Value of Process Variable

OUTPUT

Output of loop

OVERRIDE
ON

Appears when high output limit override is active.

SETPOINT

Value of setpoint

ACTIVE
TUNE SET

Tune set being used by the controller (TSET1 or TSET2).

FUZZY

Select ON to activate Fuzzy Overshoot Suppression to minimize overshoot after a setpoint

change or a process disturbance.
Select OFF to disable Fuzzy Logic.
The fuzzy logic observes the speed and direction of the PV signal as it approaches the setpoint
and temporarily modifies the internal controller response action as necessary to avoid an
overshoot. There is no change to the PID algorithm, and the fuzzy logic does not alter the PID
tuning parameters. This feature can be independently Enabled or Disabled as required by the
application to work with TUNE On-Demand tuning.

ACCUTUNE

Select Enable to display the tuning menu items below. Select Disable to hide them from view.

(SWITCH)
TUNE SET

TSET1 uses Gain #1, Rate #1, and Reset #1.

START TUNE

Select this to begin the Accutuning process.

TSET2 uses Gain #2, Rate #2, and Reset #2.

Bold items are read only.

TIP

This display is selectable only from the Loop Menu for 3 POS STEP loop type.

112

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

Revision 12
11/08

Loops
Loop Setup

Loop tune constants

This display shows the tuning constants for the selected loop.
Table 61 Details of loop tune constants
Feature

Description

ACTIVE TUNE SET

Tune set being used by the controller (TSET1 or TSET2).

SWITCH TUNE SET

Lets you select the active tune set (TSET1 or TSET2). Determines which set
of Gain/PB, Rate, and Reset parameters are used by the loop.

GAIN #1 OR #2 *

Gain is the ratio of the output change (%) over the measured variable change
(%) that caused it. Gain = 100/Proportional Band.

PROPORTIONAL BAND (PB) #

1 OR #2 *

PB is the percent of the range of the measured variable for which a

proportional controller will produce a 100% change in its output.

RATE #1 OR #2

Rate affects the controllers output whenever the deviation is changing; and
affects it more when the deviation is changing faster.

RESET #1 OR #2

Reset, or integral time, adjusts the controllers output according to the size of
the deviation (SP - PV) and the time it lasts. The amount of corrective action
depends on the value of Gain. Reset is measured as how many times
proportional action is repeated per minute (repeats/minute) or how many
minutes before one repeat of the proportional action occurs (minutes/repeat).

FEEDFORWARD GAIN**

Applies Gain to the feedforward variable (FFV).

MANUAL RESET**

Manual Reset is only applicable if you do not use Reset. It allows correction of
output to account for load changes to bring the PV up to setpoint.

SET TIMEBASE

Determines the time axis of the loop trend display: 15, 30 minutes (default), 1,
2, 4, 24, or 8 hours. See Loop trend (page 107) for details.

Bold items are read-only.

*Either Gain or PB is visible but not both. Visibility is selectable with the Hybrid Control Designer.
**Visible only if Loop Type is PID, 3POS Step, or CARBON.
TIP

Revision 12
11/08

You can also access this screen from the Loop Trend (page 107). Pressing Escape will
return you to the Loop Trend, preserving the buffered trend data.

If you access this screen from the Loop menu, the Loop Trends buffered data is not
preserved.

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

113

Loops
Loop Setup

Loop control setup

The Loop Control Setup Display shows parameters of the selected loop.
Table 62 Details of loop control setup
Feature

Description

Loop mode

See Table 54 for details. To change between AUTO and MAN modes,
press Auto/Manual.

TYPE

PID, ON/OFF, CARBON, 3 POS, A/M BIAS

DIRECT/REVERSE

Shows control action.

DIRECT: PID action causes output to increase as PV increases.
REVERSE: PID action causes output to decrease as PV increases.

PV

Value of process variable.

OUTPUT

Loops output in %.

OVERRIDE ON

Appears when high output limit override is active.

LOCAL SP*

Value of Local Setpoint.

REMOTE SP*

Value of Remote Setpoint. This value is changeable only if it is

configured as a second Local Setpoint (LSP2). It is read-only if it is
connected to a function block within the configuration.

SWITCH SP*

Select this to switch between LSP and RSP.

FAILSAFE

Loops output during a failure. -5% to +105%.

RATIO GAIN **

Gain value for a ratio loop. -20 to +20.

RATIO BIAS **

Local bias value in engineering units. -99999 to +99999. Enterable only if

it is configured for local bias. It is read-only if it is configured for remote
bias.

MOTOR DEADBAND % ***

Value of adjustable deadband in %.

MOTOR TRAVERSE TIME (SEC) ***

Motor travel time in seconds.

HYSTERESIS****

Loop alarms hysteresis. 0 to 10% of PV range.

Bold items are read-only.

* Visible for all Loop Types except A/M Bias.
** Visible only if Loop Type is PID, 3POS, or CARBON and Bias/Gain is configured.
*** Visible only if Loop Type is 3POS.
**** Visible only if Loop Type is ON/OFF.
TIP

114

The controller will ignore entry of Local Setpoint if tracking is on and if the loop is in Manual
mode.

Ratio Bias is enterable only if it is configured for local bias. It is read-only if it is configured
for remote bias.

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

Revision 12
11/08

Loops
Loop Setup

Carbon parameters
This display lets you adjust various carbon loop factors.
Table 63 Details of carbon loop
Feature

Description

Loop mode

See Table 54 for details. To change between AUTO and MAN modes,
press Auto/Manual.

FURNACE FACTOR

Lets you adjust the % Carbon as measured by the controller to agree with
the results of actual shim stock tests. This adjustment may be needed to
correct for specific furnace characteristics such as atmosphere
differences, probe location, and furnace leaks.

ANTI-SOOTING

Lets you adjust the anti-sooting factor, which limits the %C working
setpoint of the downstream control block to a value which will not permit
sooting to occur in the furnace. When anti-sooting is ON, then the antisooting factor is calculated as a linear translation of probe temperature to
%C clamped at 0.75% and 2.0%. When anti-sooting is OFF, then the
factor is fixed at 2.0% for all temperatures.

% HYDROGEN

Lets you adjust % HYDROGEN, one of the factors in the dewpoint

calculation. The dewpoint calculation is a function of the mV input (IN)
from the oxygen probe, temperature of the probe, and %H. The equations
used are probe-type dependent and are supplied by the manufacturer.

% CO

Lets you adjust % Carbon measurement to compensate for variations in

the amount of CO in the carrier gas. This value is changeable only if it is
configured as a number. It is read-only if it is connected to a function block
within the configuration.

TIP
Carbon Parameters are visible only for Carbon loop types.

Revision 12
11/08

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

115

Loops
Loop Setup

Loop alarm setpoints

This display shows the loops setpoints and alarm types. A loop can have two alarms; and each loop alarm
can have two setpoints and types.
Table 64 Details of loop alarm setpoints
Feature

Description

Loop mode

See Table 54 for details. To change between AUTO and MAN modes,
press Auto/Manual.

ALARM 1 SETPOINT 1

The value at which the alarm will activate.

No Alarm
PV High - Alarm when PV is greater than the alarm setpoint
PV Low - Alarm when PV is less than the alarm setpoint
Dev High - Alarm when PV - SP is greater than the alarm setpoint.
Dev Low - Alarm when SP - PV is greater than the alarm setpoint.
SP High - Alarm when SP is greater than the alarm setpoint
SP Low - Alarm when SP is less than the alarm setpoint
Out High - Alarm when output is greater than the alarm setpoint
Out Low - Alarm when output is less than the alarm setpoint

ALARM 1 TYPE 1

ALARM 1 SETPOINT 2

same as Alarm 1 Setpoint 1

ALARM 1 TYPE 2

same as Alarm 1 Type 1

ALARM 2 SETPOINT 1

same as Alarm 1 Setpoint 1

ALARM 2 TYPE 1

same as Alarm 1 Type 1

ALARM 2 SETPOINT 2

same as Alarm 1 Setpoint 1

ALARM 2 TYPE 2

same as Alarm 1 Type 1

ALARM HYSTERESIS

Affects the point at which an alarm clears. For Out High and Out Low
alarms, hysteresis is % of the loops output span. For all other alarm
types, it is % of PV span.
PV High - Alarm clears when PV is less than the alarm setpoint by the
amount of hysteresis.
PV Low - Alarm clears when PV is greater than the alarm setpoint by the
amount of hysteresis.
SP High - Alarm clears when SP is less than the alarm setpoint by the
amount of hysteresis.
SP Low - Alarm clears when SP is greater than the alarm setpoint by the
amount of hysteresis.
Out High - Alarm clears when output is less than the alarm setpoint by
the amount of hysteresis.
Out Low - Alarm clears when output is greater than the alarm setpoint
by the amount of hysteresis.
Dev High - Alarm clears when PV - SP is less than the alarm setpoint by
the amount of hysteresis.
Dev Low - Alarm clears when SP - PV is less than the alarm setpoint by
the amount of hysteresis.

TIP

These Loop Alarm parameters are used to set the conditions under which loop alarms occur;
they do not generate the alarm. To generate the alarm, loop alarms must be configured in an
Alarm Group. If a loop alarm is not assigned to an alarm group, it will not be generated. See
Alarms section.

116

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

Revision 12
11/08

Loops
Loop Setup

Loop limits
This display shows all limits related to the selected loop.
Table 65 Details of loop limits
Feature

Description

Loop mode

See Table 54 for details. To change between AUTO and MAN modes,
press Auto/Manual.

SP HIGH LIM*

Highest allowable setpoint value. -99999 to +99999.

SP LOW LIM*

Lowest allowable setpoint value. -99999 to +99999.

SP RATE UP LIM*

Highest allowable rate at which a setpoint changes to a higher value. 0

to 9999 units/minute.

SP RATE DOWN LIM*

Highest allowable rate at which a setpoint changes to a lower value. 0 to

9999 units/minute.

PV HIGH LIM

Highest allowable PV value. 99999 to +99999

PV LOW LIM

Lowest allowable PV value. 99999 to +99999

OUT HIGH LIM**

Highest allowable loop output value. 5 to +105%

OUT LOW LIM**

Lowest allowable loop output value. 5 to +105%

AUTOTUNE OUT HIGH LIM***

Highest value of the output beyond which the motor no longer affects the
process.

AUTOTUNE OUT LOW LIM***

Lowest value of the output beyond which the motor no longer affects the
process.

* Visible for all Loop Types except A/M Bias.

** Visible only if Loop Type is PID or CARBON
*** Visible only if Loop Type is 3POS

Revision 12
11/08

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

117

Loops
Loop Setup

High Output Limiting

On PID loops this feature prevents potentially damaging the product or the process by exposing material to
excessive thermal shock caused by applying the maximum PID output during initial startup or product
changeover. High output limiting is enabled by the Track digital input, and when active, limits the PID
output to a value present on the Track analog input for a user specified time period. After the time period
expires, the output limit ramps up at a user specified rate to the normal (non-override) high PID output
limit. The operator interface will indicate an OVERRIDE status at the bottom of the loop displays when
the High Output Limit is active.
The Output limiting feature is also available for Carbon Potential loops but the output limiting action is
only active after the process temperature limit has exceeded the user specified Low Temperature Limit,
which forces the output to 0% or 50% for duplex outputs.
Table 66 Details of high output limiting
Feature

Description

TYPE

Loop type is PID or CARBON

DIRECT or REVERSE

Shows control action.

DIRECT: PID action causes output to increase as PV increases.
REVERSE: PID action causes output to decrease as PV increases.

HIGH OUTPUT LIMIT OVERRIDE

ENABLE

YES: Changes the operation of track command and track value to output
limit enable and output limit value.
NO: Normal output high limit is used.

HIGH OUTPUT LIMIT OVERRIDE

STATUS

ON: Digital input controlling output limiting is ON.

CURRENT HIGH OUTPUT LIMIT %

Current output high limit. When in override status, this changes

according to loops tracking value and ramp rate. It will never exceed the
loops normal (non-override) high output limit.

TIME IN OVERRIDE

Elapsed time that High Output Limit Override Status is ON and High
Output Limit Override Enable is YES. It will continue counting even after
the loops normal output high limit is reached. It resets to zero when the
Override Status changes to NO (i.e., when loops discrete Output Track
Command turns off).

OFF: Digital input controlling output limiting is OFF.

DELAY TIME (MINS)

Enter number of minutes. When override status is ON, the delay time
elapses before the override output limit begins to ramp up at the
specified rate. Delay time of zero causes the override high output limit to
track the loops tracking value until override status is OFF.

RAMP RATE (%/MIN)

Enter %/minute rate at which the output limit will (after delay time) ramp
up to the normal non-override high limit. Rate of zero causes override
limit to track the loops tracking value during the delay time, after which
high output limit steps without ramping to the normal output high limit.

Bold items are read-only.

118

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

Revision 12
11/08

Loops
Loop Operation Displays

Loop Operation Displays

Overview
1

through 5 [ 8 ]. A variety of
Loop operation displays are accessed by the Display Group keys
loop operation displays are available for your use to fit your application. Selection of display formats is
performed using the Hybrid Control Designer. All available displays are described in this section.
The following loop operation displays are available:
Loop Operation Display

See page

Loop Summary

120

Loop Control

121

Multiloop Faceplate

124

1 Loop Numeric

125

Single loop faceplate with loop trend screen

126

Loop Tune Constants display

127

A/M bias

128

Loop modes (all loop displays)

All loop displays indicate the current operating mode of the selected loop. Loop modes are described in
Table 67.
Table 67 Loop modes
Loop mode

Meaning

AUTO RSP

Loop is controlling the process and Remote Setpoint is selected.

MAN RSP

Loop output can only be changed manually. Remote Setpoint is selected.

IMAN RSP

IMAN (Initialization Manual) occurs with Cascade loops only (Figure 41). Secondary
Cascade is in MAN or LSP, therefore Primary Cascade output is tracking Secondary
Cascades PV. Remote Setpoint is selected.

LO RSP

LO (Local Override): loop output is tracking the loops Output Tracking value. Remote
Setpoint is selected.

AUTO LSP

Loop is controlling the process and Local Setpoint is selected.

MAN LSP

Loop output can only be changed manually. Local Setpoint is selected.

IMAN LSP

IMAN (Initialization Manual) occurs with Cascade loops only (Figure 41). Secondary
Cascade is in MAN or LSP, therefore Primary Cascade output is tracking Secondary
Cascades PV. Local Setpoint is selected.

LO LSP

LO (Local Override): loop output is tracking the loops Output Tracking value. Local
Setpoint is selected or High Limit Override is ON.

Revision 12
11/08

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

119

Loops
Loop Operation Displays

TIP

In the Hybrid Control Designer, loops can be configured to display a specific number of decimal
places for their values. A higher number of decimal places allows more precision; conversely, it
limits whole numbers to the number of digits remaining to the left of the decimal point. In cases
where the desired whole number is larger than can fit in the available digits, the decimal point
will be moved to accommodate the new whole number. In other words, the need to enter a
larger whole number takes precedence over the need for extra decimal places.
A maximum of 7 digits can be displayed, including whole numbers and decimal places.
Example
Loops Set Point High Limit = 5000
Decimal places = 4 (therefore, 7 4 = 3 digits available for whole numbers)

On a loop operation display, operator wants to enter a setpoint value of 2000, a 4-digit whole
number. This is one more digit than allowed by the decimal place setting. Result: The decimal
place setting of 4 is ignored to allow the value of 2000 to be entered.

See also
While performing loop operations, messages may be displayed. See Table 175 for message descriptions.
Loop summary
The Loop Summary lists a text-only overview of up to:
Model 1042 - 16 control loops
Model 559 - 8 control loops.
Table 68 Details of loop summary
Feature

Description

Mode

See Table 67. To change loop mode between AUTO and MAN, press
Auto/Manual.

Number of loops

Up to 16 loops

LOOP TAG

Name of the loop. Press Tab to move to the desired loop tag and press
Enter to go to the Loop Control Display of that loop (page 121).

PV

Value of process variable

SP

Value of setpoint. Press Detail to move to this and adjust the value.

OUT

Value of output. Press Detail to move to this and adjust the value. Loop
must be in MAN first.

Bold items are read-only.

120

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

Revision 12
11/08

Loops
Loop Operation Displays

Loop control
This display is accessible from all loop operating displays.
Table 69 Loop control details
Feature

Description

Mode

See Table 67. To change loop mode between AUTO and MAN, press
Auto/Manual.

TUNE

When this is visible, Loop is being tuned automatically. See Loop

Accutune III (page 108) or Loop Accutune (page 112).

TYPE

Choices: PID, ON/OFF, CARBON, 3 POS, A/M/BIAS

DIRECT/REVERSE

Shows control action.

DIRECT: PID action causes output to increase as PV increases.
REVERSE: PID action causes output to decrease as PV increases.

OVERRIDE ON

Appears when high output limit override is active.

PV

Value of Process Variable

OUTPUT

Value of output

VIEW TUNING STATUS *

Select to view the status of the tuning processon the TUNING STATUS
display (Table 70 below).

LOCAL SP

Value of Local Setpoint

REMOTE SP

Value of Remote Setpoint

SWITCH SP

Select this to switch loop setpoint between Remote and Local.

RATIO GAIN**

Value of Ratio Gain.

Bold items are read-only.

*Appears for PID and CARBON loops

only.
**Appears for ratio loops only.

Revision 12
11/08

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

121

Loops
Loop Operation Displays

Tuning Status
This display shows you the current status of the Accutune III loop tuning process. It also shows you the
current values of other important loop values (Loop mode, LSP/RSP).
Please note that all of the information shown on this display is read-only.
Table 70 Details of the Tuning Status display
Feature

Description

Loop mode

The current mode of this loop, AUTO or MANUAL.

LSP/RSP

The source of this loops Setpoint, Local or Remote

TUNE
STATUS

Inactive The Accutune III tuning process is not active.

PV
ADAPTIVE
TUNING

DISABLED - PV Adaptive Tuning is Disabled.

ACCUTUNE
MODE

122

Active The Accutune III tuning progress is active.

ENABLED PV Adaptive Tuning is Enabled.

Status indication of present selection for ACCUTUNE III TYPE (DISABLED, CYCLE TUNING, or
SP TUNING).

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

Revision 12
11/08

Loops
Loop Operation Displays

Feature
ACCUTUNE
STATUS

Description

ACCUTUNE III Status and Error prompts:

NOT READY - This is shown:

- When the control mode is Manual.

- For a Setpoint Tune when the difference between the PV and Setpoint is greater than 3%.
- When a Setpoint Tune is initiated and the PV is determined, by the adaptive logic to not have
enough historical data, or the PV is moving too much to begin a Setpoint Tune. Either of these
conditions will result in the Not Ready status and the Setpoint Tune algorithm will then wait until
the PV is determined to be ready for the Setpoint Tune to begin.
READY - Indicates that the PV is at lineout in regards to the Setpoint. Lineout occurs when the
PV is within .2% of the Setpoint value.
TUNE RUNNING - Accutune lll process still active.
ID FAILURE - SP Tune failed to properly identify the process. This usually occurs when SP Tune
is initiated with a process that is moving. Retry the SP Tune making sure that the process is
stable and not moving in any direction.
SP ERROR - For Cycle Tuning this occurs for Duplex, Manual Tuning when the SP value is not in
the proper range. For cool side tuning the SP must be less than 48% and for heat side tuning the
SP must be greater then 52% of the PV range. For SP Tune this error condition occurs if the
deviation between the PV and SP is greater than 3% of the PV range when SP Tune is initiated.
Retry the SP Tune after adjusting the deviation to be less than 3%.
GAIN ERROR - This error condition occurs when the process gain value (Kpg) is not within the
range of 0.10 to 10. Adjust this value to 1.00 and retry the SP Tune making sure that the process
is stable and not moving in any direction.
OUTPUT ERROR - For SP Tune this occurs when the initial output is not within the configured
output limits. Check the SP step direction and size to make sure they are correct or modify the
SP to use a value closer to the PV middle range.
PV ADT RUNNING - PV tuning is active monitoring the process.
ABORT - Current Accutune III process was aborted. An active Accutune III process will be
aborted is if the loop is placed in the Manual mode.
Bold items are read only.

Revision 12
11/08

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

123

Loops
Loop Operation Displays

Multiloop faceplate
The Multi-loop Faceplate displays provide loop operation information in an easy-to-read loop faceplate
format. These displays are available in a 2-loop, 3-loop, 4-loop, and 8-loop format (see Note 1). Select any
loop tag to go to the Loop Control display for details on that loop (page 121). Press Tab and Detail to move
cursor around the display.
Note 1. The 8-loop faceplate display is only available on Model 1042. To display 8 loops of information on
Model 559, use the 8-loop Summary display. See Page 120.
LOOPTAG1
2500.0

LOOPTAG2
2500.0

LOOPTAG3
2500.0

LOOPTAG4
2500.0

1500.0
PV 2205.0
SP 2000.0
OUT
83.5
AUTO RSP
LOOPTAG5
2500.0

1500.0
PV 2205.0
SP 2000.0
OUT
83.5
AUTO RSP
LOOPTAG6
2500.0

1500.0
PV 2205.0
SP 2000.0
OUT
83.5
AUTO RSP
LOOPTAG7
2500.0

1500.0
PV 2205.0
SP 2000.0
OUT
83.5
AUTO RSP
LOOPTAG8
2500.0

1500.0
PV 2205.0
SP 2000.0
OUT
83.5
AUTO RSP

1500.0
PV 2205.0
SP 2000.0
OUT
83.5
AUTO RSP

1500.0
PV 2205.0
SP 2000.0
OUT
83.5
AUTO RSP

1500.0
PV 2205.0
SP 2000.0
OUT
83.5
AUTO RSP

ALARM

MESSAGE TEXT

HZ

RUN

Figure 43 Multiloop faceplate (Example of 8 Loop faceplate for Model 1042 only)
Table 71 Multiloop faceplate details
Feature

Description

Mode

See Table 67. To change loop mode between AUTO and MAN, press
Auto/Manual.

Loop Tag

Name of the loop.

Tab to the desired loop tag and press "Enter" to go to the Loop Control
Display (page 121).
Tab to the desired loop tag and press "Detail" to move cursor to the SP
and OUT fields.
Press "Tab" again to move cursor to next loop tag.

Vertical Bar

Graphically shows value of Process Variable within its range.

2500

High scale value of the PV.

1500

Low scale value of the PV.

Arrow

Graphically shows value of Setpoint

PV

Value of Process Variable

SP

Value of Setpoint. You can change this value.

OUT

Value of Output. You can change this only if loop is in MAN.

Bold items are read-only.

124

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

Revision 12
11/08

Loops
Loop Operation Displays

1 loop numeric
This display shows the selected loop. Select the loop tag to go to the Loop Control display for details on the
loop (page 121). Press Detail to go to the SP and OUT values.
LOOPTAG1

2500.0

AUTO

LSP

TUNE
AL1 AL2

PV

2205.0
ENGU

SP
OUT

2000.0
83.5

1500.0

Figure 44 Single loop numeric

Table 72 Single loop numeric details
Feature

Description

Loop Tag

Name of the loop. Tab to the loop tag and press Enter to go to the Loop
Control Display (page 121). Press the "TAB" key to move cursor to the SP
and OUT fields.

Mode

See Table 67. To change loop mode between AUTO and MAN, press
Auto/Manual.

LSP / RSP

Local Setpoint or Remote Setpoint indicator

TUNE

When this is visible, Loop is being tuned automatically. See Loop

Accutune III (page 108) or Loop Accutune (page 112).

AL1 AL2

Loop alarm indicators. See Loop alarm setpoints (page 116) for alarm
setpoints setup.

PV

Value of Process Variable

SP

Value of Setpoint. You can change this value.

OUT

Value of Output. You can change this value only if loop is in MAN.

Bold items are read-only.

Revision 12
11/08

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

125

Loops
Loop Operation Displays

Single loop faceplate with loop trend screen

This operate display shows the selected loop in a single loop faceplate format with a loop trend screen. For
details, press ENTER at this display to call up the Loop Control display (page 121). From there the first
menu item calls up the Loop Tune Constants display (page 127).
LOOPTAG1

11:30

AUTO RSP

100.0
07:35

07:55

08:15

0.0

PV
OUT

2205.0
83.5

SP
DEV

2000.0
205.0

Figure 45 Single loop faceplate with loop trend screen

Table 73 Details of single loop faceplate with loop trend screen
Feature

Description

Loop mode

See Table 54 for details

Loop Tag

Indicates tag number assigned to loop. Press "ENTER" from this display to select
"Loop Control" display (page 121).
Setpoint of the loop.

PV bar graph on right

side

Current value of PV

PV value at lower left

Current value of PV

PV trend

Shows PV over the last timebase. Timebase can be changed in the Loop Tune
Constants operate display.

OUT

Value of loop output. Can be changed when loop is in MAN mode.

SP

Setpoint value. To change, see the Loop Control operate display.

DEV

PVs deviation from setpoint.

Bold items are read-only.

TIP

This display is not available for ON/OFF control type.

126

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

Revision 12
11/08

Loops
Loop Operation Displays

Loop Tune Constants display

This display shows the tuning constants for the selected loop.
Table 74 Details of loop tune constants display
Feature

Description

GAIN #1 OR #2 *

Gain is the ratio of the output change (%) over the measured variable change
(%) that caused it. Gain = 100/Proportional Band

PROPORTIONAL BAND (PB) #

1 OR #2 *

PB is the percent of the range of the measured variable for which a

proportional controller will produce a 100% change in its output.

RATE #1 OR #2

Rate affects the controllers output whenever the deviation is changing; and
affects it more when the deviation is changing faster.

RESET #1 OR #2

Reset, or integral time, adjusts the controllers output according to the size of
the deviation (SP - PV) and the time it lasts. The amount of corrective action
depends on the value of Gain. Reset is measured as how many times
proportional action is repeated per minute (repeats/minute) or how many
minutes before one repeat of the proportional action occurs (minutes/repeat).

FEEDFORWARD GAIN**

Applies Gain to the feedforward variable (FFV).

MANUAL RESET**

Manual Reset is only applicable if you do not use Reset. It allows correction of
output to account for load changes to bring the PV up to setpoint.

SET TIMEBASE

Determines the time axis of the loop trend display: 5 minutes, 15, 30 minutes,
1, 2, 4, 24, or 8 hours. See Loop trend (page 107) in Loops Setup for details.

*Either Gain or PB is visible but not both. Visibility is selectable with the Hybrid Control Designer.
**Visible only if Loop Type is PID or CARBON.
TIP

Revision 12
11/08

You can also access this screen from the Loop Trend in "Loops Setup"(page 107). Pressing
Escape will return you to the "Loop Control" screen, preserving the buffered trend data.

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

127

Loops
Loop Operation Displays

A/M bias
This display lets you assign a bias to the loop PV. That is, OUT = PV + BIAS while loop is in AUTO.
AUTO/MANUAL BIAS
LOOPTAG1
AUTO
AL1

AL2

100.0

100.0

0.0

0.0

OUT
60.1 %
PV
80.3 %
BIAS
-11.2

Figure 46 A/M bias

Table 75 A/M bias details
Feature

Description

Mode

See Table 67. To change loop mode between AUTO and MAN, press
Auto/Manual.

AL1 & AL2

Loop alarm indicators visible while the loop alarm conditions are active.

Loop Tag

Name of the loop. Press Tab to move to OUT.

OUT

0-100 %. To adjust the output (and therefore the bias), select MAN mode,
then adjust with Increment or Decrement.
Bias (OUT PV) is calculated at the moment of transition from MAN to
AUTO.

PV

Value of Process Variable. 0-100 %

BIAS

Bias = OUT PV. Range: 100 % to +100 %.

Bias is calculated at the moment of transition from MAN to AUTO.

Left vertical bar

Output

Right vertical bar

PV

Bold items are read-only.

128

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

Revision 12
11/08

Summary Displays
Analog Input Summary
Access
Main menu, Summary Displays.
Description
Shows address and status of all configured analog inputs.
Table 76 Analog Input Summary details
Feature
ADDRESS
R M C
TAG
DESCRIPTION
VALUE

Revision 12
11/08

Description

Physical location of the analog input (rack, module, channel).

Identifies the point. Default is AI.
Identifies the point. Default is AI.
Current value

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

129

Summary Displays
Analog Input Summary

Feature

Description

ERROR STATUS

Blank: Normal operation

Note: On Model 559

the error status, if
present, will be
displayed in Yellow
directly below the
physical address
(R M C ) of the
channel. This area
will be blank if the
channel is operating
properly.

BURNOUT FAIL: The sensor T/C, RTD, or mV source -- is failing burnout

checks. A BAD CHANNEL I/O module diagnostic is posted.
CJ FAILURE: Two conditions can create this failure. 1) Both cold-junction
sensors are failing. 2) The difference between the values measured by the two
CJs is greater than 10 degrees C. In either case a HI CJ TEMP I/O module
diagnostic is posted.
CJ HIGH TEMP: One of the CJs is indicating a high temperature reading. A HI
CJ TEMP I/O module diagnostic is posted.
CJ WARNING: One of the cold-junction sensors is failing.
CONVERT FAIL: When attempting to take a reading, the analog-to digital
(ADC) fails. This can occur if the incoming signal is either too large or too small.
It also could result if the ADC circuit is failing. If the problem is the ADC circuit,
most likely other channels will have the same failure. A BAD CHANNEL I/O
module diagnostic is posted.
DISABLED: AI channel is programmatically disabled.
FIRMWARE REV: The firmware in the AI module is not compatible with the
firmware in the controller or scanner CPU, or AI module does not support
slidewire as an input type.
FORCED: The point has been manually forced to its present value, probably via
a PC host.
NO CHANNEL: There is no hardware on the I/O module to support this
channel. For example, the customer configured Channel #15 for a given
module, but there is an 8-channel module installed in the rack. A BAD
CHANNEL I/O module diagnostic is posted.
NO COMM: The main controller CPU is unable to communicate with the
channel. Possible reasons are module not installed, wrong module installed,
expansion rack missing, SPI backplane is failing.
OVER RANGE: The signal at the terminals is more than 10% over the
programmed range of the sensor.
RANGE TYPE: The AI module installed in the rack does not support the range
or sensor type configured for this channel. For example, this channels AI
function block is configured as a thermocouple, but there is a high-level AI
module installed in the rack.
T/C FAILING: When burnout check occurs on the T/C, the measured resistance
indicates that the T/Cs resistance is to a point where the burnout failure will
result.
T/C WARNING: When burnout check occurs on the T/C, the measured
resistance is higher than normal.
UNDER RANGE: The signal at the terminals is more than 10% below the
programmed range of the sensor.

Bold items are read-only.

130

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

Revision 12
11/08

Summary Displays
Analog Output Summary

Analog Output Summary

Access
Main menu, Summary Displays.
Description
Shows status and address of all configured analog outputs.
Table 77 Analog Output Summary details
Feature
ADDRESS

Description

Physical location of the analog output (rack, module, channel).

R M C
TAG

Identifies the point. Default is AO.

DESCRIPTION

Identifies the point. Default is AO.

VALUE

Current value

ERROR STATUS

Blank: Normal operation

Note: On Model 559

the error status, if
present, will be
displayed in Yellow
directly below the
physical address
(R M C ) of the
channel. This area
will be blank if the
channel is operating
properly.

CLAMP LOW: The AO function blocks input is less than the configured low
range value.
CLAMP HIGH: The AO function blocks input is greater than the configured high
range value.
BAD CHANNEL:If the channel is an Analog Output: There is no physical output
device connected to this channel, or the output device is showing an open
connection. If the channel is a Pulse Output: The channel is failing to output the
correct value. A BAD CHANNEL I/O module diagnostic is posted.
FORCED: The point has been manually forced to its present value, probably via
a PC host.
NO COMM: The main controller CPU is unable to communicate with the
channel. Possible reasons are:
module not installed
wrong module installed
expansion rack missing
SPI backplane is failing

Bold items are read-only.

Revision 12
11/08

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

131

Summary Displays
Digital Input Summary

Digital Input Summary

Access
Main menu, Summary Displays.
Description
Shows status and address of all configured digital inputs.
Table 78 Digital Input Summary details
Feature
ADDRESS

Description

Physical location of the digital input (rack, module, channel).

R M C
TAG

Identifies the point. Default is DI.

DESCRIPTION

Identifies the point. Default is DI.

STATE

Current state

ERROR STATUS

Blank: Normal operation.

Note: On Model 559

the error status, if
present, will be
displayed in Yellow
directly below the
physical address
(R M C ) of the
channel. This area
will be blank if the
channel is operating
properly.

FORCED: The point has been forced to its present value, probably via a PC
host.
NO CHANNEL: There is no hardware on the I/O module to support this
channel. For example, Channel #15 is configured for a given module, but there
is an 8-channel module installed in the rack. A BAD CHANNEL I/O module
diagnostic is posted.
NO COMM: The main controller CPU is unable to communicate with the
channel. Possible reasons are:
module not installed
wrong module installed
expansion rack missing
SPI backplane is failing

Bold items are read-only.

132

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

Revision 12
11/08

Summary Displays
Digital Output Summary

Digital Output Summary

Access
Main menu, Summary Displays.
Description
Shows status and address of all configured digital outputs.
Table 79 Digital Output Summary details
Feature
ADDRESS

Description

Physical location of the digital output (rack, module, channel).

R M C
TYPE

DO: Digital Output

TPO: Time Proportional Output
3P-F: 3 Position Step-Forward
3P-R: 3 Position Step-Reverse

TAG

Identifies the point. Default is DO.

DESCRIPTION

Identifies the point. Default is DO.

STATE

Current state

ERROR STATUS

Blank: Normal operation.

Note: On Model 559

the error status, if
present, will be
displayed in Yellow
directly below the
physical address
(R M C ) of the
channel. This area
will be blank if the
channel is operating
properly.

FORCED: The point has been forced to its present value, probably via a PC
host.
NO CHANNEL: There is no hardware on the I/O module to support this
channel. For example, Channel #15 is configured for a given module, but there
is an 8-channel module installed in the rack. A BAD CHANNEL I/O module
diagnostic is posted.
OVER CURRENT: A Digital Output module detected an excessive amount of
current on its output terminals. Note that this message will only appear for the
32-channel DO module. A BAD CHANNEL I/O module diagnostic is posted.
NO COMM: The main controller CPU is unable to communicate with the
channel. Possible reasons are:
module not installed
wrong module installed
expansion rack missing
SPI backplane is failing

Bold items are read-only.

Revision 12
11/08

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

133

Summary Displays
Variable Summary

Variable Summary
Access
Main menu, Summary Displays.
Description
A variable is a digital or analog tagged element of a control configuration which allows operator input to
connected function blocks. The Variable display lets you view the values or discrete statuses of variables
that affect your process.
Table 80 Variable summary details
Feature

Description

TAG NAME n

Name of variable.

DESCRIPTOR

Optional description of the variable. If descriptor is not used, TAGNAME is

repeated

Value or state

The setting for an analog point can be any appropriate value from 99999 to
99999, and a digital point can be set in its ON or OFF state.

Engineering Units

The engineering units associated with the variable.

See also
To edit a variable, use the Overview screen. See Overview (page 274).

134

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

Revision 12
11/08

Summary Displays
Variable Summary

Revision 12
11/08

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

135

Alarms
Overview
Access
Alarm displays are accessed through the main menu (Alarms/Events/Diagnostics) or Alarm key.
Alarms defined
There are two senses of the word alarm.
In the first sense, an alarm is a tagged discrete point that warrants operator attention. Also known as an
alarm point. Any tagged discrete point in the controller configuration can be designated as an alarm point.
The person who creates the controller configuration and the alarm displays determines which discrete
points will be alarm points.
In the second sense, an alarm occurs when an alarm point is in its alarm state and is indicated on an alarm
display.

Alarm indication
Alarms are indicated using a 4-level hierarchy.

Red alarm indicator at the bottom of the display. This indicator appears on all displays and alerts the
operator to the presence of an alarm in the system. The red indicator flashes when any alarm exists that
has not been acknowledged; the indicator is solid (not flashing) when all alarms have been
acknowledged but their conditions still exist.

Alarm Summary display. Provides a quick overview as to the location of alarms in the system.

Alarm Group display. This display indicates the specific alarm(s) in an alarm group.

Alarm Detail display. This display provides specific information on a single alarm.

Investigating alarms
Three methods are available to access the Alarm displays. The first two methods are standard; the third
method is configurable.
1. Press Alarm from any display (except alarm group) to see the Alarm Summary. Select the desired group
and press Enter to see the Alarm Group.
2. Press Menu to access the Main Menu, then select Alarms/Events/Diagnostics. Select Alarm Summary.
Select the desired group and press Enter to see the Alarm Group.
3. Configure the Display Group keys to contain Alarm Group displays as appropriate for your application.
Press the Display Group key and use Page Up and Page Down to see the Alarm Groups.

Revision 12
11/08

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

137

Alarms
Alarm Summary

Alarm Summary
The Alarm Summary gives you the composite status of each alarm group.
Access

Main menu, Alarms/Events/Diagnostics, or

Alarm key

Description
Table 81 Details of alarm summary
Feature

Description

ALARM GROUP n

Lists all alarm groups. Each group has up to 12 alarms.

Alarm Group Status

UNACKED: At least one point in the alarm group is in alarm and has not
been acknowledged by the operator. Press Enter to see all points in the
group.
ACKED: No points in the alarm group are unacknowledged. At least one
point in the alarm group is in alarm and has been acknowledged by the
operator. Press Enter to see all points in the group.
CLEARED: At least one point in the alarm group was in alarm then out of
alarm and was not manually acknowledged. Occurs if at least one point is
configured as manual acknowledge. If all alarms in the group are auto
acknowledge type, cleared status cannot occur.
NONE: No points in the alarm group are in alarm.

NOTE: The Alarm Summary Display for Model 559 consists of three pages of 10 groups each. Use the
page Up and Down keys to go between these pages.

138

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

Revision 12
11/08

Alarms
Alarm Group

Alarm Group
This display shows the status of each discrete point in the selected alarm group.
Access
From Alarm Summary or from a Display Group key, if so configured.
Description
ALARM GROUP 1

MAY06
11:30

TAG-0001

TAG-0002

TAG-0003

STATE1

STATE2

STATE1

TAG-0004

TAG-0005

TAG-0006

STATE1

STATE2

STATE1

TAG-0007

TAG-0008

TAG-0009

STATE1

STATE1

STATE2

TAG-0011

TAG-0012

STATE2

STATE1

TAG-0010
STATE2
ALARM

MESSAGE TEXT

HZ

RUN

Figure 47 Alarm group display

For each alarm point the following is displayed.

Tag name

Current state of the point (ON/OFF, OPEN/CLOSED, etc.)

Alarm state. Possible states are

Flashing LED in alarm and unacknowledged. Applies to manual acknowledge and auto
acknowledge alarms.

Solid LED in alarm and was acknowledged manually while in alarm. Applies to manual
acknowledge and auto acknowledge alarms.

C Cleared. The point went in alarm then out of alarm and was not acknowledged. Applies to
manual acknowledge alarms, not auto acknowledge alarms.

Blank Not in alarm

Acknowledging alarms
To acknowledge all alarms in the group, press Alarm. If an alarmed point appears in multiple alarm groups,
you must acknowledge each group containing that point.
Manual vs. auto acknowledge
Alarm points are configured as either manual acknowledge or auto acknowledge.
When a manual acknowledge alarm goes into alarm and then out of alarm without being acknowledged by
the operator, it will be indicated as cleared. When an auto acknowledge alarm goes into alarm and then out
of alarm without being acknowledged by the operator, it will show no indication it was in alarm.

Revision 12
11/08

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

139

Alarms
Alarm Detail

Alarm Detail
This display shows the following details about the selected alarm point in a group:

Tag name and description

Last time the selected point was in alarm

Last time the selected point went out of alarm

Number of occurrences

Two lines of help text

If the selected point has not been in alarm since the Controller was reset, the following message is
displayed: NO ALARM SINCE LAST RESET.

Access
The Alarm Detail display is accessed from the Alarm Group display. See Page 139 for information about
the Alarm Group display.
With Alarm Group displayed, press Tab and Detail keys to move the cursor to the desired alarm tag. Press
Enter to show that alarms details. Press Escape to return to the Alarm Group display.
ALARM DETAIL
TAG-0001 TAG_DESCRIPTOR

MAY06
11:30

LAST TIME IN ALARM

MAY 05 01 12:00:00

LAST TIME OUT ALARM

MAY 06 01 08:00:00

NUMBER OF OCCURRENCES

1ST LINE OF 24-CHAR TEXT

2ND LINE OF 24-CHAR TEXT

ALARM

MESSAGE TEXT

HZ

RUN

TIP

This display does not update periodically, that is, changes to the alarm status while you are
looking at this display are not shown.

140

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

Revision 12
11/08

Events
Event Summary
Access
Main menu Alarms/Events/Diagnostics to Event Summary.
Description
An event is a digital point whose transition warrants operator attention. The Event Summary shows the last
150 events.
ATTENTION

The most recent event is also shown in the event stripe at the bottom of the display. Press
Enter to clear the event stripe.

EVENT SUMMARY

MAY06
11:30

PAGE 1 OF 10
MAY 06 11:15
MAY 06 11:14
MAY 06 11:13
MAY 06 11:12
MAY 06 11:11
MAY 06 11:10
MAY 06 11:09
MAY 06 11:08
MAY 06 11:07
MAY 06 11:06
MAY 06 11:05
MAY 06 11:04
MAY 06 11:03
MAY 06 11:02
MAY 06 11:01

TAG-9999
TAG-9998
TAG-9997
TAG-9996
TAG-9995
TAG-9994
TAG-9993
TAG-9992
TAG-9991
TAG-9990
TAG-9989
TAG-9988
TAG-9987
TAG-9986
TAG-9986

STAGE 2 IN PROG STARTD

TAG DESCRIPTOR STATE1
TAG DESCRIPTOR STATE2
TAG DESCRIPTOR STATE1
TAG DESCRIPTOR STATE1
TAG DESCRIPTOR STATE1
TAG DESCRIPTOR STATE1
TAG DESCRIPTOR STATE2
TAG DESCRIPTOR STATE1
TAG DESCRIPTOR STATE1
TAG DESCRIPTOR STATE2
TAG DESCRIPTOR STATE1
TAG DESCRIPTOR STATE1
TAG DESCRIPTOR STATE1
TAG DESCRIPTOR STATE1
CLEAR EVENT STRIPE

ALARM

MESSAGE TEXT

EVENT STRIPE

HZ

RUN

Figure 48 Event summary

Revision 12
11/08

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

141

Diagnostics
Overview
Access
All diagnostics are accessed through main menu Alarms/Events/Diagnostics.
Communications diagnostics are also accessible through main menu Unit Setup - See Page 159, select
"Communications".
NOTE: For diagnostics on the HC900-C70R Redundant Controller, refer to Appendix A.
Diagnostic types
The instrument executes diagnostic routines during instrument start-up and during on-line operation.
Diagnostics are accessed in the following hierarchy.

Controller Diagnostics show the status of the controllers components (Rack 1) and any expansion Racks
2-5 (page 143).

System (Rack 1only) (page 143) - Read Only

CPU (page 143) - Read Only

Memory (page 144) - Read Only

Real Time Clock (Rack 1 only) (page 144) - Read Only

I/O - Press "Enter" for I/O Module Diagnostics. (page 145)

Communications error messages (Rack 1only) (page 146)

I/O Module Diagnostics show status of all I/O modules (page 147)

Panel Diagnostics shows list of most recent diagnostics (page 154)

Communications Diagnostics (page 155 )

RS-232 Configuration Port (page 156)
RS-485 OI Port (page 156)
Network Port (page 157)
-

Network Host Connections

Network Peer Connections

Expansion I/O Ports (page 158)

Revision 12
11/08

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

142

Diagnostics
Controller diagnostics

Controller diagnostics
This display shows different classes of diagnostics and their statuses. Select Page Up and Page Down to
see each rack. Any rack not configured will be so indicated. Select I/O or COMM PORTS to see details.
CONTROLLER DIAGNOSTICS

CONTROLLER DIAGNOSTICS
PAGE 1 OF 5

RACK 1

SYSTEM
CPU
MEMORY
RTC
I/O
COMM PORTS

ALARM

MESSAG E TEXT

PAGE 2 OF 5

GOOD
WATCHDOG ERROR
GOOD
GOOD
GOOD

HZ

RUN

RACK 2

CPU
MEMORY
I/O

ALARM

GOOD
GOOD
MODULE ERROR

MESSAGE TEXT

HZ

RUN

Figure 49 Controller diagnostics

Table 82 Details of controller diagnostics error status messages

Class
SYSTEM
SYSTEM

Status
GOOD
FORCED OUTPUT

SYSTEM

INVALID CONFIG.

SYSTEM

SWITCH FAULT

SYSTEM

NO MASTER
PORT

CPU

GOOD

Revision 12
11/08

Possible Cause
N/A
A block has an output
that is forced.
A configuration that
exceeds the loop
capacity of the
controller was
downloaded or an
invalid configuration
exists.
A failure is detected in
the switch reading.

Controller Action
N/A
None

Fix
N/A
Remove force on block output..

An empty database is
created.

Download a valid configuration.

1. All control blocks stop

running
2. All I/O scanning ceases.
This forces the modules
into failsafe.
The controller is not
scanning the Modbus
slave devices.

Replace CPU.

The controller
configuration contains
at least on Modbus
slave block, but
neither the RS-232
nor the RS-485 port is
set up as a Modbus
Master port.
N/A
N/A

Select Modbus Master or Modbus

Master Advanced protocol for either the
RS-232 or RS-485 port.

N/A

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

143

Diagnostics
Controller diagnostics

Class
CPU

Status
WATCHDOG
ERROR

Possible Cause
Watchdog reset
resulting from
software failure

CPU

PREFETCH
ERROR

CPU failed when

attempting to fetch an
instruction from the
prefetch register.

CPU

ADDRESS ERROR The reserved

exception occurred for
an unknown reason.
UNDEFINED
Bad Instruction
INSTR ERROR
Detected
DATA ABORT
CPU failed when
ERROR
attempting to access
data.
S/W INTERRUPT
Software Interrupt
ERR
occurred which is not
supported by the
software.
VECTOR ERROR
Corrupted interrupt
vectors in RAM.
GOOD
N/A
5 DAY BATTERY
Estimated battery life
WARNING
is less than 5 days.

CPU
CPU

CPU

CPU
MEMORY
MEMORY

MEMORY

LOW BATTERY

MEMORY

FLASH ERROR

RTC

GOOD

144

Controller Action
1. Associated rack monitor
blocks RACK OK pin is
turned off.
2. SYSTEM MONITOR
blocks HW OK pin is
turned off.
1. Controller performs a
restart
2. Associated rack monitor
blocks RACK OK pin is
turned off.
3. SYSTEM MONITOR
blocks HW OK pin is
turned off.
See PREFETCH ERROR.

Fix
1. Force a cold start.
2. Upgrade controller module software.
3. Replace CPU board.
4. Contact Honeywell Personnel.

See PREFETCH ERROR

See PREFETCH ERROR.

1. Force a cold start.

2. Isolate system from noise and force
a cold start.
3. Replace CPU board.

See PREFETCH ERROR.

See PREFETCH ERROR. See PREFETCH ERROR.

See PREFETCH ERROR. See PREFETCH ERROR.

Interrupt vectors were

restored.
N/A
1. Associated rack monitor
blocks RACK OK pin is
turned off.
2. SYSTEM MONITOR
blocks HW OK pin is
turned off.
Battery voltage is low. 1. Associated rack monitor
blocks RACK OK pin is
turned off.
2. SYSTEM MONITOR
blocks LOW BATTERY
pin is turned on.
3. SYSTEM MONITOR
blocks HW OK pin is
turned off.
Flash failed to burn
1. Associated rack monitor
blocks RACK OK pin is
turned off.
2. SYSTEM MONITOR
blocks HW OK pin is
turned off.
N/A
N/A

See WATCHDOG ERROR.

N/A
Replace battery.

Replace battery.

1. Force a cold start.

2. Replace CPU board.

N/A

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

Revision 12
11/08

Diagnostics
Controller diagnostics

Class
RTC

Status
NOT
PROGRAMMED

RTC

BAD DATA

RTC
RTC

PROGRAMMING
FAILURE
READ FAILURE

I/O
I/O

GOOD
MODULE ERROR

I/O

MODULE HI CJ
TEMP

I/O

FAILURE

Revision 12
11/08

Possible Cause
Controller Action
Fix
RTC not programmed 1. Time and date is set to
Program RTC.
00:00:00, January 1, 1970.
2. Associated rack monitor
blocks RACK OK pin is
turned off.
3. SYSTEM MONITOR
blocks HW OK pin is
turned off.
Bad date and time
See NOT
1. Program RTC.
PROGRAMMED.
2. Cycle power.
3. Replace CPU.
4. Replace boards in rack.
5. Replace rack.
RTC failed to program See NOT
See BAD DATA.
PROGRAMMED.
Unable to read RTC
See NOT
See BAD DATA.
PROGRAMMED.
N/A
N/A
N/A
Select I/O from the menu to see details
One of the module
Select I/O from the menu
diagnostics in the
to see details on the faulty on the faulty module. See I/O module
diagnostics on page 147.
associated rack is set module. See I/O module
to MISMATCH, BAD diagnostics on page 147.
MODULE, BAD
CHANNEL., or
MISSING/NO COMM
(if the
communications is
failing due to the
module not
installedcould occur
if the module is
installed but CPU
cant communicate to
it).
One of the module
Select I/O from the menu
Select I/O from the menu to see details
diagnostics in the
to see details on the faulty on the faulty module. See I/O module
diagnostics on page 147.
associated rack is set module. See I/O module
diagnostics on page 147.
to HI CJ
TEMPERATURE.
The Controller
All associated module
1. Remove modules and check for bent
module is unable to
diagnostics are set to
pins on connectors.
successfully
MISSING/NO COMM.
2. Reinsert modules one at a time and
communicate to any
note which module the diagnostic
modules that are in its See MISSING/NO COMM reoccurs, and replace that module.
SPI backplane.
3. Cycle power to the rack.
in Table 84 I/O Module
Error Statuses on page
4. Replace the power supply.
149 for further details.
5. Replace the rack.
6. Replace the CPU board.

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

145

Diagnostics
Controller diagnostics

I/O

Class

Status
NO COMM

Possible Cause
Controller Action
The Main CPU is
See FAILURE.
unable to successfully
communicate to an
expansion rack that is
in its configuration.

I/O

BAD VERSION

The Main CPU

determined that its
software is not
compatible with the
scanner module.

COMM
COMM

GOOD
WARNING

N/A
One of the comm
ports is reporting an
application error

COMM

FAILED

One of the Comm

ports is reporting a
physical or data link
failure

146

All associated module

diagnostics are set to
MISSING/NO COMM.
Refer to MISSING/NO
COMM diagnostic for
further details.
N/A

Fix
1. Verify that the expansion rack should
be in the configuration
2. Verify that the jumpers on the
scanner are setup for the correct rack
address.
3. Check that expansion rack is on.
4. Check the expansion racks status
LED for diagnostic information.
5. Check that cable is connected to
expansion rack.
6. If a hub is used, check that all cables
are properly connected to the hub,
proper crossover cables are used, and
that hub is powered.
7. Cycle power to the rack.
8. Cycle power to the hub.
9. Replace the expansion racks power
supply.
10. Replace the expansion rack.
11. Replace the expansion racks
scanner board.
12. Replace the main CPU.
1. Upgrade the scanner software either
by replacing the module or doing a
code-download.
2. Update Main CPU software either by
replacing the module or doing a code
download.
N/A

Refer to Communication
Ports diagnostics on
page 155.

Refer to Communication Ports

diagnostics on page 155.

Refer to Communication
Ports diagnostics on
page 155.

Refer to Communication Ports

diagnostics on page 155.

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

Revision 12
11/08

Diagnostics
I/O module diagnostics

I/O module diagnostics

Access

Main menu, Alarms/Events/Diagnostics, Controller Diagnostics, I/O

Main menu, Alarms/Events/Diagnostics, I/O Module Diagnostics

Description
This display gives the type and status of each controller racks I/O modules. Select Page Up and Page
Down to see each rack and its modules.
I/O MODULE DIAGNOSTICS
PAGE 1 OF 5

RACK 1

STATUS
REV LEVEL
NUMBER OF SLOTS
MODULE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12

ALARM

MODULE ERROR
1.00
12

PHYSICAL TYPE
AI UNIVERSAL 8-CHAN
AI UNIVERSAL 8-CHAN
DI DRY-CONTACT 16-CHAN
DI 24 VDC 16-CHAN
DI 120/240 VAC 16-CHAN
DO 24 VDC 16-CHAN
DO 120/240 VAC 8-CHAN
DO HIGH CURRENT RELAY
DO LOW CURRENT RELAY
AO VOLTAGE 4-CHAN
AO CURRENT 4-CHAN
NONE

CONFIGURED AS ERROR STATUS

AI
AI
BAD CHANNEL
DI
DI
DI
DO
AI
WRONG MODULE
DO
DO
BAD MODULE
AO
AO
DO
MISSING NO COMM

MESSAG E TEXT

HZ

RUN

Figure 50 I/O module diagnostics - Model 1042 view

I/O MODULE DIAGNOSTICS

PAGE 1 OF 5
STATUS
REV LEVEL
NUMBER OF SLOTS
MODULE
1
2
3
4
5
6
ALARM

ERROR
AI BAD CHANNEL
AI MISMATCH
DI
DI
MISSING/COMM
DO
D

MESSAG E TEXT

RACK 1

MODULE ERROR
1.00
12
MODULE
ERROR
7 AI HI CJ TEMP
8 AI
9 DI BAD MODULE
10 DI
11 DI MISSING/COMM
12 DO
S

HZ

RUN

Figure 51 I/O module diagnostics - Model 559 view

For I/O module diagnostic details, see Table 83.

Revision 12
11/08

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

147

Diagnostics
I/O module diagnostics

Table 83 I/O module diagnostics details

Feature

Description

STATUS

This status is also visible on the Controller Diagnostics display I/O class. See
I/O in Table 82 (page 145) for details.

REV LEVEL

Firmware revision of the rack.

NUMBER OF SLOTS

Number of I/O module slots supported by the rack.

MODULE n

Select to see details. See I/O Module Diagnostics physical details on page 153.
NONE
AI UNIVERSAL 8-CHAN
AI LO-LEVEL 16-CHAN
AI HI-LEVEL 8-CHAN
AO CURRENT 4-CHAN
AO VOLTAGE 4-CHAN
DI DRY-CONTACT 16-CHAN
DI 120/240 VAC 16-CHAN
DI 24 VDC 16-CHAN
DO LO-CURRENT RLY 8-CHAN
DO HI-CURRENT RLY 4-CHAN
DO 120/240 VAC 8-CHAN
DO 24 VDC 16-CHAN
AI HI-LEVEL 16-CHAN
DI 24 VDC 32-CHAN
DO 24 VDC 32-CHAN
PULSE/FREQ/QUAD 4-CHAN

PHYSICAL TYPE *

CONFIGURED AS*

AI, AO, DI, DO, PFQ

See Table 84.

ERROR STATUS*
Bold items are read only

* The "Physical Type", "Configured As", and "Error Status" information is also present on the OI-559 but it
is located on a detail display. To call up the detail display, cursor to the Module number field and press the
ENTER key.

** Future

148

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

Revision 12
11/08

Diagnostics
I/O module diagnostics

I/O module error status

Table 84 I/O Module Error Statuses
Class
ERROR
STATUS

Status
HI CJ TEMP

Possible Cause

Controller Action

Fix

1. Associated AI blocks
1. Improve ventilation to rack
that are configured as T/Cs
2. Replace AI module
set their fail pin on, their
1. One of the two CJs warn pin off, and their
on the module is
output pin to the failsafe
indicating a
value.
temperature reading
2. Associated AI blocks
greater than 70
that are configured as T/Cs
degrees C.
set their IO status to CJ
2. Both cold-junction
High Temperature for
sensors are failing to reason 1 or CJ Failure for
convert.
possible causes 2 and 3.
Possible causes of
this diagnostic are:

3. The CJs are

converting properly,
but their differential is
greater than 10
degrees C.

3. Associated rack monitor

blocks module fail pin is
turned on.
4. Associated rack monitor
blocks RACK OK pin is
turned off.
5. Associated rack monitor
blocks HITEMP pin is
turned on.
6. SYSTEM MONITOR
blocks HITEMP pin is
turned on.
7. SYSTEM MONITOR
blocks HW OK pin is
turned off.

ERROR
STATUS

MISMATCH

The installed module

does not agree with
the module required
for the control
strategy downloaded
in the configuration
file.

1. Associated blocks set

their fail pin on, their warn
pin off, and their output pin
to the failsafe value.

1. Verify configuration
2. Replace module with the correct one.

2. Associated blocks set

their IO status to Channel
No Comm.
3. Associated rack monitor
blocks module fail pin is
turned on.
4. Associated rack monitor
blocks RACK OK pin is
turned off.
5. SYSTEM MONITOR
blocks HW OK pin is
turned off.

Revision 12
11/08

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

149

Diagnostics
I/O module diagnostics

Class
ERROR
STATUS

Status
MISSING/NO
COMM

Possible Cause

Main CPU is unable

to communicate to
the module for one of
the following reasons:

Controller Action
See MISMATCH.

1. Module is not
installed

Fix

Action is based on the RACK STATUS

indication. If RACK STATUS is not
MODULE ERROR, then follow the
prescribed action defined for the RACK
STATUS diagnostic.
For MODULE ERROR, do the
following:

2. The module cannot

communicate with the
controller CPU or the
expansion rack CPU
because of a
backplane problem.

1. Verify configuration
2. Install module.

3. Module is on an
expansion rack and
the expansion rack
communications is
failing
ERROR
STATUS

BAD MODULE

Module is reporting a
diagnostic condition.
See Table 85.

See MISMATCH.

ERROR
STATUS

BAD CHANNEL

See Table 86

1. Associated block sets

its fail pin on, its warn pin
off, and its output pin to
the failsafe value.
2. Associated block sets
its IO status as denoted in
Table 86.
3. Associated rack
monitor blocks module fail
pin is turned on.
4. Associated rack
monitor blocks RACK OK
pin is turned off.
5. SYSTEM MONITOR
blocks HW OK pin is
turned off.

150

User should inspect the modules

status LED to determine the nature of
the problem. Table 85 describes the
user action for the various LED
diagnostics.
See Table 86

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

Revision 12
11/08

Diagnostics
I/O module diagnostics

Bad module details

When an I/O modules error status is BAD MODULE, the modules status LED is flashed red with a
number of quick strobes followed by a long off time. Table 85 outlines the potential module diagnostics.
Table 85 Bad module details
Numberof
Strobes

Failure

Description

AI AO DI

DO

PFQ UserAction

FAIL SAFE

The module is in the failsafe state

because it is not receiving message
requests from the CPU or Scanner
at a rate that satisfies the configured
failsafe timeout.

EAROM

EA ROM Failed its checksum

Contact AC DC Relay AC DC

1. If expansion I/O rack, go to step 2. If

no expansion I/O rack, go to step 3.
2. Check the Scanner status LED (see
Scanner Indicators in HC900 Hybrid
Controller manual, #51-52-25-107).
If its flashing 6 times, proceed
with step 3.
If its flashing some other red
status code (refer to Scanner
Indicators in HC900 Hybrid
Controller manual, #51-52-25-107)
to solve that problem first.
If its flashing green, the module
probably is not required in the
configuration.
If its not on or steady, cycle
power to the scanner.
3. Make sure the module is the correct
one for the configuration.
4. Remove the module and check for
a bent pin, then reinsert the module
5. Replace the module
6. Remove other modules and replace
one at a time until the problem
reoccurs. Most likely the last module
inserted needs to be replaced.

7.Replace the rack.

1. Remove/reinsert module.
2. Replace module.

RAM

ROM

+24 V

FACTORY CAL

CRC failure of primary and backup

factory calibration

Replace module.

FIELD CAL

CRC failure of field calibration

values

1. Remove/reinsert module.
2. Replace module.

HARDWARE

General Hardware Failure

(AI=convertor not working)

HW/SW Key

The software residing on the

module does not match the module
type. This diagnostic should only
result in the factory.

11

Shift Register

The loopback test of the shift

register failed.

Revision 12
11/08

1. Remove the module and check

for a bent pin, then reinsert the
module
2. Measure power supply voltage. If
not correct, replace power supply.
3. Replace module
4. Replace rack

Replace module.

Replace module

Replace module

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

151

Diagnostics
I/O module diagnostics

Bad channel details

Below is a list of conditions that can cause a BAD CHANNEL I/O module diagnostic.
Table 86 Bad Channel details
I/O Summary Error Status

Bad Channel

Description

User Action

If the channel is an Analog Output: There

is no physical output device connected to
this channel, or the output device is
showing an open connection.

Check terminal block connections.

Replace module.

If the channel is a Pulse Output: The

channel is failing to output the correct
value.
A BAD CHANNEL I/O module diagnostic
is posted.
Burnout Fail

The sensor T/C, RTD, or mV source -- is

failing burnout checks. A BAD CHANNEL
I/O module diagnostic is posted.

Check terminal block connections

Replace source element
Replace module.

Convert Fail

When attempting to take a reading, the

analog-to-digital (ADC) fails. This can
occur if the incoming signal is either too
large or too small. It also could result if the
ADC circuit is failing. If the problem is the
ADC circuit, most likely other channels will
have the same failure. A BAD CHANNEL
I/O module diagnostic is posted.

No Channel

There is no hardware on the I/O module to

support this channel. For example, the
customer configured Channel #15 for a
given module, but there is an 8-channel
module installed in the rack. A BAD
CHANNEL I/O module diagnostic is
posted.

Over Current

A Digital Output module detected an

excessive amount of current on its output
terminals. Note that this message will only
appear for the 32-channel DO module. A
BAD CHANNEL module diagnostic is
posted.

152

Check the signal level being

applied to the terminals.
Replace module.

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

Revision 12
11/08

Diagnostics
I/O Module Diagnostics physical details

I/O Module Diagnostics physical details

Access
Select any module number on the I/O Module Diagnostics display to see the details.
Table 87 I/O module diagnostic details
Feature

TYPE

NONE
AI UNIVERSAL 8-CHAN
AI LO-LEVEL 16-CHAN
AI HI-LEVEL 8-CHAN
AO CURRENT 4-CHAN
AO VOLTAGE 4-CHAN
DI DRY-CONTACT 16-CHAN
DI 120/240 VAC 16-CHAN
DI 24 VDC 16-CHAN
DO LO-CURRENT RLY 8-CHAN
DO HI-CURRENT RLY 4-CHAN
DO 120/240 VAC 8-CHAN
DO 24 VDC 16-CHAN
AI HI-LEVEL 16-CHAN
DI 24 VDC 32-CHAN
DO 24 VDC 32-CHAN
PULSE/FREQ/QUAD 4-CHAN

PART NUMBER

The re-order part number of the module.

REV LEVEL

Revision level of the firmware running on this module.

CONFIGURED AS
(Model 559 only)
ERROR STATUS
(Model 559 only)

Revision 12
11/08

Description

AI, AO, DI, DO, PFQ

See Table 84.

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

153

Diagnostics
Panel diagnostic log

Panel diagnostic log

The Panel Diagnostic Log is a time-ordered list of the diagnostic messages that appear on the status line (at
the bottom of the display). The log is cleared when the user selects the DELETE ALL DIAGNOSTICS
item.
PANEL DIAGNOSTIC LOG

MAY 05 20:51
MAY 05 20:50
MAY 05 20:29
MAY 05 20:28
MAY 05 20:25

MAY06
11:30

CONTROLLER DIAG
CONTROLLER DIAG
CONTROLLER DIAG
CONTROLLER DIAG
ALARM/EVENT LOST

DELETE ALL DIAGNOSTICS

ALARM

MESSAG E TEXT

HZ

RUN

Figure 52 Panel diagnostic log

154

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

Revision 12
11/08

Diagnostics
Communication Ports diagnostics

Communication Ports diagnostics

Access

Main menu, Alarms/Events/Diagnostics, Controller Diagnostics, Communications

Main menu, Unit Setup, Communications - See 168

NOTE: For Communications Ports S1/S2/E1/E2 Diagnostics on the HC900-C70R Redundant Controller,
refer to Appendix A - HC900-C70R Redundant Controller Displays.
Overview
This section discusses only the diagnostics part of those displays. Refer to Communication Ports on page
168 for other details.
COMMUNICATION PORTS

SERIAL PORT S1
SERIAL PORT S2 (OI)
NETWORK PORT
EXPANSION I/O PORT
MODBUS SLAVE DEVICES

ALARM

MESSAGE TEXT

GOOD
GOOD
GOOD
GOOD

HZ

RUN

Figure 53 Communication ports

At this screen each ports status is displayed. Select a port, Press Enter to see details. Refer to "Unit
Setup", "Communication Ports" on page 168 for details on each port.
Diagnostics and Status Messages Only

Serial Port S1 (page 156) - Details listed on Page 169.

Serial Port S2 (OI) (page 156) - Details listed on Page 172

Network port (page 157) - Details listed on Page 173

View network host connections - Details listed on Page 174

View network peer connections - Details listed on Page 175

Revision 12
11/08

Network peer statistics - Details listed on Page 176

Expansion I/O port (page 158) - Details listed on Page 179

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

155

Diagnostics
Communication Ports diagnostics

Serial Port S1/Serial Port S2 (OI)

The list of diagnostics for these two ports is the same.
Table 88 Serial Port S1/Serial Port S2 (OI) diagnostics and statuses
Class
Status
GOOD
PORT
DIAGNOSTIC
PORT
APPLICATION
DIAGNOSTIC ERROR

Possible Cause
N/A

Controller Action
N/A

At least one response

to a host resulted in
an exception code or
NAK.

1. Rack 1 monitor blocks

COMPORT DIAG is set to
WARNING.
2. Rack 1 monitor blocks
RACK OK pin is turned off.
3. SYSTEM MONITOR
blocks HW OK pin is
turned off.
1. Rack 1 monitor blocks
COMPORT DIAG is set to
FAILED.
2. Rack 1 monitor blocks
RACK OK pin is turned off.
3. SYSTEM MONITOR
blocks HW OK pin is
turned off.

PORT
DATA LINK
DIAGNOSTIC ERROR

A large number of
messages are
resulting in data link
errors.

PORT
HARDWARE
DIAGNOSTIC FAILURE

The DUART is failing

to operate properly.

156

Fix

N/A
At host, determine which message is
causing the exception code and fix it.

1. Check baud rate.

2. Check connectors.
3. Check cable polarity.
4. Isolate cable from electrical
interference.
5. If RS232-to-RS485 converter used,
check its power, switch/jumper settings,
and polarity.
Replace the controller CPU module.

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

Revision 12
11/08

Diagnostics
Communication Ports diagnostics

Network Port
Table 89 Network Port diagnostics
Class

Status

GOOD
PORT
DIAGNOSTIC
SETUP ERROR

Possible Cause

Controller Action

Fix

N/A

N/A

N/A

Controller/network
Rack 1 monitor blocks
names determined on COMPORT DIAG is set to
network are illegal
FAILED.

Correct the setup problem.

Rack 1 monitor blocks

RACK OK pin is turned off.
ASYS (SYSTEM
MONITOR) blocks HW
OK pin is turned off.
NO IP ADDRESS

Revision 12
11/08

IP address is not
configured

Same as above

1.

If a DHCP server is present,

download a configuration that
uses DHCP.

2.

Enter an IP address.

HARDWARE
FAILURE

Ethernet port tests

failed during powerup.

Same as above

Replace CPU module

DHCP Failure

DHCP is configured,
and no IP address
has been granted.

Same as above

1.

Check the DHCP server.

2.

Download a configuration with

DHCP required.

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

157

Diagnostics
Communication Ports diagnostics

Expansion I/O Port

Table 90 Expansion I/O Port diagnostics
Class
RACK n
PORT

Status
GOOD

RACK n
PORT

DATA LINK
FAILURE

RACK n
PORT

HARDWARE
FAILURE

158

Possible Cause
Comm port is
functioning properly or
comm port is not
used
The communications
to a particular rack is
resulting in a lot of
communication
errors.

Controller Action
N/A

Fix
N/A

1. Related rack monitor

blocks RACK OK pin is
turned off.
2. Depending on the
nature of the
communication errors, the
associated rack monitor
blocks module
diagnostics, and pins could
be affected.
3. Associated racks
COMPORT DIAGNOSTIC
is set to FAILED.
4. Rack 1 COMPORT
DIAGNOSTIC is set to
FAILED.

The power-up test of

the expansion rack
Ethernet controller
failed.

1. All rack monitor block

XIO PORT DIAG are set to
HWFAIL and COMPORT
DIAGNOSTIC is set to
FAIL.
2. All rack monitor block
RACK OK pins are turned
off.
3. All modules in the
configuration have their
diagnostic set to
MOD_NOCOMM, their
rack monitor module fail
pin is turned on., and the
rack monitor blocks RACK
OK pin is turned off.
4. SYSTEM MONITOR
blocks HW OK pin is
turned off.
5. The statuses for the AO,
AI, DI, DO channels that
are affected are set to
BAD_CHANNEL.

1. Use the OI to determine which rack

is experiencing the comm errors. Verify
that the expansion rack should be in
the configuration
2. Verify that the jumpers on the
scanner are setup for the correct rack
address.
3. If a hub is used, check that all cables
are properly connected to the hub,
proper crossover cables are used, and
that hub is powered.
4. Cycle power to the rack.
5. Cycle power to the hub.
6. Replace the expansion racks power
supply.
7. Replace the expansion rack.
8. Replace the expansion racks
scanner board.
9. Replace the main CPU.
Replace main-CPU module

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

Revision 12
11/08

Unit Setup
Access
Main menu.
Description
Unit Setup gives you access to the setup and troubleshooting functions.

UNIT SETUP

MAY06
11:30

CONTROLLER STATUS
SET MODE
WRITE DATABASE TO FLASH MEMORY
SET TIME AND DATE
SET SECURITY
REVIEW SECURITY
SET LANGUAGE
COMMUNICATION PORTS
FILE NAME SELECTIONS
SELF-TESTS
CALIBRATE AI
CALIBRATE AO
CHANGE DISPLAY BRIGHTNESS
ALARM

Revision 12
11/08

MESSAGE TEXT

HZ

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

RUN

159

Unit Setup
Controller Status

Controller Status
This is a read-only display giving the status of various controller parameters.
Table 91 Controller status details
Feature

Description

CONTROLLER
NAME

Configured controller name

NETWORK NAME

The network name to which the controller belongs.

LOCAL ALIAS

A locally referenced alias for the controller.

MODE

Controllers mode of operation:

RUN: Controller is running normally.
PROG: Controller is in Program mode.
OFLN: Controller is in Offline mode.
FAULT: A fault was found reading the Controller switch.
NO COMM: This is displayed if controller is not responding.

REV LEVEL

Revision level of the Controller software.

FREQUENCY

Line frequency. Used for configuring the conversion time of the A/D converter.

LOOP CAPACITY

Maximum number of loops allowed by the controller.

CYCLE TIME

The analog control cycle time in seconds. This value is determined from the
execution time estimated from the configured control scheme.

Set Mode
This display lets you change the Controllers operating mode. The current mode is indicated on the bottom
right of the display.
Table 92 Set mode details
Feature

Description

CONTROLLER MODE

Current mode of the controller. See Table 93.

SET CONTROLLER
MODE

RUN: Select this to resume running the process.

OFFLINE: Select this before performing AI calibration.
PROGRAM: Select this:
Before performing AI and AO Calibration.
To turn off all of the controller outputs while reconfiguring a control strategy.

Exiting the Program mode causes a cold start that refreshes the Flash memory of the
controller so that if your battery goes dead the data in Flash is up to date. Use the
Program mode for changes whenever possible.

160

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

Revision 12
11/08

Unit Setup
Set Mode

Table 93 Controller modes defined

Mode

Function Blocks Executed?

Output status?

Effect upon return to RUN mode?

RUN

Yes

Outputs updated

None

OFFLINE

No

Outputs held

Resume

PROGRAM

No

Outputs off

Cold start

ATTENTION

You cannot change the controller mode from this display if the controllers mode switch is in
the RUN LOCKED or PROGRAM LOCKED position. If the switch is in either of these locked
positions, this display will show the message MODE MUST NOT BE LOCKED OR FAULT.

TIP
If the controller switch is set to RUN but the mode was set to PROGRAM or OFFLINE here,
following a power cycle the mode will return to RUN.
Changing from Program to Run causes data in RAM (setpoint profiles, recipes, schedules,
sequences) to be copied to non-volatile (FLASH) memory.
In a cold start, all data storage and display buffers are cleared and accumulated values of
some function blocks (such as totalizers) are reset.
In a resume, all buffered data and values are retained and the process resumes where it left
off.

Revision 12
11/08

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

161

Unit Setup
Write Database to Flash Memory

Write Database to Flash Memory

Overview
This utility allows you to save any parameters that you may have changed in the controller to the
controllers non-volatile Flash memory. The affected parameters include:
Loop tuning parameters (gain, rate, reset, etc.)
Changes to Recipes, Profiles, Schedules, and Sequences.
ATTENTION

This utility can only be used if the controller is in the Run, Run Locked, or Offline Mode.

Procedure
Table 94 Write Database to Flash Memory
Step

Action

Result

From Main Menu, select UNIT

SETUP then select WRITE
DATABASE TO FLASH MEMORY.

Press ENTER. You will see:

WRITE DATABASE TO FLASH MEMORY

PRESS ENTER TO START
PRESS ESC TO ABORT

Press ENTER to start. You will see:

WRITE DATABASE TO FLASH MEMORY

WRITE IN PROGRESS
WAIT

When write is complete, you will see

WRITE DATABASE TO FLASH MEMORY

FLASH UPDATE IS COMPLETE
PRESS ESC TO CLOSE POPUP

Press ESC to close pop-up

Returns to UNIT SETUP screen

Failure
If an error occurs you will see the following message on the OI:
ERROR: FLASH UPDATE FAILED.
This message will appear in the same location on the display as the "Write in progress" and the "Flash
update is complete" messages.
If the write fails, press ESC and try the operation again. If the write continues to fail, upload the
controller's configuration to the PC (using HC Designer) and save the uploaded configuration to disk to
make sure that you have captured all of the non-volatile parameter changes.

162

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

Revision 12
11/08

Unit Setup
Set Time and Date

Set Time and Date

Allows you to set the time and date displayed on screens.
Table 95 Set time and date details
Feature

Description

HOURS

Enter the hours for the current time.

MINUTES

Enter the minutes for the current time.

MONTH

Enter the current month.

DAY

Enter the current day of the month.

YEAR

Enter the current year.

DATE FORMAT

US: MMDDYY
INT: DDMMYY

Press Escape to get a popup menu where you can save or ignore the changes made.

Set Security/Review Security

This feature lets you secure various displays or features with a security code. If security is enabled for a
display or function, access is not possible without first entering the code.
NOTE: On Model 559, the Up and Down arrow keys let you scroll through the complete menu.
Table 96 Set security details
Feature

Description

ENABLE SECURITY

This is a master-enabling switch. Set this to YES to enable security on any of the
engineer or operator secured items that are also set to YES. If this is set to NO, no
engineer or operator secured items will be secured, even if they are set to YES.

ENGINEER SEC
CODE

This is a higher level of security than the operator security code because it secures
access to off-line functions such as calibration. Choose a 3-digit code to be used to
secure the item below.

SET UNIT

Set this to YES to secure the displays and menu items in Table 97 under SET UNIT. Set
to NO to allow unrestricted access.

FUNCTION BLOCK
EDIT

Set this to YES to secure Edit Device Control and HOA EDIT displays. Set to NO to
allow unrestricted access. See Table 97 for affected items.

EDIT MENUS

Set this to YES to secure Edit Device Control and HOA operate display Edit menus. Set
to NO to allow unrestricted access. See Table 97 for affected items.

OPERATOR SEC
CODE

Enter a 3-digit code to be used to secure the items below.

AUTO/MANUAL

Revision 12
11/08

Set this to YES to secure loop mode AUTO/MANUAL operation. Set to NO to allow
unrestricted access. See Table 97 for affected items.

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

163

Unit Setup
Set Security/Review Security

Feature

Description

LSP/RSP

Set this to YES to secure changing between Local and Remote Setpoints. Set to NO to
allow unrestricted access. See Table 97 for affected items.

PROGRAMMER/
SCHEDULER/
SEQUENCER/
CALENDAR
OPERATIONS

Set this to YES to secure setpoint program, scheduler, sequencer operation, and
calendar event. Set to NO to allow unrestricted access. See Table 97 for affected items.

SETUP

Set this to YES to secure access to setup items. Set to NO to allow unrestricted access.
See Table 97 for affected items.

RECIPE LOAD/
VAR. EDIT

Set this to YES to secure recipe and variable operation. Set to NO to allow unrestricted
access. See Table 97 for affected items.

DISK UTIL / DATA

STORAGE

Set this to YES to secure access to disk utilities, data storage controls, and load data
storage settings). Set to NO to allow unrestricted access. See Table 97 for affected
items.

LOG ON/OFF

Set this to YES to secure access to the Log On/Off display. See Table 97 for affected
items.

Accessing a secured area

1. The security access display is shown when you are about to enter a secured area.
2. Use Increment/Decrement and Left Arrow to select the code. Press Enter to gain access.
TIP

1. If you forget your security code, see Security Bypass Procedure.

2. An item is secured only if all the following conditions are met.
ENABLE SECURITY is set to YES.
Non-zero security code.
Security category (for example, SETUP) is set to YES.

3. If a display or function is secured, then all displays and functions subordinate to it are also
indirectly secured. Once you enter the security code for a display or menu, you do not have
to enter a security code for each subordinate display and function. For example, Loops is
under the SETUP security category. If SETUP security is enabled with YES, the operator
must enter the operator security code after selecting Loops from the Main Menu. Once this
code is entered, all menus and displays under Loops are accessible.
Table 97 summarizes the securable displays and menu items.

164

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

Revision 12
11/08

Unit Setup
Set Security/Review Security

Table 97 Displays and functions that can be secured

ENG SEC CODE
SET
UNIT

FB
EDIT

EDIT
MENUS

OPERATOR SECURITY CODE

AUTO
/ MAN

LSP /
RSP

SETUP

PROGRAMMER/
SCHEDULER/
SEQUENCER/
CALENDAR
OPERATIONS

RECIPE
/ VAR
EDIT

DISK
UTIL/
DATA
STORAGE

LOG
ON/
OFF

UNIT SETUP*
SET MODE
WRITE DATABASE TO
FLASH MEMORY
SET TIME & DATE
SET SECURITY
COMMUNICATION PORTS
SERIAL PORT S1
SERIAL PORT S2 (OI)
NETWORK PORT E1
NETWORK PORT E2
FILE NAME
SELECTION
SELF-TESTS
CALIBRATE AI
CALIBRATE AO
RS-232 CONFIG PORT**
RS-485 CONFIG PORT**
MODBUS SLAVE
DEVICES**
SINGLE LOOP TREND
DISPLAY
LOOP TUNING DISPLAY
LOOP TUNE CONSTANTS
DISPLAY
LOOP CONTROL SETUP
DISPLAY
SWITCH SP
CARBON LOOP SETUP
DISPLAY
LOOP ALARM SETPTS
DISPLAY
LOOP LIMITS DISPLAY
MULTILOOP SUMMARY
DISPLAY
MULTILOOP FACEPLATE
DISPLAYS
SINGLE LOOP NUMERIC
DISPLAY
A/M BIAS DISPLAY
LOOP CONTROL DISPLAY
SWITCH SP
RECIPES*
EDIT
LOAD

Revision 12
11/08

X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

165

Unit Setup
Set Security/Review Security

ENG SEC CODE

SET
UNIT

MAIN MENU
LOOPS
SP PROGRAMMERS
SP SCHEDULER
SEQUENCERS
DISK UTILITIES
DATA STORAGE*
STORAGE CONTROLS
LOAD STORAGE SETTINGS
SINGLESPP OPERATEDISPLAY
OPERATE
SETPOINT SCHEDULER
OPERATE
SEQUENCER OPERATE
CALENDAR EVENT
OPERATE
RAMP EDIT DISPLAY
TRANSFER RATE UP
TRANSFER RATE DN
LAG TIME
STAGE EDIT DISPLAY
ON DELAY TIME
OFF DELAY TIME
INTERLOCK PREV
INTERLOCK NEXT
ALTERNATOR EDIT DISPLAY
EDIT ALTERNATOR (F2)
EDIT ALTERNATOR STYLE
RECIPE LOAD DISPLAY
DEVICE CONTROL
OPERATE DISPLAY
DEVICE CONTROL EDIT
DISPLAY
EDIT TIMERS
RESET FAILURE
HOA OPERATE DISPLAY
HOA EDIT DISPLAY
HOA SOURCE
SET STATE
OVERVIEW DISPLAY
LOG ON/OFF

FB
EDIT

EDIT
MENUS

OPERATOR SECURITY CODE

AUTO
/ MAN

LSP /
RSP

SETUP

PROGRAMMER/
SCHEDULER/
SEQUENCER/
CALENDAR
OPERATIONS

RECIPE
/ VAR
EDIT

DISK
UTIL/
DATA
STORAGE

LOG
ON/
OFF

X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X

X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X

X
X
X
X
X
X

*Accessed through Main Menu.

** These displays are accessed via the following sequence of menu items: Main Menu, Alarms/Events/Diags,
Controller Diagnostics, Comm Ports and Main Menu, Unit Setup, Communications.
X = this item and items subordinate to it can be secured.

166

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

Revision 12
11/08

Unit Setup
Set Language

Set Language
Sets the language of all displays.
Attention: This option is available on model 1042 only.
Table 98 Set language details
Feature

SET LANGUAGE

Revision 12
11/08

Description

Choose between English, French, Italian, Spanish, and German.

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

167

Unit Setup
Communication Ports

Communication Ports
Access

Main menu, Unit Setup

Main menu, Alarms/Events/Diagnostics, Controller Diagnostics, Comm Ports - See 155

NOTE: For Communications Ports S1/S2/E1/E2 on the HC900-C70R Redundant Controller, refer to
Appendix A - HC900-C70R Redundant Controller Displays.
Overview
This menu lets you see and edit settings for these controller communications ports:

Serial Port S1 (page 169)

Serial Port S2 (OI) (page 172)

Network port (page 173)

View host connections (page 174)

View network peer connections (page 175)

Network peer statistics (page 176)

Expansion I/O port (page 179).

Modbus Slave Devices (page 180)

Modbus Slave Details (page 180)

COMMUNICATION PORTS

SERIAL PORT S1
SERIAL PORT S2 (OI)
NETWORK PORT
EXPANSION I/O PORT
MODBUS SLAVE DEVICES

ALARM

MESSAGE TEXT

GOOD
GOOD
GOOD
GOOD

HZ

RUN

Figure 54 Communications ports display

The diagnostic condition of each port is displayed to the right of the port description. See the section on
Communication Ports Diagnostics (page 155) for an explanation of these diagnostic conditions.
To access the detailed information for any port, scroll to the desired port and press ENTER.
If the controllers Serial Port S1 is being used to host one or more Modbus Slave devices the message NO
MASTER PORT may appear next to the MODBUS SLAVE DEVICES menu item. This message indicates
that the protocol for this port is set to a value other than Modbus Master or Modbus Master Advanced.
Call up the Serial Port S1 display and set the protocol to Modbus Master or Modbus Master Advanced.

168

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

Revision 12
11/08

Unit Setup
Communication Ports

Serial Port S1
The controllers Serial Port S1 can be set-up as an ELN Configuration port, a Modbus Master port, or a
Modbus Slave port. The ELN protocol allows the controller to communicate with the Hybrid Control
Designer package on the PC using the proprietary ELN protocol. The Modbus Master protocols allow the
controller to act as a Modbus Master, retrieving data from other instruments that have been configured as
Modbus slave devices. The three Modbus Slave protocols allow the controller act as a slave to various host
devices, including a PC running HC Designer.
Table 99 describes the diagnostic and status information available for this port.
The information presented in Table 99, Table 100 and Table 101 also applies to Serial Port S1 when a
Redundant Controller is used with the OI. Refer to Appendix A - page 289 for more information about the
Redundant Controller displays.
Table 99 Serial Port S1 diagnostic and status information
Status

Description

PORT DIAGNOSTIC

Shows the overall condition of the Serial Port S1. See the list of Seial Port S1
diagnostic conditions on page 156.

PORT STATUS

This is the current status of the port. The possible status conditions are:
GOOD: the protocol is set to ELN.
REQUIRES SETUP: the protocol is set to one of the Modbus Slave protocols, and the
Slave Address is set to 255. Messages on the communication link are ignored in this
state.
OFFLINE: the protocol is set to one of the Modbus Slave protocols, and the Slave Port
Enable is set to DISABLE. Messages on the communication link are ignored in this
state.
ONLINE: the protocol is set to one of the Modbus Slave protocols, and the Slave Port
Enable is set to ENABLE. Messages on the communication link are being processed
in this state.
NO MODBUS SLAVE BLOCKS: the protocol is set to one of the Modbus Slave
protocols, but there are no Modbus slave function blocks present in the controllers
configuration.
PROGRAM MODE: the protocol is set to one of the Modbus Slave protocols, but the
controller is in Program Mode. The controller does not scan the slave devices in this
state.
ELN SLAVE: the protocol is set to one of the Modbus Slave protocols, but the
controller is in Program Locked Mode. The port automatically reverts to ELN protocol
and the controller becomes a slave device whenever the mode selection switch is
placed in the Program Locked position.
SCANNING SLAVES: the protocol is set to one of the Modbus Slave protocols, and
the controller is actively scanning the slave devices attached to the port.

MESSAGES RECEIVED

The number of messages that were received and processed correctly.

DATA LINK ERRORS

The number of basic link-level errors detected by the controller. If the protocol is
Modbus Master, the errors may be due to a slave device that does not reply when it is
scanned. Refer to the section Troubleshooting Data Link Errors (page 182) for more
information.

APPLICATION
ERRORS

The number of messages that were responded to with an exception code. For
example, application errors can be caused by (a) writing to a read-only register, (b)
accessing a register that is not supported by the slave device, or (c) using a Modbus
function code that is not supported by the slave device.

Revision 12
11/08

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

169

Unit Setup
Communication Ports

Table 100 shows all of the parameters that can be configured for the controllers Serial Port S1. The actual
number of parameters that can be configured at any time depends on the protocol selected. Table 101
shows the relationship between the setup parameters and each protocol.
Table 100 Serial Port S1 setup parameters
Setup parameter

PROTOCOL

Description
ELN: The default protocol, used to communicate with the HC
Designer configuration software.
MODBUS MASTER: The controller acts as a Modbus Master device
on the communication link.
MB MASTER ADVANCED: The controller acts as a Modbus Master
device on the communication link. This protocol provides enhanced
data throughput for applications where the HC900 is being used with
a Modbus-to-fieldbus gateway device.
MODBUS SLAVE MULTI: The controller acts as a Modbus Slave
device. This protocol allows more than one slave device to be
present on the communications link (multi-drop).
MODBUS SLAVE PTP: The controller acts as a Modbus Slave
device. This protocol can be used if the controller is the only slave
device on the link (Point-to-point).
MODBUS SLAVE MODEM: The controller acts as a Modbus Slave
device. This protocol provides the extended delays that are needed
to access the controller via a modem.

This is the address of the controller on the Modbus link when one of
the three Modbus Slave protocols is selected. All devices on the link
must have a unique Modbus address. The address may be set to a
value of 1 to 247, or it may be set to 255. A value of 255 disables
the port for this controller.
SLAVE PORT ENABLE

This item allows you to enable or disable the port:

ENABLE: The port will respond to communication requests.
DISABLE: The port will ignore communication requests.

BAUD RATE (BPS)

Select 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600 or 115200 bits
per second.

MODBUS PARITY

Select None, Odd, or Even parity.

MODBUS STOP BITS

Select 1 or 2 Stop Bits.

DOUBLE REGISTER FORMAT

Under the Modbus protocol, each IEEE 32-bit floating-point number

requires two consecutive Modbus registers, for a total of four bytes.
The stuffing order of the bytes within these registers differs among
Modbus devices. To provide compatibility with the various hosts, the
double-register format is configurable. The selections are:
FP B
Big Endian format
FP L
Little Endian format
FP BB Big Endian with byte-swap
FP LB Little Endian with byte-swap

CLEAR STATISTICS

170

Byte order: 4, 3, 2, 1
Byte order: 1, 2, 3, 4
Byte order: 3, 4, 1, 2
Byte order: 2, 1, 4, 3

This item resets the message counters for this port back to zero
(Messages Received, Data Link Errors, and Application Errors).
Note: the counters will only be reset if the controller is in Run Mode.

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

Revision 12
11/08

Unit Setup
Communication Ports

Table 101 Protocol selection versus setup parameters for the Serial Port S1
Protocol selection
ELN

Modbus
Master or
Modbus
Master
Advanced

Modbus
Slave
Multidrop

Modbus Slave
Point to Point
(PTP)

Modbus Slave
Modem

Modbus Parity

NONE

Modbus Stop Bits

1 BIT

Slave Address

Slave Port Enable

Double Register Format

Setup parameter

Baud Rate (BPS)

Note: When Modbus Slave Modem protocol is selected, the Modbus Parity and Modbus Stop Bits are fixed at
None and 1 Bit respectively and cannot be changed.

Revision 12
11/08

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

171

Unit Setup
Communication Ports

Serial Port S2 (OI)

The information presented in Table 102 also applies to Serial Port S2 when a Redundant Controller is used
with the OI. Refer to Appendix A - page 289 for more information about the Redundant Controller displays.
Table 102 Serial Port S2 (OI) details
Feature

Description

PORT DIAGNOSTIC

Shows condition of OI port. See OI Port diagnostics on page 156

PORT STATUS

Shows status of port (GOOD).

MESSAGES RECEIVED

Number of messages that were received and processed correctly.

DATA LINK ERRORS

The number of basic link-level errors detected by the controller (framing, overrun, etc).
These errors could be caused by electrical noise on the communications link or a bad
physical connection.

APPLICATION ERRORS

Number of messages that were responded to with an exception error by the controller.

PROTOCOL

ELN

BAUD RATE (BPS)

The current communication speed of the port, 38400 or 57600 bits per second.

BAUD RATE (BPS)

This item allows you to change the speed of the communication link that connects the
OI and the controller. The choices are 38400 or 57600 bits per second.

CLEAR STATISTICS

This item resets the message counters for this port back to zero (Messages Received,
Data Link Errors, and Application Errors). Note: the counters will only be reset if the
controller is in Run Mode.

Bold items are read only

172

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

Revision 12
11/08

Unit Setup
Communication Ports

Network Port
Table 103 Network port details
Feature

Description

PORT DIAGNOSTIC

Shows condition of network port. See Network Port diagnostics on page 157

CONTROLLER NAME

Configured controller name

NETWORK NAME

The network name to which the controller belongs.

LOCAL ALIAS

A locally referenced alias for the controller.

MAC ADDRESS

The controllers Media Access Control address.

IP ADDRESS

The controllers Internet Protocol address.

SUBNET MASK

The controllers subnet mask address.

GATEWAY IP ADDRESS

The Internet Protocol address for the controllers gateway device.

DOUBLE REGISTER
FORMAT

Each IEEE 32-bit floating point number requires two consecutive registers (four bytes,
MSB=4, LSB=1 in byte order below) starting with the register defined as the starting
register for the information. The stuffing order of the bytes into the two registers differs
among Modbus hosts. To provide compatibility, the Double register format is
configurable. Selections are:
FPB

Floating Point Big Endian Format Byte order 4, 3, 2, 1 (Default)

FP BB Floating Point Big Endian with byte-swapped Byte order 3, 4, 1, 2

FP L

Floating Point Little Endian Format Byte order 1, 2, 3, 4

FP LB Floating Point Little Endian with byte-swapped Byte order 2, 1, 4, 3

VIEW HOST
CONNECTIONS

Shows the network host connections display. See View Host Connections, Table 104

VIEW PEER
CONNECTIONS

Shows the network peer connections display. See View Peer Connections, Table 106

Bold items are read only

Revision 12
11/08

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

173

Unit Setup
Communication Ports

View Host Connections

Accessed from Network Port display. Shows each virtual connections status and details.
NETWORK HOST CONNECTIONS

CONNECTION 1:
GOOD
PROTOCOL
MODBUS TCP
HOST IP ADDRESS
103.99.56.4
MESSAGES RECEIVED
100
APPLICATION ERRORS
0
CLEAR STATISTICS
CONNECTION 2:
GOOD
PROTOCOL
MODBUS TCP
HOST IP ADDRESS
103.99.56.4
MESSAGES RECEIVED
100
APPLICATION ERRORS
0
CLEAR STATISTICS

CONNECTION 4:
GOOD
PROTOCOL
MODBUS TCP
HOST IP ADDRESS
103.99.56.4
MESSAGES RECEIVED
100
APPLICATION ERRORS
0
CLEAR STATISTICS

CONNECTION 5:
GOOD
PROTOCOL
MODBUS TCP
HOST IP ADDRESS
103.99.56.4
MESSAGES RECEIVED
100
APPLICATION ERRORS
0
CLEAR STATISTICS

CONNECTION 3:
GOOD
PROTOCOL
MODBUS TCP
HOST IP ADDRESS
103.99.56.4
MESSAGES RECEIVED
100
APPLICATION ERRORS
0
CLEAR STATISTICS

ALARM

MESSAGE TEXT

HZ

RUN

Figure 55 View host connections (Model 1042 example*)

Table 104 View network host details
Feature

Description

CONNECTION n

Shows condition of each virtual connection.

See Host Connection Diagnostics Status Indicators, Table 105

PROTOCOL *

The protocol used by the host to communicate with the controller (Modbus TCP).

HOST IP ADDRESS *

The IP address of the host device that is using this connection.

MESSAGES RECEIVED *

Number of messages received without errors.

APPLICATION ERRORS*

Number of message requests that resulted in an exception.

CLEAR STATISTICS *

Resets to zero the number of messages received and application errors.

Bold items are read only

* For Model 559, select a connection number and press "Enter" to display connection information.

174

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

Revision 12
11/08

Unit Setup
Communication Ports

Table 105 Host Connection Diagnostics Status Indicators

Parameter
Network
Host
Connections
Diagnostics

Status

Possible Cause

GOOD

N/A

APPLICATION
ERROR

At least one
response to a host
resulted in an
exception code.

Controller Action

N/A

User Action

N/A

1.

Rack 1 monitor
block's COMPORT
DIAG is set to
WARNING.

2.

Rack 1 monitor
block's RACK OK
pin is turned off.

3.

ASYS block's HW
OK pin is turned off

At host, determine which

message is causing the
exception code and fix.

View Peer Connections

Accessed from Network Port display. Shows each peers address and diagnostic.
Table 106 View peer connection details
Feature

Description

CONTROLLER NAME

Scroll to any controller name and press Enter to see statistics. See Table 107

IP ADDRESS

Internet Protocol address of the peer controller.

STATUS

See Host/Peer Connection Status Indicators, Table 108

Bold items are read only

Revision 12
11/08

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

175

Unit Setup
Communication Ports

View Network Peer statistics

Accessed from View Peer Connections display.
Table 107 View network peer statistics details
Feature

Description

PEER CONTROLLER
NAME

Controller name of the peer device. All peer devices must have the same network
name. All peer devices that share a common network name must have unique
controller names.

PEER IP ADDRESS

IP address of the peer. The IP address is automatically determined when a peer

device is discovered via its network and controller names.

STATUS

See Peer Connection Status Indicators, Table 108

MESSAGES RECEIVED

Number of messages received from the peer device.

MESSAGES
TRANSMITTED

Number of messages sent to the peer device.

WRITE REQUESTS

Number of write event messages sent to the peer device.

WRITE REQUEST
FAILURES

Number of write event messages that have not been acknowledged by the peer device
within the scan rate configured for the peer data exchange. A non-zero value means
the network is congested and message transfer is being impeded.

PRODUCER FAILURES

Number of times the peer device has not responded to a data exchange connection
request. Non-zero value means the peer device is not available because the controller
is in Program mode, controller power is off, or controller name does not exist in the
network. The network is defined as all devices that:
are on the same physical network,
are within the IP address range per the configured IP mask,
share the same peer network name.

CLEAR STATISTICS

Reset to zero the number of messages received and application errors.

Bold items are read only

176

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

Revision 12
11/08

Unit Setup
Communication Ports

Table 108 Peer Connection Status Indicators

Parameter
Network
Peer
Connections
Diagnostics

Status

Possible Cause

Controller Action

GOOD

N/A

APPLICATION
ERROR

The peer
connection could
not be established
due to an internal
program problem.

N/A

The peer device

indicated that the
one or more data
item is not valid.

The error will occur

when an incompatibility
exists between peer
devices with regard to
variable or signal
assignments.

SETUP
ERROR

Peer is connected and

updating normally

User Action

N/A

1. Reset the controller to

restart the UDP/IP
protocol stack and reset
buffer allocations.
2. Contact Honeywell
Technical Assistance if the
problem exists.
Contact Honeywell Technical
Assistance if the status
occurs.

This error should not

occur when exchanging
data between HC900
controllers.
PEER FAIL

The assigned peer

could not be
located on the
network.

N/A

1. Check the controller name

and network name of the
peer device to assure that
they match that specific
PDE block.
2. Check that the IP
addresses of the peer
devices are all within the
range of the IP mask.
3. Check that the peer
devices have the same IP
subnet mask. See
Network parameters for IP
mask setting.

PORT FAIL

continued

Revision 12
11/08

The peer data

exchange IO
subsystem could
not be started due
to internal resource
problem.

N/A

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

1. Reset the controller to

restart the Ethernet IO
hardware and reassign
processor IO mapping.
2. Contact Honeywell
Technical Assistance if the
problem exists.

177

Unit Setup
Communication Ports

NOT
STARTED

The assigned peer

IO connection has
not yet been
attempted. Normal
state during startup
and during
configuration mode.
This status should
automatically
change to GOOD
after both peer
controllers are in
the RUN mode.

1. If this status persists

during run time, check that
the peer device is properly
connected and that the
control name and network
name is correct.
2. Check that the IP masks
of all peer devices to
assure that all IP
addresses are within the
same subnet.
3. Check that all external
network components such
as switches and routers
allow passing of UDP
packets on port 502.
4. Check that the peer
device is powered on and
is in RUN mode.

178

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

Revision 12
11/08

Unit Setup
Communication Ports

Expansion I/O Port

COMMUNICATION PORT
EXPANSION I/O PORT

RACK 2

RACK 3

RACK 4

RACK 5

DIAGNOSTICS

TOTAL
1

GOOD

H/W FAIL

GOOD

GOOD

MESSAGES

1000

200

300

200

300

LINK ERRORS

CLEAR ALL CLEAR 2

ALARM

CLEAR 3

CLEAR 4

MESSAGE TEXT

CLEAR 5

HZ

RUN

Figure 56 Model 1042 view network host connections

EXPANSION I/O PORTS
PAGE 1 OF 3
RACK 2 DIAGNOSTICS
MESSAGES

H/W/FAIL
0

LINK ERRS
CLEAR STATISTICS
RACK 3 DIAGNOSTICS
MESSAGES
LINK ERRS
CLEAR STATISTICS
ALARM

MESSAGE TEXT

H/W/FAIL
0
0

HZ

RUN

Figure 57 Model 559 view network host connections

On Model 559 use Page up and Page down to view Rack 4, Rack 5, and Total Diagnostics
Table 109 Expansion I/O Port details
Feature
DIAGNOSTICS

Description

TOTAL: Total number of all rack diagnostics other than Good.

RACK n: See Expansion I/O Port on page 158 for explanation of the status.

MESSAGES

TOTAL: Total number of message attempts to all racks.

RACK n: Number of message attempts to the rack.

LINK ERRORS

TOTAL: Total number of message attempts to all racks that resulted in failed
response.
RACK n: Number of message attempts to the rack that resulted in failed response.

CLEAR ALL

Reset to zero the Messages and Link Errors counters.

CLEAR STATISTICS

Reset the messages and link error counters for a single rack to zero.

Bold items are read only

Revision 12
11/08

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

179

Unit Setup
Communication Ports

Modbus Slave Devices display

This display gives you an overview of the individual slave devices attached to the controllers RS-232 port
when the port is set-up as a Modbus Master. Table 110 describes the information located on this display.
Table 110 Modbus Slave Devices display
Display Field

Description

SLAVE DEVICE

This column shows the name of the slave device and its relative position
(1 through 16).
Use the arrow keys to select an individual slave device to get more
detailed status information. Press ENTER to call-up the Modbus Slave
Details display.

IN SCAN

This column shows the current scan status of each slave device.
YES: The slave device is being scanned at its optimum rate. The scan
rate is computed by the controller.
NO: The slave device is being scanned at a reduced rate, or it is not
being scanned at all. The status may be NO for any of the following
reasons:
the ENABLE SCAN setting is NO (see the Modbus Slave Details

display).
the COMM QUALITY for this slave device is BAD or NONE (see the

Modbus Slave Details display).

the Modbus address of the slave device is set to 255.
the slave device is not defined in the controller configuration.
the RS-232 port protocol is not set to one of the Modbus Master

protocols.

Modbus Slave Details display

This display allows you to see the status of an individual slave device and place the slave device in and out
of scan. You can access this display from the Modbus Slave Devices overview display. Table 111
describes the information present on this display.

180

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

Revision 12
11/08

Unit Setup
Communication Ports

Table 111 Modbus Slave Details display

Display Field
IN SCAN

Description

This column shows the current scan status of each slave device.
YES: The slave device is being scanned at its optimum rate. The scan
rate is computed by the controller.
NO: The slave device is being scanned at a reduced rate, or it is not
being scanned at all. The possible reasons are:
SCAN ENABLED is set to NO.
COMM QUALITY is NONE or BAD.
the Modbus address of the slave device is set to 255.
the slave device is not defined in the controller configuration.
The RS-232 port protocol is not set to one of the Modbus Master

protocols.
SCAN ENABLED

YES: Scanning has been enabled (see the ENABLE SCAN selection
below)
NO: Scanning has been disabled (see the ENABLE SCAN selection
below)

COMM QUALITY

NONE: This slave device is not defined in the controller configuration.

GOOD: The slave device is being scanned at its optimum rate because
its operation on the communications link is acceptable.
BAD: The slave device is being scanned at a reduced rate because it
has experienced an abnormal number of failed responses. Refer to the
section Troubleshooting a Comm Quality Problem below.

MESSAGES RECEIVED

The number of messages that were received and processed correctly

since the last Cold Start.

DATA LINK ERRORS

The number of basic link-level errors generated by this slave since the
last Cold Start. Refer to the section Troubleshooting Data Link Errors
for more information.

APPLICATION ERRORS

The number of application errors generated by this slave since the last
Cold Start. Application errors are messages that the slave device
responded to with an exception code. For example, application errors
can be caused by (a) writing to a read-only register, (b) accessing a
register that is not supported by the slave device, or (c) using a Modbus
function code that is not supported by the slave device.

DOUBLE REGISTER
FORMAT

Under Modbus protocol, each IEEE 32-bit floating-point number requires

two consecutive Modbus registers, for a total of four bytes. The stuffing
order of the bytes within these registers differs among Modbus devices.
To provide compatibility with the various devices, the double-register
format is configurable. The selections are:
FP B
FP L
FP BB
FP LB

ENABLE SCAN

Big Endian format

Little Endian format
Big Endian with byte-swap
Little Endian with byte-swap

Byte order: 4, 3, 2, 1
Byte order: 1, 2, 3, 4
Byte order: 3, 4, 1, 2
Byte order: 2, 1, 4, 3

Use this item to enable or disable scanning of the slave device. Select
YES to enable scanning for this device.
Select NO to disable scanning of this device.

Bold items are read-only.

Revision 12
11/08

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

181

Unit Setup
Communication Ports

Troubleshooting a Comm Quality problem

If a slave device is reporting a Comm Quality value of BAD, check the following items:
1.

Verify that the slave device is powered-up.

2.

Verify that the slave device is wired correctly.

3.

Verify that the slave device has the correct slave address.

4.

Verify that all slave devices on the link have a unique slave address.

5.

Verify that the slave device has the correct baud rate and parity settings.

6.

Verify that all slave devices on the link have the same baud rate and parity settings.

7.

Verify that the slave is set-up for half-duplex operation.

8.

If all slave devices report a BAD status, check the physical connection of the link to the controllers
RS-232 port. If this connection is OK, check the connection to each slave device on the link.

9.

If there is more than one slave device on the link, verify that the RS-232/RS-485 converter box is
working correctly.

10. Verify that all terminating resistors are installed properly. Verify that the ohm-value of the
terminating resistors is correct.
Troubleshooting Data Link Errors
Data Link Errors can be caused by electrical noise, physical wiring problems, or incorrect configuration
settings. If a Master or Slave device is reporting Data Link Errors, check the following items:

182

1.

Verify that the physical wiring of the communication link is correct.

2.

Verify that the physical wiring is shielded from electrical noise.

3.

Verify that all devices on the link have the correct baud rate and parity settings.

4.

Verify that all terminating resistors are installed properly. Verify that the ohm-value of the
terminating resistors is correct.

5.

If the protocol is Modbus Master or Modbus Master Advanced, the errors may be due to a slave
device that does not reply when it is scanned.

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

Revision 12
11/08

Unit Setup
File Name Selection

File Name Selection

To expedite disk storage using DOS files, a list of file names may be created in advance. The operator
selects from this list when naming profiles, recipes, schedules, sequences, and configurations about to be
stored on the disk.
This display lets you create and modify the list of 25, 6-character file names.
FILE NAME SELECTIONS
FILENAME1
FILENAME2
FILENAME3
FILENAME4
FILENAME5
FILENAME6
FILENAME7
FILENAME8
FILENAME9
FILENAME10
FILENAME11

CONFIG
PROFIL
RECIPE
STORAG
NAME5
NAME6
NAME7
NAME8
NAME9
NAME10
NAME11

Figure 58 File name selection

Table 112 File name selection details
Feature

FILENAMEn

Description

To modify a name, move the cursor to the name and press Enter. Next, use the
Increment and Decrement keys to change each character in the six-character name, or
use an optionally attached AT-keyboard to type the name directly. Press Enter to keep
the new name.
Do not use backslashes\\ or decimal places in file names. Use DOS compatible file
names.

Revision 12
11/08

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

183

Unit Setup
Self Tests

Self Tests
This function lets you perform tests to verify proper functioning of the OI.
Press Escape to end any test.
SELF-TESTS
KEYBOARD TEST
DISPLAY TEST
DISK READ/WRITE TEST

Figure 59 Self tests

Table 113 Self tests details
Feature

Description

KEYBOARD TEST

After selecting this, the display goes blank. Press any key to test that keythe keys
name will appear if it is functioning properly. If the keys name does not appear, the key
is faulty. The test can be run using the AT keyboard as well as the local keypad, but only
the keys that are mapped to the keypad are exercised. See Table 5. Press Esc to exit
this test.

DISPLAY TEST

After selecting this, the display shows a spectrum of all possible 16 colors. If these colors
are not shown, the display is faulty. Press Enter to cycle through the test displays.

DISK READ/WRITE
TEST

This test verifies the operation of the disk drive.

184

Insert a blank floppy disk or Zip disk into the drive and close the door. Press Enter to
begin the test. After a few seconds, the display will indicate whether the test passed or
failed. Refer to Messages on page 279 for details about any error messages that may
occur.

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

Revision 12
11/08

Unit Setup
Calibrate AI

Calibrate AI
ATTENTION

Do not access this menu while the Hybrid Control Designer Utilities Calibrate Controller
Analog I/O dialog window is being displayed, or vice versa. Calibration can't be done as long
as both displays are shown; you must exit either display to do a calibration.

Overview
Analog inputs are factory calibrated to +/- 0.1% of span unless specifically noted in the range
specifications. A field calibration may be performed on any analog input on a point-by-point basis to
optimize measurement accuracy. The factory calibration parameters are retained in non-volatile memory
and may be re-installed to undo a field calibration using selections from the calibration procedure.
Both Factory and field calibration information is stored on the Analog Input module itself. Therefore, once
a module has been calibrated it can be moved to any slot position or any rack without being recalibrated.
However, the controller will automatically restore a channels Factory calibration settings under the
following conditions:

The channel is reconfigured to use a different gain setting. This may happen if you change the input type
of the channel (for example, change from a TC to a Voltage or RTD input type).

The AI module detects an error in its stored field calibration information. In this case, factory
calibration is restored for all of the channels on the affected module.

Note that you must configure a channels input type and range before you try to calibrate it. The
calibration will be performed against the gain setting associated with the input type and range. If you
change the input type after calibrating, the module will automatically restore the Factory calibration
settings for that channel. If necessary, you can use the PC Designers Monitor Mode feature to determine
whether a given channel is using Factory or field calibration.
Calibration equipment

For best results use a calibration source accurate to 1 microvolt.

You must use a voltage source and copper lead-wire for channels that are configured as thermocouple
and voltage inputs. Do not use a compensated calibrator and TC extension lead-wire to calibrate TC
channels.

Note that Cold Junction sensor and Analog Input calibrations are performed separately; you do not have
to calibrate the CJ sensors before calibrating your TC input channels.

If you are calibrating current-type inputs (0-20 ma or 4-20 ma) and you are using an external shunt
resistor, we recommend that you calibrate the channel using a current-source with the actual shunt
resistor installed on the terminals. This will allow you to calibrate out any inaccuracies in the shunt
resistor. A high-precision shunt resistor should always be used.

Revision 12
11/08

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

185

Unit Setup
Calibrate AI

Calibrate AI menu
Calibrate AI lets you

change the controller mode from the menu to program or off-line,

calibrate any analog input channel,

calibrate cold junction temperature,

restore a channels original factory calibration,

restore a cold junctions factory calibration.

Set Controller Mode

When you select Set Controller Mode from the menu you can change the Controllers operating mode. It
has the same effect as if you changed the mode switch on the controller.
The current mode is indicated on the bottom right of the display.
Select OFF-LINE or PROGRAM to calibrate the AI.
while Set Mode is RUN the following warning appears:
If you press ENTER
THE CONTROLLER OUTPUTS ARE ACTIVE IN
THE RUN MODE, HELD IN OFF-LINE MODE,
AND DE-ENERGIZED IN PROGRAM MODE.
PRESS ENTER TO CHANGE
PRESS ESC TO ABORT.
Press ESC to return to Calibrate AI menu.

186

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

Revision 12
11/08

Unit Setup
Calibrate AI

Calibrate AI channel
Calibrate AI Channel guides you through a procedure for calibrating an analog input channel. Perform the
steps in the order of the menu. Refer to the example AI calibration procedure.
Table 114 Calibrate AI channel details
Feature

Description

STATUS

This displays the status at each step of calibration. In order of appearance:

READY
CONNECT 0% AI
CALIBRATING 0% AI
CONNECT 100% AI
CALIBRATING 100% AI
SAVE AI CALIBRATION
AI CAL FAILED or DONE

REFERENCE

Indicates numeric input reference value and engineering units. Also indicates an invalid
module or channel.

TIME REM

Time remaining until the selected calibration step is complete.

RACK
MODULE
CHANNEL

Enter the rack number, module number, and channel number of the AI to be calibrated.

SELECT INPUT

Select this to verify that the selected module is installed in the controller.

CALIBRATE 0% INPUT

Set the calibration source to the value shown next to REFERENCE, then select this to
calibrate. Calibration takes 30 seconds. Status will indicate when calibration is
complete.

CALIBRATE 100%
INPUT

Set the calibration source to the value shown next to REFERENCE, then select this to
calibrate. Calibration takes 30 seconds. Status will indicate when calibration is
complete.

SAVE CALIBRATION

Select this to save the channel calibration.

Bold items are read-only.

ATTENTION

Note: Analog Input calibration may fail for the following reasons.
-The physical connection to the calibration source is bad.
-The selected Rack, Module, and Channel does not exist, or does not support AI calibration.
-The selected input does not support the electrical range that you are trying tcalibrate. For
example, the 16-channel high-level AI module does not support a range of 0-2 volts.

Revision 12
11/08

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

187

Unit Setup
Calibrate AI

Example of AI calibration
This example assumes the channel has already been configured as a Type T thermocouple, Range 300 to
700 Degrees F.
Table 115 Example of AI calibration
Step

Action

Connect the calibrator to the channel to be calibrated. Use a millivolt source and copper wire;
do not use TC extension lead-wire.

Put the controller into Program or Off-line mode.

Access CALIBRATE AI display.

Enter the RACK number, MODULE number and CHANNEL number for the input channel to be
calibrated.

Press Enter to SELECT INPUT. The selected channel will have its 0% range data presented in
the upper portion of the calibration display. In this example, the value 5.341 millivolts will be
shown.

Connect an appropriate input source to the channel to be calibrated and adjust to the 0% value
specified in the upper portion of the display.

Select CALIBRATE 0% INPUT and press Enter, the upper portion of the display will indicate the
time remaining to recalculate a new 0% calibration value.

The upper portion of the display will indicate the 100% value (19.097 millivolts in this example).
Apply this value to the input.

Select CALIBRATE 100% INPUT and press Enter, the upper portion of the display will indicate
the time remaining to recalculate a new 100% calibration value.

10

Select SAVE CALIBRATION and press Enter to apply the recalculated values to the input.

11

Place controller back in Run mode.

ATTENTION

Note: If the message INVALID SEQ appears at the top of the display, it means that the steps
of the calibration procedure have been performed out of sequence. Go to Step 1 and start
over again.

188

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

Revision 12
11/08

Unit Setup
Calibrate AI

Calibrate CJ temperature
Each analog input card has two Cold Junction (CJ) sensors that are used in making thermocouple
measurements. These sensors may be re-calibrated in the field if desired to optimize thermocouple
measurement accuracy using the following procedure.
ATTENTION

An inaccurate CJ calibration will affect the accuracy of your thermocouple measurements. If

you are going to perform CJ calibration, you must use a very accurate temperature-measuring
device. It is also important that you allow the temperature around the controllers terminal
block to stabilize for 10 minutes or more before you take the CJ temperature reading.

Perform the steps in the order shown in the following table.

Table 116 Calibrate CJ temp details
Feature

Description

STATUS

This displays the status at each step of calibration. In order of appearance:

READY
MEASURE TEMPERATURE AT SELECTED CJ
CALIBRATING CJ
CJ CAL FAILED
SAVE CJ CALIBRATION

REFERENCE

Indicates CJ temperature reading in Degrees C. Also indicates an invalid module or

channel.

TIME REM

Time remaining until calibration is complete.

RACK
MODULE
CHANNEL

Enter the rack number, module number, and channel number of the CJ sensor to be
calibrated. Channel 1 is the top CJ sensor, Channel 2 is the bottom sensor.

SELECT CJ INPUT

Select this to verify that the displayed module and channel are correct.

ENTER MEASURED
CJ VALUE (IN
DEGREES C)

Place your temperature-measuring device at the terminal that is closest to the selected
CJ sensor. Allow the environment around the terminal block to stabilize for at least 10
minutes before taking the temperature reading. Enter the measured temperature here,
in Degrees C.

CALIBRATE CJ INPUT

Select this to start calibration. Calibration takes 30 seconds. Status will indicate when
calibration is complete.

SAVE CALIBRATION

Select this to save the calibration.

Bold items are read-only.

Revision 12
11/08

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

189

Unit Setup
Calibrate AI

Example of CJ calibration

TIP
Press ESC at any time to abort calibration.
If the message INVALID SEQ appears at the top of the display, it means that the steps of
the calibration procedure have been performed out of sequence. Go to Step 1 and start
over again.
Press ESC as needed to back up to the UNIT SETUP menu and use SET MODE to return
the controller to the RUN mode.
From the CALIBRATE AI display, the factory calibration values may be re-installed and the
field calibration values removed on a point-by-point basis by using procedures that conform
in principal to those in the table below.

Table 117 Example of CJ calibration

Step

190

Action

Put the controller into Program or Offline mode

Press Esc to access CALIBRATE CJ TEMP display.

Enter RACK number, MODULE number and CHANNEL number (Channel 1 = top sensor,
channel 2 = bottom sensor).

Press Enter to SELECT CJ INPUT. The current value of the sensor is displayed in degrees
centigrade in the top area of the display.

Using a separate temperature sensor, measure the temperature of the CJ sensor in degrees
Centigrade (Note, CJ calibration is performed in Degrees Centigrade regardless of
thermocouple range preferences.).

Enter the temperature value measured in step 5 under ENTER MEASURED CJ VALUE (IN
DEGREES C)

Select CALIBRATE CJ INPUT and press Enter, the area at the top of the display indicated the
time remaining to recalculate a new CJ sensor measurement.

Select SAVE CALIBRATION and press Enter to apply the recalculated values to the CJ
Channel.

Repeat steps 2 through 8 for CJ sensor 2.

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

Revision 12
11/08

Unit Setup
Calibrate AI

Restore AI factory calibration

This restores the selected channel to its factory calibration settings. Perform the steps in the order of the
menu.
Table 118 Restore AI factory calibration details
Feature

Description

STATUS

Displays the status of the restore. Possible statuses are:

READY
RESTORING AI CAL
RESTORE AI FAILED

REFERENCE

Indicates numeric input reference value and engineering units. Also indicates an invalid
rack, module, or channel.

RACK
MODULE
CHANNEL

Enter the rack, module, and channel to be restored.

Bold items are read-only.

Revision 12
11/08

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

191

Unit Setup
Calibrate AI

Restore CJ factory calibration

This restores the selected cold junction sensor to its factory calibration settings. Perform the steps in the
order of the menu.
Table 119 Restore CJ factory calibration details
Feature

Description

STATUS

This shows the status of the restore. Possible statuses are:

READY
RESTORING CJ CAL
RESTORE CJ FAILED

REFERENCE

Indicates numeric input reference value and engineering units. Also indicates an invalid
module or channel.

MODULE

Enter the module containing the channel to be restored.

CHANNEL

Enter the channel to be restored.

RESTORE

Select this to restore calibration.

Bold items are read-only.

192

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

Revision 12
11/08

Unit Setup
Calibrate AO

Calibrate AO
ATTENTION

You should not access the Hybrid Control Utilities Calibrate Controller Analog I/O display while
the OI calibration display is being displayed, or vice versa. Calibration can't be done as long as
both displays are shown; user must exit either display to do a calibration.

Overview
Analog outputs are factory calibrated to +/- 0.1% of span. A field calibration may be performed on any
analog output on a point-by-point basis to optimize accuracy. The factory calibration parameters are
retained in non-volatile memory and may be re-installed to undo a field calibration using selections from
the calibration procedure.
Both Factory and field calibration information is stored on the Analog Output module itself. Therefore,
once a module has been calibrated it can be moved to any slot position or any rack without being
recalibrated.
Calibrate AO menu
For increased accuracy, Calibrate AO lets you

change the controller mode from this menu to Program mode.

calibrate any analog output channel

restore an analog output channels original factory calibration

Before calibrating an analog output, you must put the Controller in Program mode. Select Set Controller
Mode from the menu and see for instructions.

Revision 12
11/08

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

193

Unit Setup
Calibrate AO

Set Controller Mode

When you select Set Controller Mode from the menu you can change the Controllers operating mode. It
has the same effect as if you changed the mode switch on the controller.
The current mode is indicated on the bottom right of the display.
Select PROGRAM in order to calibrate the AO.
while Set Mode is RUN the following warning appears:
If you press ENTER
THE CONTROLLER OUTPUTS ARE ACTIVE IN
THE RUN MODE, HELD IN OFF-LINE MODE,
AND DE-ENERGIZED IN PROGRAM MODE.
PRESS ENTER TO CHANGE
PRESS ESC TO ABORT.
Press ESC to return to Calibrate AO menu.

194

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

Revision 12
11/08

Unit Setup
Calibrate AO

Calibrate AO channel
This lets you calibrate any analog output channel. Perform the steps in the order of the menu.
Table 120 Calibrate AO channel details
Feature

Description

STATUS

This shows the status of the calibration. In order of appearance statuses are:
READY
CONNECT 0% AO
CALIBRATING 0% AO
CONNECT 100% AO
CALIBRATING 100% AO
AO CAL FAILED
SAVE AO CALIBRATION

REFERENCE

Indicates output reference value and engineering units. Also indicates an invalid
module or channel.

RACK
MODULE
CHANNEL

Enter the rack, module, and channel of the AO channel to be calibrated.

SELECT OUTPUT

Select this to verify that the selected module is installed in the controller.

ENTER 0% MEASURED
VAL.

Measure the actual output (as mA, mV or Volt) and then enter the measured value in
mA here.

CALIBRATE 0% OUT

Select this to calibrate. Status will indicate when calibration is complete.

ENTER 100% MEAS.

VALUE

Measure the actual output (as mA, mV or Volt) and then enter the measured value in
mA here.

CALIBRATE 100% OUT

Select this to calibrate. Status will indicate when calibration is complete.

SAVE CALIBRATION

Select this to save the channel calibration.

Bold items are read-only.

TIP
The range of an Analog Output is either 0-20 mA or 4-20 mA. If you are using an external
resistor to convert the current output to a voltage output, you can calibrate the AO channel
with the resistor in place. However, you must still enter the 0 and 100 percent calibration
values in milliamps; you cannot enter volts or millivolts.
AO calibration fails when the value entered by the user is outside of the following limits:
For 4 mA dc, the value entered must be between 3.3 and 4.7 mA dc.
For 20 mA dc, the value entered must be between 19.3 and 20.7 mA dc.

Revision 12
11/08

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

195

Unit Setup
Calibrate AO

Example of AO calibration
Table 121 Example of AO calibration
Step

Action

Press the MENU key, select Unit Setup and Calibrate AO.

Place controller in PROGRAM Mode if prompted. (Be aware placing the controller in the
Program Mode will cause all controller outputs to turn off, typically turning off the process under
control.) Push ESC to return to Calibrate AO.

Select Calibrate Channel from available menu selections.

Enter the RACK number, MODULE number and CHANNEL number for the output channel to
be calibrated.

Press Enter to SELECT OUTPUT. The program will then check to see if the selected AO
exists. The selected channel will have its 0% reference data presented in the upper portion of
the calibration display.

Connect an appropriate meter to the output terminals, measure the mA output of the channel
being calibrated and enter this value in the ENTER 0% MEASURED VAL. in mA.

Select CALIBRATE 0% OUTPUT and press Enter. If the calibration was successful the 100%
entry is now available.

The upper portion of the display will indicate the 100% reference value. With an appropriate
meter measure the output of the channel being calibrated and enter this value in the ENTER
100% MEAS. VALUE in mA. .

Select CALIBRATE 100% OUTPUT and press Enter. If the calibration was successful the new
calibration may be saved.

10

Select SAVE CALIBRATION and press Enter to apply the recalculated values to the output
channel.

11

If during the procedure either of the tests fail the instrument will display an AO calibration Failed
message. This message may occur if the measured/entered data exceeds an appropriate
offset range for the input span.

12

Press ESC to return to the Calibrate AO menu and place the controller into the RUN mode.
Press ESC until a return to normal displays.

ATTENTION

Note: If the message INVALID SEQ appears at the top of the display, it means that the steps
of the calibration procedure have been performed out of sequence. Go to Step 1 and start
over again.

You can restore factory calibration settings by following the prompts available under the RESTORE AO
FACTORY CAL menu.

196

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

Revision 12
11/08

Unit Setup
Calibrate AO

Restore AO factory calibration

This restores the selected AO channel to its factory calibration settings. Perform the steps in the order of
the menu.
Table 122 Restore AO factory calibration details
Feature

Description

STATUS

This shows the status of the calibration. In order of appearance statuses are:
READY
RESTORING AO CAL
RESTORE AO FAILED

REFERENCE

Indicates output reference value and engineering units. Also indicates an invalid module
or channel.

RACK
MODULE
CHANNEL

Enter the rack, module, and channel of the AO channel to be restored.

CHANNEL

Enter an AO channel to calibrate.

SELECT OUTPUT

Select this to verify that the displayed module and channel are correct.

Revision 12
11/08

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

197

Unit Setup
Calibrate Motor

Calibrate Motor
ATTENTION

You should not access the Hybrid Control Utilities Calibrate Controller PPO Block display on
the PC while the OI calibration display is being displayed, or vice versa. Calibration can't be
performed as long as both displays are shown; you must exit either the PC or the OI display to
perform a motor calibration.

Introduction
The Calibrate/Setup Motor menu on the Unit Setup display lets you set up and calibrate a selected motor.
SETUP lets you set the motors deadband, travel time, low output limit, and high output limit.
CALIBRATE ensures that the 0% and 100% motor positions are actually correct and measures the true
motor speed.
The calibration of a motor is similar to that of an AI or AO. However, the motor calibration values are
stored as part of the PPO blocks configuration data, not on the AI card itself. Therefore, to retain these
motor calibration values, you must upload the configuration and save it to disk after motor calibration has
been performed.
The basic motor calibration procedure is as follows:

move the motor to its 0% position and wait until the feedback signal has stabilized.

capture the 0% feedback value.

move the motor to its 100% position and wait until the feedback signal has stabilized.

capture the 100% feedback value.

measure the true motor speed by:

a) moving the motor for a fixed period of time.
b) measuring the position feedback delta.
c) computing a motor speed from this data.

This value will override any previously configured value.

198

save the calibration values as part of the PPO blocks configuration data.

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

Revision 12
11/08

Unit Setup
Calibrate Motor

Motor Setup
The Motor Setup display lets you set the motors Deadband, Travel Time, Low Output Limit, and High
Output Limit.
Table 123 Motor Setup Procedure
Step

Action

Press the MENU key, select UNIT SETUP then CALIBRATE/SETUP MOTOR.
The SELECT MOTOR TO CALIBRATE screen will appear.

Select a motor from the list of motors on the display and press the ENTER key. Select SETUP
from the menu.
The SETUP MOTOR screen will appear.

Select DEADBAND.
Deadband is an adjustable gap between forward and reverse motor operation (the range over
which the output can change before a relay is energized).
Press the ENTER key.
Enter a value of from 0.5 to 5.0%

Select TRAVEL TIME.

Travel time is the time it takes the motor to travel from its calibrated 0% position to its calibrated
100% position.
Press the ENTER key.
Enter a value of from 12 to 300 seconds.

Select OUTPUT LOW LIMIT.

This is the low limit for the motor position.
Press the ENTER key.
Enter a value of from 0% to 100%

Select OUTPUT HIGH LIMIT.

This is the high limit for the motor position.
Press the ENTER key.
Enter a value of from 0% to 100%

Revision 12
11/08

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

199

Unit Setup
Calibrate Motor

Motor Calibration
The Calibrate Motor displays let you calibrate a motor s 0% and 100% positions.
Table 124 Motor Calibration Entry Procedure
Step

Action

Press the MENU key, select UNIT SETUP then CALIBRATE/SETUP MOTOR.
The SELECT MOTOR TO CALIBRATE screen will appear.

Select a motor from the list of motors on the display and press the ENTER key. Select
CALIBRATE from the menu.
The CALIBRATE MOTOR screen will appear.

The controller must be in Program Mode in order to perform calibration.

If it is not in Program Mode, select SET CONTROLLER MODE from the menu.
Scroll down to PROGRAM then press the ENTER key.

Select a calibration method.

There are three methods for calibrating the motor. Scroll to the desired method and press the
ENTER key. Follow the appropriate procedure listed under Calibration Procedures.
AUTO the controller positions the motor and captures the positions.
SEMI-AUTO the controller positions the motor and the user captures the positions.
HAND the user positions the motor by hand and captures the positions.

Calibration Status Information

This area at the top of the three CALIBRATE MOTOR displays shows the following information during
calibration:
STATUS this field indicates the current status of the calibration procedure.
NOTE: If a status of Calibration Failed is displayed, take the appropriate corrective action,
and then repeat the calibration procedure again, beginning at Step 1. See Calibration Errors
for more information.
FEEDBACK VALUE this field shows the motor feedback value [a value between 0.0 and 1.0]. This
value should change whenever the motor is actually moving.
PERCENT COMPLETE this field indicates the progress of the current calibration step in percent [0 to
100%].
Cancel Calibration
You can stop the calibration process at any time by pressing the F1 key. The motor will stop moving when
this key is pressed. In order to resume calibration you must begin again at Step 1.
Calibration Errors
The following errors may be reported during the calibration process. Please take the appropriate corrective
action and repeat the calibration procedure beginning at Step 1.

200

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

Revision 12
11/08

Unit Setup
Calibrate Motor

Table 125 Calibration Errors

STATUS

CAUSE

Calibration Failed

CORRECTIVE ACTION

The calibration was not

performed in the correct
sequence.

Go back to Step 1 and repeat

the calibration process

The selected motor position has

not been configured.

Go back to the SELECT

MOTOR TO CALIBRATE
display and reselect the desired
motor.

Calibration Failed Bad AI

The AI channel being used for

the position feedback signal has
failed in some way.

Check for correct wiring and

correct AI input type.

Calibration Failed Bad Feedback

The value of the feedback signal

is out of range for the calibration
being performed.

Check for reversed wiring of

the feedback signal. Forward
motor movement should
produce increasing feedback
values.

Calibration Failed Wrong AI

Version

The firmware on the AI module

does not support PPO motor
control using a slidewire for the
position feedback.

Obtain a new AI module from

your supplier.

Revision 12
11/08

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

201

Unit Setup
Calibrate Motor

Auto Calibration Procedure

Table 126 Auto Calibration Procedure
Step
1

Action

Select AUTO CALIBRATE MOTOR from the menu on the CALIBRATE MOTOR screen.
Status - READY

Select START AUTO CALIBRATION

Status this field will change as the controller automatically performs the various steps of the
motor calibration process described in Step 3 below.
Feedback Value indicates movement and direction of the motor [0.0 to 1.0]
Percent Complete indicates the progress of each step [0 to 100%]

RESULT:

Status WAITMOTOR MOVING TO 0% POSITION.

Feedback Value indicates movement and direction of the motor [0.0 to 1.0]. This value
should decrease until the 0% position is reached.
Percent Complete indicates the progress of this step [0 to 100%]

Status WAITCALCULATING 0% FEEDBACK VALUE.

Feedback Value indicates the current position of the motor.
Percent Complete indicates the progress of this step [0 to 100%]

Status WAITMOTOR MOVING TO 100% POSITION.

Feedback Value indicates movement and direction of the motor [0.0 to 1.0]. This value
should increase until the 100% position is reached.
Percent Complete indicates the progress of this step [0 to 100%]

Status WAITCALCULATING 100% FEEDBACK VALUE.

Feedback Value indicates the current position of the motor.
Percent Complete indicates the progress of this step [0 to 100%]

Status WAITCALCULATING MOTOR SPEED.

Feedback Value indicates movement and direction of the motor [0.0 to 1.0]
Percent Complete indicates the progress of this step [0 to 100%]

Status WAITSAVING CALIBRATION VALUES.

Percent Complete indicates the progress of this step [0 to 100%].

Status CALIBRATION COMPLETED.

Press the ESC key to exit this display.

A message box with three choices will appear. Select one.
Press the F2 key to position the motor at 0%
Press the F3 key to position the motor at 100%
Press the F4 key to leave the motor at its current position.

202

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

Revision 12
11/08

Unit Setup
Calibrate Motor

Semi-Auto Calibration Procedure

ATTENTION
The steps of the Semi-Auto Calibration Procedure must be performed in the order described
below. You must wait for each step to complete before selecting and activating the next step.
If the message ERROR: PERFORM STEPS IN ORDER appears in the Status Area at the
top of the display, it means that either the steps of the calibration procedure have been
performed out of sequence, or you tried to activate the next step before the current step had
completed.
You can restart the procedure at any time by pressing the F1 key (to cancel the calibration)
and beginning again at Step 1.

Table 127 Semi-Auto Calibration Procedure

Step
1

Action

Select SEMI-AUTO CALIBRATE MOTOR from the menu on the CALIBRATE MOTOR
screen.
Status - READY

Select START 0% CALIBRATION

Status WAITMOTOR MOVING TO 0% POSITION.

Feedback Value indicates movement and direction of the motor [0.0 to 1.0]. This value
should decrease until the 0% position is reached.
Percent Complete indicates the progress of this step [0 to 100%]

Status MOTOR IS AT 0% POSITION

Select CALIBRATE 0% POSITION

Status WAITCALCULATING 0% FEEDBACK VALUE.

Feedback Value indicates the current position of the motor [0.0 to 1.0].
Percent Complete indicates the progress of this step [0 to 100%]

Status 0% FEEDBACK VALUE CAPTURED

Select START 100% CALIBRATION.

Status WAITMOTOR MOVING TO 100% POSITION.

Feedback Value indicates movement and direction of the motor [0.0 to 1.0]. This value
should increase until the 100% position is reached.
Percent Complete indicates the progress of this step [0 to 100%]

Status MOTOR IS AT 100% POSITION

Select CALIBRATE 100% POSITION

Status WAITCALCULATING 100% FEEDBACK VALUE.

Feedback Value indicates the current position of the motor [0.0 to 1.0]
Percent Complete indicates the progress of this step [0 to 100%]

Status 100% FEEDBACK VALUE CAPTURED

Select START MOTOR SPEED CALIBRATION. A warning display will appear:

WARNING
THE MOTOR WILL MOVE AUTOMATICALLY DURING
THE MOTOR SPEED CALIBRATION PROCESS
PRESS ENTER TO START
PRESS ESC TO CLOSE POPUP

Revision 12
11/08

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

203

Unit Setup
Calibrate Motor

Step
7

Action

Press the ENTER key to start the Motor Speed Calibration.

Status WAITCALCULATING MOTOR SPEED.

Feedback Value indicates movement and direction of the motor [0.0 to 1.0]
Percent Complete indicates the progress of this step [0 to 100%]

Status MOTOR SPEED CALIBRATION COMPLETE

Select SAVE CALIBRATION. The following information will appear:

FEEDBACK AT 0% - a value corresponding to the motors 0% position [0.0 to 1.0]
FEEDBACK AT 100% - a value corresponding to the motors 100% position [0.0 to 1.0]
MOTOR SPEED (IN SECONDS). This is the motor speed that was detected during Motor
Speed Calibration. This is the time it takes the motor to travel from its calibrated 0% position to
its calibrated 100% position.

10

Press the ENTER key to Save Calibration.

Status WAITSAVING CALIBRATION VALUES.

Percent Complete indicates the progress of this step [0 to 100%]

Status CALIBRATION VALUES SAVED

Press the ESC key to exit this display.

A message box with three choices will appear. Select one.
Press the F2 key to position the motor at 0%
Press the F3 key to position the motor at 100%
Press the F4 key to leave the motor at its current position.

204

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

Revision 12
11/08

Unit Setup
Calibrate Motor

Hand Calibration Procedure

ATTENTION
The steps of the Hand Calibration Procedure must be performed in the order described below.
You must wait for each step to complete before selecting and activating the next step.
If the message ERROR: PERFORM STEPS IN ORDER appears in the Status Area at the
top of the display, it means that either the steps of the calibration procedure have been
performed out of sequence, or you tried to activate the next step before the current step had
completed.
You can restart the procedure at any time by pressing the F1 key (to cancel the calibration)
and beginning again at Step 1.

Table 128 Hand Calibration Procedure

Step
1

Action

Select HAND CALIBRATE MOTOR from the menu on the CALIBRATE MOTOR screen.
Status - READY

Select START 0% CALIBRATION

Status PLEASE MOVE MOTOR TO 0% POSITION.

Feedback Value indicates movement and direction of the motor [0.0 to 1.0]. This value
should increase when the motor is moved in the forward direction, and decrease when the
motor is moved in the reverse direction.
Percent Complete will remain at 0% during this step.

Move the motor by hand to the 0% position. When complete, go to step 3.

3

Select CALIBRATE 0% POSITION

Status WAITCALCULATING 0% FEEDBACK VALUE.

Feedback Value indicates the current position of the motor [0.0 to 1.0]
Percent Complete indicates the progress of this step [0 to 100%]

Status 0% FEEDBACK VALUE CAPTURED

Select START 100% CALIBRATION.

Status PLEASE MOVE MOTOR TO 100% POSITION.

Feedback Value indicates movement and direction of the motor [0.0 to 1.0]. This value
should increase when the motor is moved in the forward direction, and decrease when the
motor is moved in the reverse direction.
Percent Complete will remain at 0% during this step.

Move the motor by hand to the 100% position. When complete, go to step 5.
5

Select CALIBRATE 100% POSITION

Status WAITCALCULATING 100% FEEDBACK VALUE.

Feedback Value indicates the current position of the motor [0.0 to 1.0]
Percent Complete indicates the progress of this step [0 to 100%]

Status 100% FEEDBACK VALUE CAPTURED

Select START MOTOR SPEED CALIBRATION. A warning will appear:

WARNING
THE MOTOR WILL MOVE AUTOMATICALLY DURING
THE MOTOR SPEED CALIBRATION PROCESS
PRESS ENTER TO START
PRESS ESC TO CLOSE POPUP

Revision 12
11/08

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

205

Unit Setup
Calibrate Motor

Step
7

Action

Press the ENTER key to start the Motor Speed Calibration.

Status WAITCALCULATING MOTOR SPEED.

Feedback Value indicates movement and direction of the motor [0.0 to 1.0]
Percent Complete indicates the progress of this step [0 to 100%]

Status MOTOR SPEED CALIBRATION COMPLETE

Select SAVE CALIBRATION. The following information will appear:

FEEDBACK AT 0% - a value corresponding to the motors 0% position [0.0 to 1.0]
FEEDBACK AT 100% - a value corresponding to the motors 100% position [0.0 to 1.0]
MOTOR SPEED (IN SECONDS). This is the motor speed that was detected during Motor
Speed Calibration. This is the time it takes the motor to travel from its calibrated 0% position to
its calibrated 100% position.

Press the ENTER key to Save Calibration.

10

206

Status WAITSAVING CALIBRATION VALUES.

Feedback Value indicates the current position of the motor [0.0 to 1.0]
Percent Complete indicates the progress of this step [0 to 100%]
Status CALIBRATION VALUES SAVED

Press the ESC key to exit this display.

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

Revision 12
11/08

Unit Setup
Display brightness

Display brightness
This display allows you to change the brightness on the display.
Press

on the OI to increase the brightness

Press

on the OI to decrease the brightness.

CHANGE DISPLAY BRIGHTNESS

to increase brightness
Press
to decrease brightness
Press
Press ESC to exit
PROG

Figure 60 Brightness display

Revision 12
11/08

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

207

Disk Utilities
Overview

Disk Utilities
Overview
Access
Main menu.
Description
Disk Utilities lets you load files from the disk to the controller, or store files from the controller to the disk.
Disk insertion
Step

Action

Open door and insert the disk. While the door is open BEZEL OPEN is displayed.

Close door. CHECKING DISK is displayed while the disk is checked for proper formatting and
ready for use. When the message goes away, the disk is ready for use.

Load
Load copies a file from the disk to the controller.
Store
Store copies a file from the controller to the disk.
See also
While performing Disk Utilities, messages may be displayed. See Table 175 for message descriptions.

208

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

Revision 12
11/08

Disk Utilities
List disk files

List disk files

This display lists all files on the disk.
Table 129 List disk files details
Feature

Description

FILENAME.EXT

File types are identified by the following extensions.

.CDE

Configuration

.PRF

SP Profile

.SCH

SP Schedule

.SEQ

Sequence

.RCP

Recipe

.DSS

Data Storage Set

Anatomy of filenames
This applies only to files created on the OI.

XXXXXX01.CDE
Prefix
6 characters

Suffix Extension
00-99 Automatically assigned
according to file type

TIP

Revision 12
11/08

1.

Use Increment and Decrement to see more files.

2.

If no files are on the disk, NO FILES is displayed.

3.

All files on the disk are shown.

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

209

Disk Utilities
Load/store SP profiles

Load/store SP profiles
This function lets you

load profiles from the disk to the Controllers RAM memory, or

store profiles from the Controllers RAM memory to the disk.

Description
Once a profile is loaded into the Controllers memory with Load Profile from Disk, it can be loaded from
memory into a Setpoint Program where it can be run. Therefore, to run a profile that is on the disk, you
must first Load Profile From Disk to memory, then load the profile from memory to the Setpoint
Programmer. To do the latter, see (page 60).
Conversely, to store to disk a program being run by the Setpoint Programmer, you must save the program
from the Setpoint Program to memory, (See Save Program, Page 52) then Store Profile To Disk.
Profile on disk or Zip

Program in Setpoint Programmer

Profiles in RAM
Store Profile To Disk

Profile #1

Save Program

Profile #2

Load Profile From Disk

Profile #3
.
.
.

SP PROGRAMMER SPTAG1
LABEL678
STATE PROF SEG RAMP
RUN
# 1
# 1

PV
SP

Load Program

PRIMARY

AUXLABEL

ENGU

ENGU

1450.0
1449.0

31.0
31.1

SEG TIME REM

01:30:00
PGM ELAPSED TIME 00:00:00

11:30

F1
RUN
F2
HOLD
F3
RESET
F4
ADV

LOAD
MORE COMMANDS

Figure 61 Relationship between disk, profile memory, and setpoint programmer

Select one of the profiles from the Load/Store Profiles display. This is the profile memory location you will
load to or store from.
Next, you will either:

210

load a profile from the disk to the selected slot in Controller memory, or

store the profile from this profile location to the disk.

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

Revision 12
11/08

Disk Utilities
Load/store SP profiles

Table 130 Load/store profiles details

Feature

LOAD
PROFILE
FROM
DISK

Description

Select this to load the selected disk profile to the selected slot in Controller memory. Once in
memory, the profile can be loaded into a setpoint programmer where it can be run.
After selecting LOAD PROFILE FROM DISK, the following display appears.
LOAD PROFILE 1 FROM DISK
BATCH 01 PRF
BATCH 02 PRF
PROFIL01 PRF
PROFIL02 PRF
PROFIL03 PRF

Select the desired profile to load from disk and press Enter to load it to the selected Controller
memory profile location. The message NO FILES means no profiles are on the disk.
STORE
PROFILE
TO DISK

Select this to store the selected profile from Controller memory to the disk.
After selecting STORE PROFILE TO DISK, the following display appears.
STORE PROFILE 1 TO DISK
FILE
FILES ON DISK:

PROFIL01 PRF
BATCH 01 PRF
BATCH 02 PRF
PROFIL01 PRF
PROFIL02 PRF
PROFIL03 PRF

At the FILE prompt, select a filename and number for the profile being stored. Use
Increment/Decrement to see available file names and numbers. Press Enter to store.

See also
See Load Program (page 60), Save Program (Page 52)
While performing Disk Utilities, messages may appear. See Table 175 for message descriptions.

Revision 12
11/08

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

211

Disk Utilities
Load/store SP schedules

Load/store SP schedules
This function lets you

load schedules from the disk to the Controllers RAM memory, or

store schedules from the Controllers RAM memory to the disk.

Description
Once a schedule is loaded into the Controllers memory with Load Schedule from Disk, it can be loaded
from memory into the Setpoint Scheduler where it can be run. Therefore, to run a schedule that is on the
disk, you must first Load Schedule From Disk to memory, then load the schedule from memory to the
Setpoint Scheduler. To do the latter, see Load Schedule on Page 81).
Conversely, to store to disk a schedule being run by the Setpoint Scheduler, you must save the schedule
from the Setpoint Schedule to memory, then Store Schedule To Disk. To do the former, see Save schedule
Page 72).
Schedule on disk or Zip

Schedule in Scheduler

Schedules in RAM

MAY 05
11:30

SP SCHEDULER SPTAG1
STATE

Store Schedule To Disk

Schedule #1

Save Schedule

Load Schedule From Disk

RUN

SP1
SP1
SP1
SP1
SP1
SP1
SP1
SP1

Load Schedule

USERLBL1
USERLBL1
USERLBL1
USERLBL1
USERLBL1
USERLBL1
USERLBL1
USERLBL1

RECYCLES REMAIN

SEG REMAIN 0000:00:00

Schedule #2
Schedule #3
.
.
.

SCHED SEGMENT

SP
123456.7
123456.7
123456.7
123456.7
123456.7
123456.7
123456.7
123456.7

0
F1
RUN

TOTAL 0000:00:00
PV
123456.7
123456.7
123456.7
123456.7
123456.7
123456.7
123456.7
123456.7

F2
HOLD

ENGU
ENGU
ENGU
ENGU
ENGU
ENGU
ENGU
ENGU

F3
RESET
F4
ADV

LOAD
CLEAR
EDIT
SAVE
ALARM

MESSAGE TEXT

HZ

RUN

Figure 62 Relationship between disk, schedule memory, and scheduler

212

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

Revision 12
11/08

Disk Utilities
Load/store SP schedules

Table 131 Load/store schedules details

Feature

LOAD
SCHEDULE
FROM DISK

Description

Select this to load the selected schedule to one of the slots in Controller memory. Once in
memory, the schedule can be loaded into a configuration.
After selecting LOAD SCHEDULE FROM DISK, the following display appears.
LOAD SCHEDULE 1 FROM DISK

BATCH 01 SCH
BATCH 02 SCH
PROFIL01 SCH
PROFIL02 SCH
PROFIL03 SCH

Select the desired schedule to load from disk and press "Enter" to load it to Controller
memory. The status of the load is shown on the display. The message NO FILES means no
schedules are on the disk.
STORE
SCHEDULE TO
DISK

Select this to store the selected schedule from Controller RAM memory to the disk.
After selecting STORE SCHEDULE TO DISK, the following display appears.
STORE SCHEDULE 1 TO DISK
FILE
FILES ON DISK:

UNIT

01 SCH

BATCH 01 SCH
BATCH 02 SCH
PROFIL01 SCH
PROFIL02 SCH
PROFIL03 SCH

At the FILE prompt, select a filename and number for the schedule being stored. Use
increment/decrement to see available file names and numbers. Press "Enter" to store. The
status of the store is shown on the display.

See also
While performing Disk Utilities, messages may appear. See Table 175 for message descriptions.

Revision 12
11/08

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

213

Disk Utilities
Load/Store sequences

Load/Store sequences
This function lets you

load sequences from the disk to the Controllers RAM memory, or

store sequences from the Controllers RAM memory to the disk.

Once a sequence is loaded into the Controllers memory with Load Sequence from Disk, it can be loaded
from memory into the Sequencer where it can be run. Therefore, to run a sequence that is on the disk, you
must first Load Sequence From Disk to memory, then load the sequence from memory to the Sequencer.
To do the latter, see Load Sequence (Page 100) in Sequence operation.
Conversely, to store to disk a sequence being rum by the sequencer, you must save the sequence from the
sequence from the Sequencer to memory, then store Sequence to disk. To do the former, see Save Sequence
(page 95 ) in Sequencer Operation.

Sequence on disk or Zip

Sequence in Sequencer

Sequences in RAM

SEQUENCER

Store Sequence To Disk

SEQUENCE 20

Sequence #1

Save Sequence

Load Sequence From Disk

HEATING

STATE

Sequence #2

STEP

Sequence #3
.
.
.

STEP
ELAPSED TIME
0000:00:00.0

F1
RUN

MODE
STEP
TIME REMAINING
0000:00:00.0

AUX OUTPUT F4 ADVANCES TO STEP 60

Load Sequence

12:30

COGS

RUN
SEQUENCE
ELAPSED TIME
0000:00:00.0

F2
HOLD

124.6
STATE 4

VIEW/EDIT SEQUENCE
LOAD SEQUENCE
EDIT STEPS
SAVE SEQUENCE
CLEAR SEQUENCE

F3
RESET

F4
ADV

Figure 63 Relationship between disk, sequence memory, and sequencer

Table 132 Load/store sequence details
Feature

LOAD
SEQUENCE
FROM DISK

Description

Select this to load the selected sequence to one of the slots in Controller memory. Once in
memory, the sequence can be loaded into a configuration.
After selecting LOAD SEQUENCE FROM DISK, the following display appears.
LOAD SEQUENCE1 FROM DISK
BATCH01 SEQ
BATCH02 SEQ
BATCH03 SEQ
BATCH04 SEQ
BATCH05 SEQ
BATCH06 SEQ
BATCH07 SEQ
BATCH08 SEQ
BATCH09 SEQ
BATCH10 SEQ

Select the desired sequence to load from disk and press "Enter" to load it to Controller
memory. The status of the load is shown on the display. The message NO FILES means no
sequences are on the disk.

214

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

Revision 12
11/08

Disk Utilities
Load/Store sequences

Feature

STORE
SEQUENCE TO
DISK

Description

Select this to store the selected sequence from Controller RAM memory to the disk.
After selecting STORE SEQUENCE TO DISK, the following display appears.
STORE SEQUENCE1 TO DISK
FILE
BATCH01 SEQ
FILES ON DISK: BATCH02 SEQ
BATCH03 SEQ
BATCH04 SEQ
BATCH05 SEQ
BATCH06 SEQ
BATCH07 SEQ
BATCH08 SEQ
BATCH09 SEQ
BATCH10 SEQ

At the FILE prompt, select a filename and number for the sequence being stored. Use
increment/decrement to see available file names and numbers. Press "Enter" to store. The
status of the store is shown on the display.

See also
While performing Disk Utilities, messages may appear. See Table 175 for message descriptions.

Revision 12
11/08

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

215

Disk Utilities
Load/store recipes

Load/store recipes
This function lets you

load recipes from the disk to the Controllers RAM memory, or

store recipes from the Controllers RAM memory to the disk.

Description
A recipe is a collection of variables and their values or states. When you load a recipe into controller
memory, the recipe becomes available to be loaded into the configuration. By subsequently loading a recipe
from controller memory into a configuration, the values or states of the variables in the recipe replace the
values of those variables in the controllers configuration.
Select a recipe from the Recipes In Memory display. As explained next in Table 133, you will either

load a recipe from the disk to the selected recipe location in Controller memory, or

store the recipe from this recipe location to the disk.

TIP

Do not confuse LOAD RECIPE FROM DISK (into memory) with LOAD RECIPE (into the
controllers configuration). See Load recipe (page 45).

Table 133 Load/store recipes details

Feature

LOAD RECIPE
FROM DISK

Description

Select this to load the selected recipe to one of the slots in Controller memory. Once in
memory, the recipe can be loaded into a configuration.
After selecting LOAD RECIPE FROM DISK, the following display appears.
LOAD RECIPE 1 FROM DISK
PRDUCT01 RCP
PRDUCT02 RCP
PRDUCT03 RCP
PRDUCT04 RCP
PRDUCT05 RCP

Select the desired recipe to load from disk and press Enter to load it to Controller memory.
The status of the load is shown on the display. The message NO FILES means no recipes
are on the disk.

216

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

Revision 12
11/08

Disk Utilities
Load/store recipes

Feature

STORE RECIPE
TO DISK

Description

Select this to store the selected recipe from Controller RAM memory to the disk.
After selecting STORE RECIPE TO DISK, the following display appears.
STORE RECIPE 1 TO DISK

FILE
FILES ON DISK:

PRDUCT 01RCP
PRDUCT01 RCP
PRDUCT02 RCP
PRDUCT03 RCP
PRDUCT04 RCP
PRDUCT05 RCP

At the FILE prompt, select a filename and number for the recipe being stored. Use
Increment/Decrement to see available file names and numbers. Press "Enter" to store. The
status of the store is shown on the display.

See also
While performing Disk Utilities, messages may be displayed. See Table 175 for message descriptions.

Revision 12
11/08

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

217

Disk Utilities
Format disk

Format disk
This DOS-formats a floppy disk for storage of recipes, profiles, or configurations. Not available for Zip
disks.
Table 134 Format disk details
Feature

FORMAT DISK

Description

Select this to format the disk. A warning message will be displayed. Escape to abort
the format or press Enter to begin.
All disk data will be erased. The message FORMATTING DISK will appear until
formatting is complete, then FORMAT COMPLETE is displayed. Press any key to
cancel formatting.

See also
While performing Disk Utilities, messages may be displayed. See Table 175 for message descriptions.

218

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

Revision 12
11/08

Disk Utilities
Set Controller Mode

Set Controller Mode

This lets you change the Controllers operating mode. The current mode is indicated on the bottom right of
the display.
Table 135 Set mode details
Feature

Description

CONTROLLER MODE

Current mode of the controller. See Table 93.

SET CONTROLLER
MODE

RUN: Select this to resume running the process.

OFFLINE: Select this before performing AI calibration.
PROGRAM: Select this:
Before performing AI and AO Calibration.
To turn off all of the controller outputs while reconfiguring a control strategy.

Exiting the Program mode causes a cold start that refreshes the Flash memory of the
controller so that if your battery goes dead the data in Flash is up to date. Use the
Program mode for changes whenever possible.

Table 136 Controller modes defined

Mode

Function Blocks Executed?

Output Status?

Effect upon return to RUN mode?

RUN

Yes

Outputs updated

None

OFFLINE

No

Outputs held

Resume

PROGRAM

No

Outputs off

Cold start

ATTENTION

You cannot change the controller mode from this display if the controllers mode switch is in
the RUN LOCKED or PROGRAM LOCKED position. If the switch is in either of these locked
positions, this display will show the message MODE MUST NOT BE LOCKED OR FAULT.

TIP
If the controller switch is set to RUN but the mode was set to PROGRAM or OFFLINE here,
following a power cycle the mode will return to RUN.
Changing from Program to Run causes data in RAM (setpoint profiles, recipes, schedules,
sequences) to be copied to non-volatile (FLASH) memory.
In a cold start, all data storage and display buffers are cleared and accumulated values of
some function blocks (such as totalizers) are reset.
In a resume, all buffered data and values are retained and the process resumes where it left
off.

Revision 12
11/08

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

219

Disk Utilities
Set Controller Mode

220

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

Revision 12
11/08

Data Storage
Overview
Data Storage lets you store data from the controller on a floppy disk (Models 559 and 1042) or ZIP disk
(model 1042 only). Trends, a point log, alarms, and events are collected in separate files on a disk for later
analysis and review on a PC with SDA data analysis software.
Data storage overall process
PC with:
1. Hybrid Control Designer
2. SDA for analyzing
stored data

Step 1: Configure data storage

Configure Data Storage Sets (.DSS) using
Hybrid Control Designer.
Controller

Step 3: Initialize and begin storage

1. Pre-initialize optional ZIP disk on a PC with
Hybrid Control Designer.
2. Initialize Zip disk or floppy disk in the OI.
3. Process data (trends, point log, alarms, events) is stored to
floppy disk according to Storage Control settings.

Step 2: Transfer configuration from PC to Controller

Transfer Data Storage Sets to Controller by
one of the following methods:
1. Download configuration (which includes .DSS)
from Hybrid Control Designer to Controller.
2. a) Save .DSS file to floppy disk
b) Insert .DSS disk in Operator Interface
c) Load Data Storage Settings from .DSS disk to the Controller.

Step 4: Analyze stored data

1. Remove floppy disk with stored process data.
2. View stored data on PC with Software Data Analysis (SDA)
software.

Honeywell
F1

F2

?
F3

Step 5 (optional): Transfer configuration to another Controller

To transfer Data Storage Settings from one Controller to another:
1. Store .DSS settings to OI floppy disk.
2. Insert this floppy disk into second Controllers OI.
3. Load Data Storage Settings to the second Controller.

F4
ESC

9
6
3
_

ALARM

Operator
Interface
(Model 1042
example)

Note that configuration and analysis are done on a PC and operation is done through the OI.
What can be stored
You can store the following data types:

2 trend groups of up to 12 points each.

Up to 1500 (maximum is user configurable) alarm state changes (on-to-off or off-to-on). State changes
of all points in all alarm groups are stored.

Up to 1500 (maximum is user configurable) event state changes (on-to-off or off-to-on). State changes of
all points designated as events are stored. An event is any digital signal added to the event group. These
can include setpoint profile events and setpoint schedule events as well as any other digital signals added
to the event group.

A Point Log of up to 2000-5000 records (maximum is user configurable) where each record contains
sampled values or states of up to 12 points.

Revision 12
11/08

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

221

Data Storage
Overview

What can not be stored

Setpoint Programs, instrument configurations, recipes, variables, diagnostics, and calibrations are not part
of the Data Storage feature.
Storage capacity [floppy and Zip(1042 only)]
When you are trying to calculate the trend file storage capacity, you must also consider the Point Log file.
The Point Log should be set up so that it will last as long as the trend files; otherwise it may cause a Disk
Full condition long before the trend files are full. Use the following formula to determine the duration of
the Point Log file.
Duration = Record Count x Storage Rate
For example, if the Point Log is configured to hold 2000 records and the storage rate is 1 minute, the Point
Log will become full in 2000 minutes (33 hours).
If the duration of the Point Log does not match the duration of the trend files, adjust the record count and/or
storage of the Point Log as needed.
Storage capacity (floppy disk)
Floppy disk storage capacities for all data types except trends are shown above. Capacity for trends is
inversely proportional to the number of trend points and the storage time interval (that is, the time between
trend samples). That is, the shorter the storage interval and the more points being stored, the sooner the disk
will reach capacity. For example, when storing 2 trend groups of 12 points each at a storage interval of 2
seconds, the floppy disk will be filled in a few hours. Conversely, when storing 1 trend group of 3 points at
a storage interval of 30 minutes, the floppy disk could take several months to be filled.
Calculating storage capacity (floppy disk)
Use the following formula to calculate the disk capacity in hours:
Disk Capacity (hours ) =

Disk Factor * R1
F1 + ( F 2 * ( R1 / R 2)

where
Disk Factor is based on which data types are stored:
398: Trend storage only
394: Trends, Alarms & Events
347: Trends, Alarms & Events, Point Log
R1 = storage rate (in seconds) for Trend 1
R2 = storage rate (in seconds) for Trend 2
F1= point factor for Trend 1. See Table 137.
F2= point factor for Trend 2. See Table 137.
Table 137 Data storage point factors
For this number of points in a trend:
0

10

11

12

26.53

33.60

38.77

45.82

50.40

56.00

63.00

72.00

84.00

84.00

Use this Point Factor:

0

222

14.00

20.16

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

Revision 12
11/08

Data Storage
Overview

Example storage capacity calculation (floppy disk)

Trend 1 = 6 points, rate 30 seconds
Trend 2 = none
Point Log = OFF
Alarms and Events = ON
Calculation:
Disk factor = 394
Point Factor (Trend 1) = 45.82
Point Factor (Trend 2) = 33.60
394 * 30

Disk capacity (hours) =

= 258 hours

45.82 + (0 * (30/0))

Zip drives (On Model 1042 only)

Preinitialize Zip disks on a PC using DSU
If the OI has the optional Zip drive installed, we strongly recommend that you pre-initialize the Zip disks
on a PC using the Data Storage Utility (DSU) - See Table 138. This program is part of the Hybrid Control
Designer package. If you do not pre-initialize your data storage Zip disks using DSU, the initialization
process on the OI may take several hours.
Note that DSU cannot be used for floppy disks.
Capacity of a Zip disk
The following formula can be used to compute the capacity of any trend file on a Zip disk:

Capacity (in hours) =

6560 * R
F

where:
R is the storage rate of the trend, in seconds.
F is the point factor for the trend. See Table 88.
Note that each trend file on a Zip disk is 24MB, so the capacity of each trend file is independent of any
other data storage files on the disk.
Estimated
Zip drive
capacity

Sample Rates

Estimated Zip Drive Capacity Per Trend File

2 Sec.

10 Sec.

30 Sec.

2 Min.

5 Min.

11.9 days

59.5 days

178 days

714 days

1785 days

12

6.5 days

32.5 days

97 days

388 days

970 days

Number of
Trends

Total Number
of Points

1 or 2

Note: On a Zip drive each trend is allocated 24 megabytes

Revision 12
11/08

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

223

Data Storage
Overview

Table 138 Preinitializing ZIP Disk - Model 1042 only

Step

Action

Insert the 100MB/Zip disk into your PC drive.

Start the Hybrid Control Designer Program under Windows

Select the Utilities tab, then select Data Storage Utility. The dialog box appears.

Click on Drive Letter to specify the drive on your PC (A, B, etc.).

Click on Trend Groups to specify the number of Trend Groups that the OI will need
(1 or 2)

Click on Pre-Initialize to prepare the disk for storage. Each trend group takes about four minutes.

Exit DSU.

Remove disk, insert it into the OI, and initialize it. See Initializing Disk under this section entitled
"Data Storage Operation".

Rollover
If a data type is configured for rollover storage, the space allocated for it will fill up then the oldest data
will be replaced with new incoming data (as a circular buffer). For example, if alarm storage is set to
rollover and the alarm file is set up to store 1500 alarms, 1500 alarms will be stored. The 1501st alarm will
replace the oldest alarm, the 1502nd alarm will replace the next oldest alarm, and so on.

224

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

Revision 12
11/08

Data Storage
Overview

Storage modes
Trends, Point Logs, and Alarms/Events can be stored in Continuous or Batch modes. In addition, Point
Logs can be stored in On Command mode. See Table 139.
Table 139 Storage modes
Mode

Description

Continuous

Data is sampled at the storage interval.

Batch

Data is sampled at the storage interval, but also a Batch Enable Signal separates the sampled
data into numbered batches. Batch #1 begins when the Batch Enable Signal turns on, and ends
when the signal turns off. Batch #2 begins when the Batch Enable Signal turns on, and ends
when the signal turns off, etc. No batch mode data is collected while the Batch Enable Signal is
off. The Batch Enable Signal does not affect data being stored as Continuous or On Command.

On Command

Point Log mode only. Point Log data is sampled once when the Point Log storage is enabled,
but not after each storage interval. That is, a snapshot of Point Log data is stored once. This
snapshot is triggered by the off-to-on transition of the Enable Signal for Point Log.

Off

No data is being stored.

Storage intervals
When data storage is enabled, samples are taken at regular intervals known as the storage intervals. These
intervals can be from a few seconds to 30 minutes for trends, or more for Point Log. Each data type has its
own storage interval.
In Continuous and Batch modes, the storage interval determines how often data is sampled and stored. In
these modes for trends and alarms/events, data is first sampled when storage is enabled and again at equally
spaced intervals thereafter. For example, if trend storage is enabled at 2:03 p.m. and the interval is 10
minutes, trend storage occurs at 2:03, 2:13, 2:23, etc. until storage is disabled.
In Continuous and Batch modes for Point Log, data is first sampled after storage is enabled but not until the
programmed Start Time. Data is sampled at equally spaced intervals after the Start Time. For example,
suppose the Start Time is 3:00 p.m. and the storage interval is 10 minutes. If storage is enabled at 2:03
p.m., the first sample will occur at 3:00 and every 10 minutes thereafter. If storage is disabled at 3:35 and
enabled at 3:42, storage will resume at 3:50. Notice that the interval is synchronized to the Start Time.
The storage interval for Point Log can also be once a day or once a month, synchronized to the Start Time.
In On Command mode for Point Log, there is no storage interval or Start Time. A single sample of Point
Log data is taken when the Point Log Enable changes from off (disable) to on (enable).

Revision 12
11/08

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

225

Data Storage
Overview

How storage is controlled

Depending on the data type being stored, there are two or three levels of control for data storage. For
storage of a data type to occur, all levels of control must be enabled. If any level is disabled, that data type
will not be stored. Figure 64 shows the controls that must be enabled for each storage mode and data type.
The left side shows the three data types and their possible storage modes (only one storage mode is in effect
for any data type). For example, trend storage is either batch or continuous, not both. The arrows show the
conditions required for that storage to take place. For example, trend batch storage requires three controls
to be enabled: 1) the Trend Storage Control, 2) the Batch Command Control, and 3) the Data Storage
Control. Notice that the Batch Command Control applies only to those data types in batch storage mode.
Also notice Data Storage Control enables all storage; if it is disabled no storage will occur.

S
T
O
R
A
G
E

Trends
Storage Mode = Batch

Trends
Storage Mode = Continuous

Trend Storage = Enable

(with digital signal or
Storage Control menu)

Point Log
Storage Mode = Batch

Point Log
Storage Mode = Continuous

Point Log
Storage Mode = On Command

I
N
Point Log Storage =
Enable
(with digital signal or
Storage Control menu)

Alarms/Events
Storage Mode = Batch

Alarms/Events
Storage Mode = Continuous
Alarms/Events Storage =
Enable
(with digital signal or
Storage Control menu)

Batch Command =
Enable
(with digital signal or
Storage Control menu)

Data Storage = Enable

(with Storage Control menu)

E
F
F
E
C
T

Figure 64 Required enabled controls for storage

226

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

Revision 12
11/08

Data Storage
Overview

Three levels of control

Data storage enabler
The highest level of control is the Data Storage control item found on the Storage Control menu under Data
Storage (first line in Figure 65). It disables data storage for all trends, alarms, events, and point log. It must
be enabled for any storage to occur.
STORAGE CONTROLS
DATA STORAGE
BATCH COMMAND
TRENDS
POINT LOG
ALARMS/EVENTS

ENABLE
START
ENABLE
ENABLE
ENABLE

Figure 65 Storage control menu with all enablers shown

Data type enabler
The second level of control is the Data Type Enabler. Each data type (trends, point log, and alarms/events)
has its own Enabler that turns storage on and off for that data type. Each of these Enablers can either appear
on the Storage Control menu (third, fourth, and fifth lines in Figure 65) or can be programmed as a digital
signal. For example, if the Trend Enabler is programmed as a digital signal, it will not appear on the
Storage Control menu. In this case, trend storage is enabled when the digital signal turns on and is disabled
when the signal turns off.
The Point Log Enabler functions differently depending on the storage mode. In Continuous and Batch
modes, it enables Point Log storage to begin at the Start Time and at every storage interval thereafter. In On
Command mode, when it changes from off (disable) to on (enable), it causes a single sample of Point Log
data to be stored at that moment (Figure 68).
Batch enabler
The third level of control is the Batch Enabler. It starts and stops storage for all data types configured for
Batch storage; it does not affect Continuous or On Command storage. It appears either on the Data Storage
Control menuas Batch Command (second line of Figure 65)or it is programmed as a digital signal.

Revision 12
11/08

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

227

Data Storage
Overview

Example of trend enabling

In Figure 66, notice that no continuous trend storage occurs unless Trend Enable and Data Storage Enable
are both on (enabled). For batch trend storage, notice that all three enables must be on.

Batch
Command

If enabled
like this:

Trend
Enable

Data Storage
Enable

Then stored
like this:

Trend
Continuous
Batch #1

Batch #2

Batch #3

Trend
Batch

Key:
Time
Disabled

Enabled

Disabled

Figure 66 Trend storage: enable conditions

Example of alarm/event enabling
As with Trends, no continuous alarm/event storage occurs unless Alarm/Event Enable and Data Storage
Enable are both on (enabled). For batch alarm/event storage, all three enables must be on.

Batch
Command

If enabled
like this:

Alarm/Event
Enable
Data Storage
Enable

Then stored
like this:

Alarm/Event
Continuous
Batch #1

Batch #2

Batch #3

Alarm/Event
Batch

Key:
Time
Disabled

Enabled

Disabled

Figure 67 Alarm/event storage: enable conditions

228

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

Revision 12
11/08

Data Storage
Overview

Example of point log enabling

In Figure 68, notice that no continuous Point Log storage occurs unless Point Log Enable and Data Storage
Enable are both on (enabled). For batch Point Log storage, notice that all three enables must be on. Notice
that storage does not actually occur until the Start Time occurs, and then at every Storage Interval
thereafter.
For On Command storage, notice the samples are taken the instant Point Log Enable is enabled but not at
intervals.

Batch
Command

If enabled
like this:

Point Log
Enable

Data Storage
Enable

Point Log
Continuous

Then stored
like this:

Storage starts
here
Batch #1

Point Log
Batch

Single samples

12:00 12:30 1:00

Key:
Enabled

Batch #3

Storage starts
here

Point Log
On Command

Disabled

Batch #2

Disabled

Start
Time

1:30 2:00

2:30

3:00

3:30 4:00

4:30

5:00 5:30

6:00 6:30 7:00

Time
Start Time = 1:15 p.m.
Storage Interval = 30 minutes

Figure 68 Point log storage: enable conditions

How to analyze stored data
With the stored data on a floppy or Zip disk, use SDA on a PC to review the data graphically or in tabular
form. Refer to SDA documentation for details.

Revision 12
11/08

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

229

Data Storage
Data Storage Operation

Data Storage Operation

Access
MAIN MENU

DATA STORAGE

MAY06
11:30

RECIPES
VARIABLES
SP PROGRAMMERS
LOOPS
ALARMS/DIAGS
UNIT SETUP
DISK UTILITIES
DATA STORAGE

VIEW STORAGE STATUS

STORAGE CONTROLS
INITIALIZE STORAGE DISK
LOAD STORAGE SETTINGS
VIEW STORAGE SETTINGS
START NEW STORAGE SETTINGS
STORE STORAGE SETTINGS

Typical data storage tasks

Task

Page

Viewing storage status.

231

Controlling storage (3 methods):

233

Start/stop all storage with DATA STORAGE item on Storage Control

menu.
Start/stop a particular storage files storage (2 ways):

with its external enable discrete, or

with its enabler on the Storage Control menu.
Start/stop all storage batches with Batch menu item or with BATCH

CONTROL discrete.
Initializing a new disk.

234

Loading storage settings from disk to controller.

235

Viewing current storage settings.

236

Starting new storage settings.

237

Storing storage settings from controller to disk.

238

Viewing Status Line storage indicator.

238

Analyzing data stored on disk.

230

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

See SDA manual

(Part #51-52-25-51).

Revision 12
11/08

Data Storage
Data Storage Operation

View storage status

This function shows the remaining disk capacities for each data type along with other storage statuses.
TIP

This display can be configured for access under any Display Group key.

DATA STORAGE STATUS

JAN31
11:30

REMAINING
TREND 1
02 10 15
TREND 2
01 05 20
POINT LOG
ROLL
ALARM SAMPLES
100
EVENT SAMPLES
95
WARNING LEVEL %
90
BATCH NUMBER
0 OFF
SYSTEM: NORMAL
DISK:
NORMAL
ENABLE STORAGE ENABLED

Y
Y
N
Y
Y

Figure 69 View storage status

Table 140 View storage status details
Feature

Description

Indicates that storage is enabled for this data type. See Storage controls
(page 233). See External Enable (Table 142).

Indicates that storage is disabled for this data type. See Storage controls
(page 233). See External Enable (Table 142).

TREND 1 XX XX XX

Days, Hours, Minutes remaining on disk for Trend 1 data

Or

Or

TREND 1 ROLL

Trend 1 is in Rollover, which means when the trend space is full on the
disk, storage will roll over (continue) and will replace the oldest existing
data. No Disk Warning will be given. See WARNING LEVEL %.

TREND 2 XX XX XX

Days, Hours, Minutes remaining on disk for Trend 2 data

Or

Or

TREND 2

POINT LOG

ROLL

XXX

Or
POINT LOG

Revision 12
11/08

Trend 2 is in Rollover, which means when the trend space is full on the
disk, storage will roll over (continue) and will replace the oldest existing
data. No Disk Warning will be given. See WARNING LEVEL %.
Number of point log samples remaining on disk
Or

ROLL

Point Log is in Rollover, which means when the point log space is full on
the disk, storage will roll over (continue) and will replace the oldest existing
data. No Disk Warning will be given. See WARNING LEVEL %.

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

231

Data Storage
Data Storage Operation

Feature

Description

ALARM SAMPLES XXX

Number of alarms remaining on disk

Or

Or

ALARM SAMPLES ROLL

Alarm storage is in Rollover, which means when the alarm space is full on
the disk, storage will roll over (continue) and will replace the oldest existing
data. No Disk Warning will be given. See WARNING LEVEL %.

EVENT SAMPLES

Number of events remaining on disk

XXX

Or

Or

EVENT SAMPLES ROLL

Event storage is in Rollover, which means when the event space is full on
the disk, storage will roll over (continue) and will replace the oldest existing
data. No Disk Warning will be given. See WARNING LEVEL %.

WARNING LEVEL %

When any data type (trend, point log, or alarms/events) reaches this % of
its disk capacity, a disk warning message is displayed.

BATCH NUMBER

Current batch number of all data batches. Zero (0) indicates batch storage
has not started.
Current batch status (ON/OFF) indicates whether batch storage is active.

232

SYSTEM:

Indicates status of data storage system

DISK:

Indicates status of disk

ENABLE STORAGE

Indicates whether all data storage is enabled or disabled. DISABLED

means no storage is occurring, regardless of Y/N status above. See
Storage controls (page 233).

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

Revision 12
11/08

Data Storage
Data Storage Operation

Storage controls
This screen lets you enable and disable part or all of data storage.
STORAGE CONTROLS
DATA STORAGE
BATCH COMMAND
TRENDS
POINT LOG
ALARMS/EVENTS

ENABLE
START
ENABLE
ENABLE
ENABLE

Figure 70 Storage controls

Table 141 Storage controls details
Feature

DATA STORAGE

Description

ENABLE: Select this to enable all of data storage. Must be selected for any
storage to occur.
DISABLE: Select this to disable all of data storage. If disabled, no storage will
occur.

BATCH COMMAND*

START: Select this to start batch storage.

STOP: Select this to stop batch storage.
This affects only batch data; it does not affect continuous or on-command data.
Batch data collected between a start and the following stop is assigned a batch
number. With each selection of START, the batch number increments by 1.

TRENDS*

ENABLE: Select this to enable trend storage.

DISABLE: Select this to disable trend storage. If disabled, no trend storage will
occur.

POINT LOG*

ENABLE: Select this to enable Point Log storage.

DISABLE: Select this to disable Point Log storage. If disabled, no Point Log
storage will occur.

ALARMS/EVENTS*

ENABLE: Select this to enable Alarm/Event storage.

DISABLE: Select this to disable Alarm/Event storage. If disabled, no
Alarm/Event storage will occur.

* Does not appear if programmed as an external enable.

Revision 12
11/08

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

233

Data Storage
Data Storage Operation

Initialize storage disk

Formats the disk for data storage. Use this to continue the current storage settings onto a new disk.
After initializing, a separate file is allocated for each data storage type, using the following filename
extensions.
(Do Not use backslashes \\ or decimal points in file name Use DOS compatible file names)
.LNT = Trend
.LNP = Point Log
.LNA = Alarms
.LNE = Events
DATA STORAGE
VIEW STORAGE STATUS
VIEW STORAGE SETTINGS
STORAGE CONTROLS
WARNING
INITIALIZE STORAGE
DISK
INITIALIZATION
WILL
LOAD STORAGE SETTINGS
ERASE
ALL
EXISTING
STORE STORAGE SETTINGS
DISK FILES AND DATA
PRESS ENTER TO INIT
PRESS ESC TO ABORT

Figure 71 Initialize storage disk

Press Enter to initialize the disk or press Escape to cancel and return to the Data Storage menu.

234

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

Revision 12
11/08

Data Storage
Data Storage Operation

Load storage settings

Select this to load data storage settings from the disk to the controller. Data Storage Setting files have
extension .DSS. Use this function to:

load data storage settings that were stored to disk from another controller.
LOAD STORAGE SETTINGS

FILE
FILE
FILE

01 DSS
02 DSS
03 DSS

Figure 72 Load storage settings

Move cursor to desired file and press Enter. A message then warns you that the load will overwrite the
existing storage settings. To complete the load, press Enter, or to abort it press Escape.
TIP

To begin storage using the loaded settings, select Start New Storage Settings. See Start new
storage settings (page 237).

Revision 12
11/08

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

235

Data Storage
Data Storage Operation

View storage settings

This lets you view (not change) the settingsas configured in the Hybrid Control Designerof trends,
point log, and alarms/events. All these settings comprise the .DSS file, which can be loaded from the disk
to the controller, or stored from the controller to the disk.
Select a data type and press Enter to see the settings for that data type.
TREND 1 STORAGE

DATA STORAGE SETTINGS

TREND 1 STORAGE
TREND 2 STORAGE
POINT LOG STORAGE
ALARM/EVENT STORAGE
BATCH INPUT
STARTUP

ALARM

MESSAGE TEXT

HZ

RUN

STORAGE MODE
EXTERNAL ENABLE
ROLLOVER
FILE NAME
STORAGE INTERVAL
POINT 1
POINT 2
POINT 3
POINT 4
POINT 5
POINT 6
POINT 7
POINT 8
POINT 9
POINT 10
POINT 11
POINT 12
ALARM

MESSAGE TEXT

CONTINUOUS
TAGNAME1
ON
TREND01.LNT
10 SECS
TAGNAME1
TAGNAME2
TAGNAME3
TAGNAME4
TAGNAME5
TAGNAME6
TAGNAME7
TAGNAME8
TAGNAME9
TAGNAM10
TAGNAM11
TAGNAM12
S

HZ

RUN

Figure 73 View storage settings

Table 142 View storage setting details
Feature

STORAGE MODE

Description

CONTINUOUS: data is sampled periodically at the storage interval.

BATCH: data is sampled periodically at the storage interval and is separated
into numbered batches.
ON COMMAND: Point Log data is sampled once only, when the External Enable
switches from off to on or when you change Point Log from Disable to Enable on
the Storage Control menu.

EXTERNAL ENABLE

Name of digital signal that is controlling the storage for the selected data type.
When this digital signal is on, the data types storage is enabled; when off,
disabled.
If NONE, then storage for this data type is controlled through that data types
enabler on the Storage Control menu (Figure 70).

ROLLOVER

When rollover is ON, the data types storage will never fill up the disk but will
continually replace existing disk data with new incoming data. When rollover is
OFF, the disk will eventually fill up with data and will not accept more incoming
data unless a new disk is inserted.

FILE NAME

8 character file name of data being stored to disk. This name is used to identify
the file you want to replace on a PC. The filename extension indicates the type
of data in the file: (Do not use backslashes \\ or decimal points in file name)
.LNT = Trend
.LNP = Point Log
.LNA = Alarms
.LNE = Events

STORAGE
INTERVAL

236

How often data is sampled in continuous or batch modes. Point Log On

Command does not use a storage interval.

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

Revision 12
11/08

Data Storage
Data Storage Operation

Feature

Description

START TIME /
INTERVAL

For Point Log, select this to view the Start Time and Storage Interval.

POINT 1

For all storage except Alarms/Events, up to 12 Points being stored.

POINT 12
RECORD COUNT

The maximum number of records in a Point Log file.

ALARM RECORD
COUNT

The maximum number of records in an Alarm file.

EVENT RECORD
COUNT

The maximum number of records in an Event file.

Start new storage settings

Formats the disk for data storage using the new storage settings. Use this after loading storage settings.
After initializing, a separate file is allocated for each data storage type, using the following filename
extensions.
.LNT = Trend
.LNP = Point Log
.LNA = Alarms
.LNE = Events
DATA STORAGE
VIEW STORAGE STATUS
STORAGE CONTROLS
INITIALIZE STORAGE DISK
WARNING
LOAD STORAGE
SETTINGS
STARTSTORAGE
NEW STORAGE
SETTINGS
STORE
SETTINGS
INITIALIZATION WILL
ERASE ALL EXISTING
DISK FILES AND DATA
PRESS ENTER TO INIT
PRESS ESC TO ABORT

Figure 74 Start new storage settings

Press Enter to initialize the disk or press Escape to cancel and return to the Data Storage menu.

Revision 12
11/08

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

237

Data Storage
Data Storage Operation

Store storage settings

This lets you store the controllers storage settings to disk. You can view the current settings under View
storage settings (Figure 73).
You can store different settings to disk, then load them when needed.
STORE STORAGE SETTINGS
FILE
FILES ON DISK:

FILE 01 DSS
FILE01
DSS
FILE02
DSS
FILE03
DSS
RECORD01 DSS
RECORD02 DSS

Figure 75 Store storage settings

Use the Increment and Decrement keys to select a filename and number for the settings. A .DSS extension
will automatically be added to the filename. Press Enter to proceed with the load.
Status line storage indicator
A storage indicator (S) appears on the status line at the bottom of the display when data storage is active.
When the indicator is not visible, the user can determine why storage is inactive by accessing the Storage
Status display (Figure 69) or the Storage Controls display (Figure 70).

238

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

Revision 12
11/08

Log Off/Log On
Access
Main menu.
Description
Access the Log Off display to

deter unwanted users from interacting with the instrument. If Log Off security is enabled the operator
must enter a security code to log on. See Set Security/Review Security (page 163).

learn the part number and firmware revision number of the OI.
Table 143 Log off display details

Feature

Description

PRESS ENTER TO
LOG ON

Press Enter to return to the process. If security is not enabled, you are returned to the
Display Group 1 keys first display. If security is enabled, you are prompted to enter the
security code before gaining access to the display.

PART #

OI firmware part number.

REV. #

OI firmware revision number.

SUPPORTING TEXT

Custom text from the Startup Display (page 20).

Revision 12
11/08

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

239

Log Off/Log On
Data Storage Operation

240

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

Revision 12
11/08

Other Operating Displays

Overview
The following operating displays are also configured using the Hybrid Control Designer.
Pushbuttons:

See page

Pushbutton Displays

242

4-Selector Switch Display

243

Device Control Display

244

Hand/Off/Auto Switch Display

246

Stage Operate Display

247

Ramp Operate Display

249

Alternator Operate Display

252

Calendar Event Operate Display

256

Other:

They are accessed by pressing the keys below the display. Use Page Up and Page Down to scroll through
up to ten displays assigned to each Display Group key. Your OI may not necessarily have all these
displays configured.

Revision 12
11/08

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

241

Other Operating Displays

Pushbuttons

Pushbuttons
Pushbutton display has four functions. To perform the function description, press the corresponding F1-F4
key located immediately to the right of the display. For example, press F1 to perform the topmost function.
Description
Accessed through any Display Group key (as configured).
Use F1 F4 keys to issue discrete control.
Shows feedback of an associated discrete state or an analog value.
Shows text description of the action performed.
PUSHBUTTONS

TAG45678
STATE1

FUNCTION DESCRIP

TAG45678
12345.6

FUNCTION DESCRIP

TAG45678
1234.56

FUNCTION DESCRIP

TAG45678
STATE2

FUNCTION DESCRIP

ALARM

F1

F2

F3

MESSAGE TEXT

F4
S

HZ

RUN

Figure 76 Pushbutton menu with function keys

Table 144 Pushbutton details
Feature

Description

Tag

Name of the discrete or analog signal.

State/Value

State of the signal (ON/OFF, OPEN/CLOSED, etc.) or current value.

Function

Description of the function. To perform the function, press the

corresponding F1-F4 key located immediately to the right of the display.

242

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

Revision 12
11/08

Other Operating Displays

4-Selector Switch

4-Selector Switch
This display has four functions accessible by the four function keys to the right of the display. Once a
function is selected, you can select one of four possible states for that function. That is, the function acts as
a 4-position rotary switch, with one and only one state in effect at any time.
4 POSITION SWITCHES

FUNCTION DESCRIP1

STATE1
F1

FUNCTION DESCRIP2

STATE2
F2

FUNCTION DESCRIP3

STATE3
F3

FUNCTION DESCRIP4

STATE4
F4

ALARM

MESSAGE TEXT

HZ

RUN

Figure 77 Four selector switch display

Table 145 Four selector switch details
Feature

Description

FUNCTION DESCRP1

Name of the function accessed by F1 key.

STATE1

Current state of F1 function.

FUNCTION DESCRP2

Name of the function accessed by F2 key.

STATE2

Current state of F2 function.

FUNCTION DESCRP3

Name of the function accessed by F3 key.

STATE3

Current state of F3 function.

FUNCTION DESCRP4

Name of the function accessed by F4 key.

STATE4

Current state of F4 function.

To select a function, press the key corresponding to that function. A popup menu appears. See Figure 78.
This popup menu shows the four selectable states for the function you chose. Only one state at a time is
allowed.
4 POSITION SWITCHES

FUNCTION DESCRIP1

STATE1
F1

FUNCTION DESCRIP2

STATE2
F2

FUNCTION DESCR

FUNCTION

STATE A
DESCRIP3
STATE B
STATE C
STATE D

STATE4
F3

FUNCTION DESCRIP4
STATE2
USE ARROW KEYS
TO SELECT
PRESS ENTER TO INITIATE
PRESS ESC TO ABORT
ALARM

MESSAGE TEXT

HZ

F4
RUN

Figure 78 Four selector switch popup menu

Revision 12
11/08

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

243

Other Operating Displays

Device Control

Device Control
This display has four device controls accessible by the four function keys to the right of the display. There
are four device controls per display, for a total of four displays. The order of the device controls can be
changed with the Hybrid Control Designer.
When you select one of the F# keys on the display, the EDIT DEVICE display is opened.
DEVICE CONTROL

DEVTAG1 READY

99999 SECS F1

DEVTAG2 PRESTART

99999 SECS F1

DEVTAG3 STARTING

99999 SECS F1

DEVTAG4 RUNNING

99999 SECS F1

ALARM

MESSAGE TEXT

HZ

RUN

Figure 79 Device control display

Table 146 Device control display details
Feature

Description

DEVTAG#

Block tag name defined during block configuration.

STATE

READY, PRESTART, STARTING, RUNNING, STOPPING, DISABLED, or

FAILED.

99999 SECS

Current Timer value. READ ONLY Counts down to zero.

The Start Delay Timer is active in the Prestart state
The Stop Delay Timer is active in the Stopping state
The Feedback timer is active in the Starting state while the Feedback

input pin is OFF.

The Feedback timer is active in the Running state (if the Feedback

input turned on in the starting state.)

244

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

Revision 12
11/08

Other Operating Displays

Device Control

Change the current delay times

When you press the F# key on the display, the EDIT DEVICE display is opened. You can change the
current delay times for START, STOP, and FEEDBACK FAIL Timers.
EDIT DEVICE
DEVTAG1

READY

START DELAY TIME(SECS)

STOP DELAY TIME (SECS)
FEEDBACK FAIL TIME (SECS)
RESET FAILURE

ALARM

MESSAGE TEXT

99999
99999
99999

HZ

RUN

Figure 80 Edit device display

Table 147 Edit device display details
Feature

Description

DEVTAG1

Tag name defined during block configuration READ ONLY.

READY

Current state of device Located in the lower right corner of the title area
of the display. READY, PRESTART, STARTING, RUNNING, STOPPING,
DISABLED, or FAIL.

START DELAY TIME

Current start delay time in seconds

STOP DELAY TIME

Current stop delay time in seconds

FEEDBACK FAIL TIME

Current feedback fail delay time in seconds

RESET FAILURE

The device may only be reset if it is currently in the failure state, the ERR
(failure) input pin on the function block is OFF, and the Automatic Reset
parameter (configured on the Hybrid Control Designer) is OFF. Otherwise
a warning dialog is displayed explaining the reason why the Device Reset
Request failed. Reasons for ignoring reset request:
a. Failure Input pin is ON.
b. Automatic Reset is enabled.
c. Device is not in Failure state.

TIP

If you select the ESC key, the OI will return to the Device Control Operator display.

Revision 12
11/08

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

245

Other Operating Displays

Hand/Off/Auto Switch

Hand/Off/Auto Switch
This display has four HOA switches accessible by the four function keys to the right of the display. The
order of the HOA switches can be changed using the Hybrid Control Designer.
When you select one of the F# keys on the display, the SET HAND/OFF/AUTO SWITCH display is
opened.
HAND/OFF AUTO SWITCHES

TAG00001
STATE1

HOATAG1
AUTO

F1

TAG00002
STATE4

HOATAG2
BYPASS

F2

TAG00003
STATE2

HOATAG3
HAND

F3

TAG00004
STATE7

HOATAG4
OFF

F4

ALARM

MESSAGE TEXT

HZ

RUN

Figure 81 Hand/Off/Auto switch display

Table 148 Hand/Off/Auto switch display details
Feature

Description

TAGxxxxx

Eight-character tag name of the feedback signal providing the analog

value for the State enumeration.

STATE#

Eight-character State enumeration defined during block configuration.

HOATAG#

Block tag name defined during block configuration READ ONLY.

STATE OF SWITCH

HAND, OFF, AUTO, or BYPASS

Set the HOA switch state

When you press an F# key on the display, the SET HAND/OFF/AUTO SWITCH display is opened. If you
select the ESC key, the OI will return to the HOA Switch Operator display.
Table 149 Set HOA switch state display details
Feature

Description

HOATAG#

Block tag name defined during block configuration.

CURRENT STATE

HAND, OFF, AUTO, or BYPASS (see note)

CHANGE SOURCE

LOCAL, REMOTE, LOCAL/REMOTE

SET STATE

Select OFF, AUTO, or HAND (see note)

Note: If the current state is BYPASS, any requests to change the state
are ignored.

246

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

Revision 12
11/08

Other Operating Displays

Stage

Stage
This display lets you see the operating parameters for the four Stages grouped together in the Stage
function block and edit the following parameters for each Stage:

ON DELAY TIME
OFF DELAY TIME
SP_ON
SP_OFF
INTERLOCK_PREV
INTERLOCK_NEXT
STAGEOP1
PV1
PV2

45.00
400.000
PV

STAGENM1
STAGENM2
STAGENM3
STAGENM4

12:30

1
1,2
1,2
1

INTLK
NEXT
BOTH
PREV
NONE

EU1
EU2

OVRD

REQ

NONE
NONE
NONE
OFF

EDIT STAGE

Figure 82 Stage operator display

Table 150 Stage operator display details
Feature

Description

STAGEOP1

Block tag name configured during block configuration READ ONLY

PV1

PV1 input pin of the function block (pressure)

PV2

PV2 input pin of the function block (flow)

EU1

Engineering units and decimal places defined during block configuration

EU2

Engineering units and decimal places defined during block configuration

STAGENM#

Stage label configured during block configuration READ ONLY

PV

1 = Both PVs are PV1

2 = Both PVs are PV2
1,2 = PV ON = PV1 and PV OFF = PV2
2,1 = PV ON = PV2 and PV OFF = PV1

INTLK

NONE = No Interlocking
NEXT = Interlocked with next stage
PREV = Interlocked with previous stage
BOTH = Interlocked with next and previous stage
ERROR = The configured interlock is incorrect

OVRD

NONE, ON, and OFF Override On [4] input pins and Override Off [4]
input pins of the function block

REQ

Request is ON
{ Request is OFF

Request is OFF and Stage is DISABLED

EDIT STAGE n

When you select EDIT STAGE, an Engineering Security pop-up is

displayed if the SET UNIT security was selected in Hybrid Control
Designer configuration. After the security code is entered the Edit Stage
display will appear.

Revision 12
11/08

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

247

Other Operating Displays

Stage

Edit stage display

This display lets you edit the parameters for the Stage number selected on the sub-menu. If you select the
ESC key, the OI will return to the Stage Operator display.
Table 151 Edit stage display details
Feature

Description

EU1, EU2

Engineering units for PV1 or PV2 display four characters

EDIT STAGE #

Stage selected on Edit Stage sub-menu

ON DELAY TIME

Delay prior to latching the output ON

Range: 0-9999 seconds

OFF DELAY TIME

Delay prior to latching the output OFF

Range: 0-9999 seconds

SP_ON*

Setpoint used with ON comparator No range limit

SP_OFF*

Setpoint used with OFF comparator No range limit

INTERLOCK_PREV

Interlock with previous stage

Select NO or YES

INTERLOCK_NEXT

Interlock with next stage

Select NO or YES

Bold items are read-only.

*The number of decimal places and the engineering units for SP_ON and SP_OFF must match the associated PV
parameters decimal places and engineering units.

248

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

Revision 12
11/08

Other Operating Displays

Ramp

Ramp
This display lets you see the operating parameters for the four Ramps grouped together in the Ramp
function block and edit the following parameters for each Ramp:

LAG TIME

TRANSFER RATES

OUTPUT SCALE HIGH

OUTPUT SCALE LOW

INPUT HIGH LIMIT

INPUT LOW LIMIT

RAMPOPD1
STATUS
INPUT
OUTPUT

ENABLED
45.00
EU1
400.000
EU2
ENABLED

1
2
3
4

RAMPLBL1
RAMPLBL2
RAMPLBL3
RAMPLBL4

12:30

YES
YES
YES
NO

OVERRIDE
OFF
HIGH
HIGH
OFF

EDIT RAMP

Figure 83 Ramp operator display

Table 152 Ramp operator display details
Feature

Description

RAMPOPD1

Block tag name

STATUS

ENABLED or DISABLED (DIS) input pin of function block

INPUT

PV input pin of function block

OUTPUT

Output pin of function block

EU1

Engineering units of the PV defined during block

EU2

Engineering units of the Output defined during block configuration

RAMPLBL#

Label defined during configuration

ENABLED

Enable (YES) or Disable (NO) [4] input pins of function block.

OVERRIDE

OFF, LOW, or HIGH Override [4] input pins

EDIT RAMP

When you select EDIT RAMP, an Engineering Security pop-up is

displayed if the SET UNIT security was selected in Hybrid Control
Designer configuration. After the security code is entered, an Edit Ramp
sub-menu is opened.

Bold items are read-only.

Revision 12
11/08

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

249

Other Operating Displays

Ramp

Edit ramp display

This display opens when you select the EDIT RAMP on the Ramp Operator display. You can select a
Ramp to edit and also change parameters (LAG TIME, TRANSFER RATE UP, TRANSFER RATE
DOWN).
Select ESC to return to Ramp Operator display.
Table 153 Edit ramp sub-menu display details
Feature

Description

EDIT RAMP #

Select EDIT RAMP # to open the Edit Ramp display.

TRNSFR RATE UP (EU)

Transfer rate in engineering units/second when switching to a higher

value (bumpless analog transfer)
Range: 0-99999 EU/second

TRNSFR RATE DN (EU)

Transfer rate in engineering units/second when switching to a lower value

(bumpless analog transfer)
Range: 0-99999 EU/second

LAG TIME (SEC)

Lag Time constant on PV signal

Range: 0.0 seconds to 120.0 seconds

250

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

0 = NO LAG

Revision 12
11/08

Other Operating Displays

Ramp

Edit ramp display

This display lets you edit the parameters for the Ramp number selected on the sub-menu. If you select the
ESC key, the OI will return to the Ramp Operator display.
Table 154 Edit ramp display details
Feature

Description

EDIT RAMP #

Ramp selected on Edit Ramp sub-menu READ ONLY

OUT SCALE HIGH*

High output limit after rescale

Range: Full scale +/

OUT SCALE LOW*

Low output limit after rescale

Range: Full scale +/

IN HIGH LIMIT*

Input high limit value applied to the PV after signal lag

Range: Full scale +/

IN LOW LIMIT*

Input low limit value applied to the PV after signal lag

Range: Full scale +/

*The number of decimal places and the engineering units must match the associated Input and Output parameters
decimal places and engineering units.

Revision 12
11/08

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

251

Other Operating Displays

Alternator

Alternator
This display lets you see the operating parameters for the ALT function block and edit the following
parameters:

Style

On-Delay Time (sec)

Off-Delay Time (sec)

Output selections

Input selections

Output sequence
ALTRNTR1
STATE

STATUS

DEMAND

STYLE

RUN

OK

ROTARY

F1
ADV

OUT
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16

12:30

STATE

STATUS

DEMAND

STYLE

RUN

OK

DIRECT

F1
ADV

IN # 1 - 8
9 - 16

IN # 1 - 8
9 - 16
OUT
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

ALTRNTR1

12:30

DMND OUT DMND OUT

1
0
1
9
2
0
2
10
3
0
3
11
4
0
4
12
5
0
5
13
6
0
6
14
0
0
7
15
0
0
8
16

F2
EDIT

OUT
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

OUT
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16

IN # OUT IN # OUT
2
0
1
9
4
2
10 0
6
3
11 0
1
4
12 0
3
5
13 0
5
6
14 0
0
7
15 0
0
8
16 0

F2
EDIT

Figure 84 Alternator operator displays

252

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

Revision 12
11/08

Other Operating Displays

Alternator

Table 155 Alternator operator display details

Feature

Description

ALTRNTR1

Block tag name READ ONLY

STATE

OFF or RUN READ ONLY

STATUS

OK, DISABLED, or HIGH READ ONLY

DEMAND [DMND]

Input count, between 0 and 16 READ ONLY

STYLE

ROTARY, FOFO, FIXED, or DIRECT READ ONLY

NOTE: If the current style is DIRECT, the OUT number corresponds to the
Input sequence that requests the OUT to turn ON. With any other style,
the OUT number corresponds to the number of INs (DMND) that need to
be ON to turn the OUT on.

IN# (LEDs)

Input is ON
{ Input is OFF

Input selection is disabled

OUT (LEDs)

Output is ON
{ Output is OFF

Output is disabled
No LED The output is not used.

OUTPUT STATUS

Blank Normal operating output (no designation)

DNR Device Not Ready (see Alternator Operator display for example)

OUT [16]

Integer between 0 and 16

0 indicates the output is not in the Output sequence.

F1 (ADV)

Advances the output sequence. (An operator security pop-up will appear if
SPP OP is selected on the OI settings dialog box on the Hybrid Control
Designer.)
If the current style is DIRECT, or the manual advance option was not
selected in the ALT block configuration on the Hybrid Control Designer,
there is no effect when you select F1.

F2 (EDIT)

Revision 12
11/08

Displays the EDIT ALTERNATOR display. See below.

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

253

Other Operating Displays

Alternator

Edit alternator display

This display opens when you select F2 (edit) on the Alternator Operator display. You can choose to edit
output selections, edit input selections, edit output sequence, and also edit the parameters (Style, On delay
time, and Off delay time).
Table 156 Edit alternator display details
Feature

Description

ALTRNTR1

Block tag name READ ONLY

MAKE/BREAK

MAKE (Make before Break) Next output in the sequence is activated

before deactivating an output.
BREAK (Break before Make) The output is removed before advancing
the sequence and activating the next output.
MAKE/BREAK is READ ONLY.

STYLE

Select from ROTARY, FOFO, FIXED, and DIRECT (If different style is
selected, the change will not occur until all outputs are in the OFF state.)

ON DELAY TIME (SEC)

Delay time used before turning ON the next output in the sequence
Range: 0-99999 seconds

OFF DELAY TIME (SEC)

Delay time used before turning OFF the next output in the sequence
Range: 0-99999 seconds

EDIT OUTPUT SELECTIONS

Opens the Edit Output Selections display. At this display the options are:
If selection is NOT USED, you CANNOT change it. Select ENABLED to
turn ON the output pin.
Select ENABLED:

OUT # pin turns ON.

The READY status of the associated DENC Input number is ON.

The associated alternator input number is ON.

Select DISABLED:
OUT # pin turns OFF, regardless of other values.
EDIT INPUT SELECTIONS

Opens the Edit Input Selections display. You can change the Input
Enable parameter by selecting ENABLED or DISABLED.

EDIT OUTPUT SEQUENCE

Opens the Edit Output Sequence display. See Table 157.

254

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

Revision 12
11/08

Other Operating Displays

Alternator

Edit output sequence

This display lets you change the Output Sequence. Examples of reasons to change it include:

If you are having trouble with a motor or pump (e.g., a bearing is going bad) and you want to limit the
amount of time it is used.

If you have 3 motors and one uses more electricity than another, you may want to use two small motors
first before you use the one large motor. This could be handled by changing the sequence.

Taking a pump out of service for maintenance.

Table 157 Edit output sequence display details
Feature

IN #* or DEMAND*

Description

IN # Will appear if Style is DIRECT.

DEMAND Will appear if Style is FIXED.
NOTE: If current style is not FIXED or DIRECT, message EDITS NOT
ALLOWED IN THIS STYLE will appear.

OUT**

To change the OUT sequence, select a value between 1 and 16.

NOTE: A value of 0 cannot be changed.

*If the Style changes to ROTARY or FOFO when using Edit Output Sequence display, message INVALID
STYLE will be displayed instead of IN # or DEMAND.
**If ESC, ALARM, HELP, etc. keys are selected, a display will ask if you want to Save or Cancel the current output
sequence.

Select SAVE: Pop-up message states NEW OUTPUT SEQUENCE BEING WRITTEN TO
CONTROLLER. If write fails, error message is displayed.

Select CANCEL: The EDIT ALTERNATOR display is viewed. No changes are written to controller.

Revision 12
11/08

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

255

Other Operating Displays

Calendar Event Block

Calendar Event Block

Overview
The Calendar Event Block compares user-entered time-and-date setpoints to the real-time clock to generate
digital Event outputs. These Event outputs can be integrated into a control strategy to activate timesynchronized activities. For example, the Event outputs can be used turn-on or turn-off the lights in an
office building. Each Calendar Event block supports up to eight Event outputs.
In addition, the block allows you to configure up to five sets of time-and-date setpoints, called Setpoint
Groups. These Setpoint Groups can be used to activate different sets of time-and-date setpoints to handle
different conditions. Using the example of an office building, Setpoint Groups can be used to activate a
different set of time-and-date setpoints for each season of the year (Spring, Summer, Fall, and Winter).
Each Calendar Event block supports five Setpoint Groups.
The block also allows you to configure up to 16 Special Days. On these Special Days the Calendar Event
Block will override its normal Event processing for a 24-hour period. For example, you can configure
selected Event outputs to remain off on designated holidays.
The OI allows you to perform the following actions with respect to the Calendar Event Block:

Display the current configuration and status of a block via the Calendar Event Block Operator Display
Activate a different Setpoint Group (when the season changes, for example)
Edit the time-and-date setpoint parameters for a selected Event output
Enable, disable, or modify the set-up for the Special Days

Security
The Calendar Event Blocks editing features are protected by the Programmer/Sched./Seq./ Calendar
Operations security group (see Set Security).
If this security group is enabled the Calendar Event Block Operator Display will display a security pop-up
whenever the F1 key is pressed. To access the edit displays you must enter the proper security code on this
pop-up. If the proper security code is entered the OI will display the Calendar Event Block Menu. From
this menu you can access all of the editing features associated with the Calendar Event Block.

256

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

Revision 12
11/08

Other Operating Displays

Calendar Event Operation

Calendar Event Operation

Access
Calendar Event Operator Displays are accessed by the Display Group keys

through

Calendar Event Operator Display

Table 158 Calendar Event Operator Display details

Feature

Description

EVENT NAME

The names assigned to Events 1 through 8. These names are assigned by the
customer via HC Designer.

TYPE

The configured Event Type for Events 1 through 8. The Event Types are described
below:
DISABLE The Event is Disabled
5 - DAY The Event will occur at the same time Monday through Friday.
7 - DAY The Event will occur at the same time every day of the week, Sunday
through Saturday.
DAY OF WEEK The Event will occur once a week at the configured time.
MONTHLY The Event will occur once every month at configured date and time.
YEARLY The Event will occur once a year at the specified date and time.

SETPOINT

This is the currently active time-and-date Setpoint value for Events 1 through 8.

FEEDBACK

The value of the Feedback Signal for Events 1 through 8. The assignment of a
feedback signal is optional. If no feedback signal is assigned this column of the
display will be blank.

F1 - EDIT

Press F1 to view the Calendar Event Block Menu.

F2 - SHOW FEEDBACK

On the OI-559 the Feedback Signals are shown on a separate display.

On the OI-559 press F2 to view the Feedback Signal values for Events 1 through 8.

Bold items are read only.

Note: The TYPE and SETPOINT columns show the values associated with the currently active Setpoint Group. The
information in these columns will automatically change if a different Setpoint Group is activated (see Table 163, Set
Active Setpoint Group).

Revision 12
11/08

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

257

Other Operating Displays

Calendar Event Operation

Calendar Event Block Menu

This is the top-level menu for the Calendar Event Block. From here you can access the menus that will
allow you to edit Event Setpoints, select the active Setpoint Group, and view or edit Special Days.
Table 159 Calendar Event Block Menu details
Feature

Description

Displays the menu SELECT GROUP FOR EDITING (see Table 160).

EDIT EVENT SETPOINTS

Select this item to locate and edit the Setpoint information for a selected
Event.
SET ACTIVE SETPOINT GROUP

Displays the menu SET ACTIVE SETPOINT GROUP (see Table 163).

EDIT SPECIAL DAYS

Displays the menu EDIT SPECIAL DAYS (see Table 164).

Select this item to activate a different Setpoint Group.

Select this item to locate and edit one of the 16 Special Days.
VIEW SPECIAL DAYS EVENT
SETUP

Displays the menu VIEW SPECIAL DAYS EVENT SETUP (see Table
166).
Select this item to see how the Events will behave when a Special Day
occurs.

SELECT GROUP FOR EDITING menu

This menu allows you to select one of the five Event Setpoint Groups for editing.
Note: SETPOINT 1, SETPOINT 2, etc. are the default names for the Setpoint Groups. These names
can be modified by the customer, so the names shown on your OI may differ from the ones shown in the
table below.
Table 160 SELECT GROUP FOR EDITING menu details
Feature

Description

ACTIVE* > 1

SETPOINT 1

Displays the EDIT EVENT SETPOINTS menu for Setpoint Group 1 (see Table
161).

SETPOINT 2

Displays the EDIT EVENT SETPOINTS menu for Setpoint Group 2.

SETPOINT 3

Displays the EDIT EVENT SETPOINTS menu for Setpoint Group 3.

SETPOINT 4

Displays the EDIT EVENT SETPOINTS menu for Setpoint Group 4.

SETPOINT 5

Displays the EDIT EVENT SETPOINTS menu for Setpoint Group 5.

* The word ACTIVE > is displayed beside the currently active Setpoint Group. The setpoint values for
the currently active Setpoint Group are always shown on the Operator Display.

258

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

Revision 12
11/08

Other Operating Displays

Calendar Event Operation

EDIT EVENT SETPOINTS menu

This menu allows you to select one of the eight Setpoints within the selected Setpoint Group for editing.
Note: EVENT 1, EVENT 2, etc. are the default names for the Events. These names can be modified
by the customer, so the names shown on your OI may differ from the ones shown in the table below.

Table 161 EDIT EVENT SETPOINTS menu details

Feature

EVENT 1

Description

Displays the EDIT EVENT SETPOINT menu for Event 1 (see Table 162).

2 EVENT 2

Displays the EDIT EVENT SETPOINT menu for Event 2

EVENT 3

Displays the EDIT EVENT SETPOINT menu for Event 3

EVENT 4

Displays the EDIT EVENT SETPOINT menu for Event 4

EVENT 5

Displays the EDIT EVENT SETPOINT menu for Event 5

EVENT 6

Displays the EDIT EVENT SETPOINT menu for Event 6

EVENT 7

Displays the EDIT EVENT SETPOINT menu for Event 7

EVENT 8

Displays the EDIT EVENT SETPOINT menu for Event 8

Revision 12
11/08

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

259

Other Operating Displays

Calendar Event Operation

EDIT EVENT SETPOINT menu

This display allows you to edit the parameters for the selected Event.
Table 162 EDIT EVENT SETPOINT display details
Feature
EVENT TYPE

Description

This is the configured Event Type for the selected Event.

DISABLE The Event is Disabled
5 - DAY The Event will occur at the same time Monday through Friday.
7 - DAY The Event will occur at the same time every day of the week, Sunday
through Saturday.
DAY OF WEEK The Event will occur once a week at the configured time.
MONTHLY The Event will occur once every month at configured date and time.
YEARLY The Event will occur once a year at the specified date and time.

HOURS

Select a value between 0 and 23. This menu item will not appear if the configured
Event Type is DISABLE.

MINUTES

Select a value between 0 and 59. This menu item will not appear if the configured
Event Type is DISABLE.

MONTH

Select a Month of the Year. This menu item will only appear when the configured
Event Type is MONTHLY.

DAY *

This menu item will only appear when the configured Event Type is MONTHLY,
YEARLY, or DAY OF WEEK.
When Event Type = YEARLY or MONTHLY, Select a value between 1 and 31.
When Event Type = DAY OF WEEK, select a value between Sunday and
Saturday.

Bold items are read only.

* When Event Type = MONTHLY, entering a value of 31 means the last day of the month, even for
months with less than 31 days.

260

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

Revision 12
11/08

Other Operating Displays

Calendar Event Operation

SET ACTIVE SETPOINT GROUP menu

This menu allows you to set one of the five Event Setpoint Groups as the currently active group.
Note: SETPOINT 1, SETPOINT 2, etc. are the default names for the Setpoint Groups. These names
can be modified by the customer, so the names shown on your OI may differ from the ones shown above.
Table 163 SET ACTIVE SETPOINT GROUP menu details
Feature

Description

ACTIVE* > 1

SETPOINT 1

Setpoint Group 1

SETPOINT 2

Setpoint Group 2

SETPOINT 3

Setpoint Group 3

SETPOINT 4

Setpoint Group 4

SETPOINT 5

Setpoint Group 5

ACTIVATE GROUP

Select and enter a value 1 through 5 to activate the corresponding

Setpoint Group, 1 through 5.
Note that the ACTIVE> indicator will automatically move to the newly
selected Setpoint Group when press the Enter key.

Bold items are read only.

* The word ACTIVE > is displayed beside the currently active Setpoint Group. The setpoint values for
the currently active Setpoint Group are always shown on the Operator Display.

Revision 12
11/08

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

261

Other Operating Displays

Calendar Event Operation

EDIT SPECIAL DAYS menu

This menu allows you to select one of the 16 Special Days for editing. It also shows you the current setting
for each Special Day (Month and Day). Note that the word OFF will be displayed in place of the Month
and Day when the Special Day is disabled.
On the OI-559 this menu is divided into two menus, due to display size limitations.
Table 164 EDIT SPECIAL DAYS menu details
Feature

SPECIAL DAY 1

Description

Displays the EDIT SPECIAL DAY menu for Special Day 1 (see Table
165).

2 SPECIAL DAY 2

Displays the EDIT SPECIAL DAY menu for Special Day 2

SPECIAL DAY 3

Displays the EDIT SPECIAL DAY menu for Special Day 3

SPECIAL DAY 4

Displays the EDIT SPECIAL DAY menu for Special Day 4

SPECIAL DAY 5

Displays the EDIT SPECIAL DAY menu for Special Day 5

SPECIAL DAY 6

Displays the EDIT SPECIAL DAY menu for Special Day 6

SPECIAL DAY 7

Displays the EDIT SPECIAL DAY menu for Special Day 7

SPECIAL DAY 8

Displays the EDIT SPECIAL DAY menu for Special Day 8

SPECIAL DAY 9

Displays the EDIT SPECIAL DAY menu for Special Day 9

10

SPECIAL DAY 10

Displays the EDIT SPECIAL DAY menu for Special Day 10

11

SPECIAL DAY 11

Displays the EDIT SPECIAL DAY menu for Special Day 11

12

SPECIAL DAY 12

Displays the EDIT SPECIAL DAY menu for Special Day 12

13

SPECIAL DAY 13

Displays the EDIT SPECIAL DAY menu for Special Day 13

14

SPECIAL DAY 14

Displays the EDIT SPECIAL DAY menu for Special Day 14

15

SPECIAL DAY 15

Displays the EDIT SPECIAL DAY menu for Special Day 15

16

SPECIAL DAY 16

Displays the EDIT SPECIAL DAY menu for Special Day 16

EDIT SPECIAL DAY S 1-8

Select this item to display the menu for SPECIAL DAYS 1 through 8.
This menu item only appears on the OI-559.

EDIT SPECIAL DAY S 9-16

Select this item to display the menu for SPECIAL DAYS 9 through 16.
This menu item only appears on the OI-559.

262

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

Revision 12
11/08

Other Operating Displays

Calendar Event Operation

EDIT SPECIAL DAY menu

This menu allows you to edit the MONTH and DAY for the selected Special Day.
Table 165 EDIT SPECIAL DAY menu details
Feature

Description

MONTH

Select a Month of the Year (or a value of OFF to disable the Special Day).

DAY

Select a value between 1 and 31 (or a value of OFF to disable the Special
Day).

Note: If either the MONTH or the DAY has a value of OFF, the Special Day is disabled. Both the
MONTH and the DAY must be set to a legal value to activate a Special Day.

VIEW SPECIAL DAYS EVENT SETUP display

The Calendar Event Block can be configured to override its normal Event processing when any of the 16
Special Days occurs. This override will remain in effect for the 24-hour period associated with the Special
Day. This feature can be used to force selected Event outputs to remain off on designated holidays, for
example.
The choices for the override are described below:
Special Day Mode

Event output behavior

DISABLE OUTPUT

The Event output is disabled on Special Days (for the entire

24 hour period).

USE ALTERNATE SETPOINT

On Special Days, the Event output will trigger at the

Alternate Setpoint Time shown on this display.

NORMAL

The behavior of the Event output is not overridden on

Special Days. The Event output will trigger the way it
normally triggers, based on the configuration of the
currently active Setpoint Group.

This display allows you to see how the eight Event outputs will behave when a Special Day occurs.
Table 166 VIEW SPECIAL DAYS EVENT SETUP display details
Feature

Description

EVENT NAME

Name of Events 1 through 8

OUTPUT HANDLING

This title is displayed when the Special Day Mode is configured as Disable
Outputs.

SETPOINT HANDLING

This title is displayed when the Special Day Mode is configured as Use
Alternate Event Times

ALTERNATE SETPOINT

Displays the Alternate Setpoint Times (Hours:Minutes). This information will

only appear if the Special Day Mode is configured as Use Alternate Event
Times.

Revision 12
11/08

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

263

Other Operating Displays

Calendar Event Operation

Feature

Description

EVENT 1

The Special Day Mode for Event 1

EVENT 2

The Special Day Mode for Event 2

EVENT 3

The Special Day Mode for Event 3

EVENT 4

The Special Day Mode for Event 4

EVENT 5

The Special Day Mode for Event 5

EVENT 6

The Special Day Mode for Event 6

EVENT 7

The Special Day Mode for Event 7

EVENT 8

The Special Day Mode for Event 8

Bold items are read only.

264

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

Revision 12
11/08

Monitoring Displays
Overview
Monitoring displays are configured using the Hybrid Control Designer.
1

through 5 [ 8 ] below the display. Use Page Up and Page Down to

They are accessed by pressing
scroll through up to ten displays assigned to each Display Group key. Your OI may not necessarily have
all these displays configured.
You can monitor but not change any data on these displays except for variables on an overview display.
See also
While viewing these displays, messages may be displayed. See Table 175 for message descriptions.
Whats in this section
Topic

Trend Displays:

Page

266

Horizontal Trend
Vertical Trend
Vertical Trend w/ Horizontal Bars
Horizontal Trend w/ Digital
Horizontal Trend w/ Bar Graphs
Bar Graph Displays:

270

6 Point Horizontal
6 Point Vertical
3 Point Horizontal
3 Point Vertical
Panel Displays:

271

Single Point Panel

4-Point Panel
Multi Point Panel
Overview
Other Displays:

275

Help

Revision 12
11/08

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

265

Monitoring Displays
Trend Displays

Trend Displays
Each of the trend displays shows up to 6 points as trends. The text changes at regular intervals to describe
the name, current value, limits, and engineering units of the corresponding trend. The color of the text
matches the color of the trend: yellow text describes the yellow trend, green text describes the green trend,
and so on for each of the six trends.
AI2

2200.00

FURNACE TEMPERATURE
AI2

DEGF
2500.0

11:18

DEC08
12:18
2200.00 DEGF
11:30

10:30

TREND1
2000.00

10:20

TREND2
1934.00

10:10

TREND3
1566.00

10:00

TREND4
1366.00

9:50

TREND5
1254.00

1500.0

TREND6
1521.00
0

ALARM

MESSAGE TEXT

HZ

RUN

ALARM

Horizontal Trend

HZ

RUN

Horizontal Trend w/ Digital

FURNACE TEMPERATURE
AI2
11:18

MESSAGE TEXT

DEC08
12:18
2200.00 DEGF

AI2

2200.00

DEGF

1500.0

2500.0

11:30

10:30
10:20
10:10
10:00
9:50
0
ALARM

MESSAGE TEXT

HZ

RUN

Horizontal Trend w/ Bars

AI2

2200.00

ALARM

MESSAGE TEXT

HZ

RUN

Vertical Trend w/ Bars

DEGF

1500.0

2500.0

10:30
10:20
10:10
10:00
9:50

ALARM

MESSAG E TEXT

HZ

RUN

Vertical Trend

Figure 85 Trend displays

266

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

Revision 12
11/08

Monitoring Displays
Trend Displays

Table 167 Example of trend details

Feature

Description

AI2

Name of one of 6 points displayed.

2200.00

The current value of the point.

DEGF

Engineering units of the point.

1500.0

Lower display limit of the point.

2500.0

Upper display limit of the point.

09:40, 09:50, etc.

Time stamps.

Colored Arrow

Positioned at the current value of the point.

Vertical and Horizontal Bar

Graphs*

Color of the bar will match the color of the trend line, pointer, and live
value.

POINT1POINT6**

Shows the value of each trend in matching color.

* Horizontal or Vertical Trend with Bar Graph only

** Horizontal Trend with Digital only
TIP

Press Detail to display a menu with advanced features. See Trend menu.

Log Scale Trending

The Hybrid Control Designer lets you configure a signal tag to be displayed in exponential notation. When
E-notation is active, values will be displayed in exponential notation; for example, 2500 will be displayed
as 2.5E3. When you select a signal tag with E-notation as the first signal tag when configuring a Trend
group, the OI will display the Trend in Log Scale format.

Revision 12
11/08

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

267

Monitoring Displays
Trend Displays

Trend menu
From any trend display, press Detail to display the following menu.
Table 168 Trend menu
Prompt

Description

SCROLL

Press Increment or Decrement to scroll the trend forward or backward in time. Press Detail to
change to the next point on a multi-point trend. Amount of scrollable data is inversely proportional
to the number of trend groups and points; that is, the more trend points that are configured, the
less data that can be scrolled to.
Press Escape to restore the Trend menu. The trend display will remain at the time determined by
the SCROLL.
Press Escape to restore the original trend display and cancel the SCROLL.

SET HOLD,

Causes one point to remain displayed in the scoreboard. Available for live trend only.
Before selecting SET HOLD, press Detail to change the scoreboard to the desired point. Select
SET HOLD and press Enter. An H appears in the lower right display. The HOLD will remain in
effect until deliberately removed with REL HOLD.
To HOLD a different point, press Detail until the desired point is shown, then press Escape.
To release the HOLD, select REL HOLD.

REL HOLD

DETAIL

Use the Increment and Decrement keys to move the line cursor forward or backward in time. The
value of the displayed point will change to its value at the new time.
If desired, press Detail to change to the next point on a multi-point trend.
Press Escape to restore the menu. The trend display will remain at the chosen point.
Press Escape to restore the trend display and to cancel DETAIL.

ZOOM

Lets you magnify (zoom) the displayed scale.

Press Increment and Decrement to select the amount of magnification, shown in the lower right
corner of the display. Note that the size of the Zoom cursor changes accordingly. See Figure 86.
OFF uses points programmed limits (turns Zoom off)
2X uses half of points programmed limits
4X uses one fourth of points programmed limits.
For example, assume the currently selected point has limits of 0 and 1000 degrees F and its
current value is 500. If you select a zoom of 2X, the point will be displayed with limits of 250 and
750 degrees F.
Note that zooming in on a screen with a wide time span may cause the trend to appear jagged due
to the slow sampling rate for wide screens. See Table 169.
Press Detail to select the point/trace to be zoomed (magnified).
Press Enter to display the magnified trend. The popup menu is displayed to allow further analysis.
Press Escape to restore the trend display with the ZOOM limits. A Z appears in the lower right of
the display.

Alternate method of scrolling

A trend can be also be scrolled by pressing Increment and Decrement without pressing Detail. While in
scroll mode, press Escape once to see the trend menu, or press Escape twice to return the live screen.

268

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

Revision 12
11/08

Monitoring Displays
Trend Displays

Sampling rates of trends

The longer the time span of a trend display, the less often the points are sampled.
Table 169 Sampling rates of trends
Time span of screen

Rate at which points are

sampled

30 minutes

6 seconds

1 hour

12 seconds

2 hours

24 seconds

4 hours

48 seconds

8 hours

96 seconds

24 hours

288 seconds

Example of trend zoom

TEMP7
1500.0

1941.5

DEGF
2500.0

Zoom cursor

12:15

11:45

Amount of
magnification

11:15

ALM

2X
Z RUN
Figure 86 Vertical trend at 2X zoom

Revision 12
11/08

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

269

Monitoring Displays
Bar Graph Displays

Bar Graph Displays

These displays show 3 or 6 points in a vertical or horizontal bar graph format. The 6 bar displays
periodically rotate through the name and value of each point.
TEMP 1

TEMP 2

TEMP 3

2500.0

2500.0

2500.0

TEMP 1
1234.50 DEGF
1000.0

2500.0

TEMP 2
1234.50 DEGF
1000.0

1000.0

1000.0

1000.0

1234.50
DEGF

1234.50
DEGF

1234.50
DEGF

ALARM

MESSAGE TEXT

HZ

RUN

TEMP 3
1234.50 DEGF
1000.0
ALARM

2500.0

1234.50
DEGF
1500.0
1234.50
DEGF
1500.0

ALARM

1000.0
1234.5
DEGF
TEMP2

1000.0
1234.5
DEGF
TEMP3

MESSAGE TEXT

1000.0
1234.5
DEGF
TEMP4

RUN

2500.0

1234.50
DEGF
1500.0
1234.50
DEGF
1500.0

1000.0
1234.5
DEGF
TEMP1

HZ

TEMP 1
1234.50 DEGF

2500.0

2500.0

3 point horizontal bar graph

TEMP1 1234.50 DEGF

2500.0

2500.0

MESSAGE TEXT

3 point vertical bar graph

2500.0

2500.0

1000.0
1234.5
DEGF
TEMP5
S

HZ

1234.50
DEGF
1500.0
1234.50
DEGF
1500.0

1000.0
1234.5
DEGF
TEMP6
RUN

ALARM

MESSAGE TEXT

6 point vertical bar graph

TEMP1

2500.0

TEMP2

2500.0

TEMP3

2500.0

TEMP4

2500.0

TEMP5

2500.0
2500.0

TEMP6
S

HZ

RUN

6 point horizontal bar graph

Figure 87 Bar graph displays

Table 170 Bar graph display details

Feature

270

Description

TEMP n

Name of the displayed point.

1234.50

The current value of the point.

DEGF

Engineering units of the point.

1000.0

Lower display limit of the point.

2500.0

Upper display limit of the point.

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

Revision 12
11/08

Monitoring Displays
Panel Displays

Panel Displays
Single point rotating panel
This display is readable from a distance of approximately 30 (8 meters). Every 5 seconds it rotates to
another point, up to 12 points.
TAGNAME

TAGNAME
1500.0
DEGF
Figure 88 Panel display
Interacting with panel display
Stopping panel display rotation on a single point
Step

Action

Result

Press Detail

Displays menu item SET HOLD at the lower right hand corner of the
display.

Press Detail

Displays the desired point.

Press Enter

Holds display on desired point. An H appears in the lower right of

the display.

Resuming panel display rotation through all points

Step

Revision 12
11/08

Action

Result

Press Detail

Displays menu item REL HOLD at the lower right hand corner of the
display.

Press Enter

The H disappears and rotation resumes.

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

271

Monitoring Displays
Panel Displays

4-point panel
This display shows the status and values for four analog and digital points in a panel format. The display is
view only. A digital points ON state is indicated On by a yellow dot. No dot indicates OFF state.
4-POINT PANEL TITLE

INTRUSN
ON

ZONE 1
205.00
DEGF

TEMP 2
134.4
DEGC

ZONE 2
456.2
DEGF

Figure 89 4-point panel display

Table 171 4-point panel details
Feature

272

Description

TAGNAMEn

Name of the displayed point.

Value or State

The current value or state of the point.

EU

Engineering units of the point.

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

Revision 12
11/08

Monitoring Displays
Panel Displays

Multi-point panel
This display contains 3 large points for distance viewing, and 4 smaller points for close-up viewing. The
display is VIEW only.
PANEL GROUP 1
TAGNAME1
TAGNAME2
TAGNAME3

2205.0
2000.0
ON

TAGNAME4
TAGNAME5
TAGNAME6
TAGNAME7

DEGF
DEGF

205.0 DEGF
OFF
83.5 DEGF
ON

Figure 90 Multi-point panel display

Table 172 Multi-point panel details
Feature

Description

TAGNAMEn

Name of the displayed point.

Value or State

The current value or state of the point.

EU

Engineering units of the point.

Panel meter
Displays status and value of twelve analog and digital points in a panel format. This display is view-only.
A digital points ON state is indicated ON by a yellow dot; no dot indicates OFF state.
MY PANEL METER

TAG-0001

TAG-0002
12345.67
DEGF

STATE1

TAG-0004
12345.67
DEGF

TAG-0005

TAG-0003
STATE2

TAG-0006

STATE2

12345.67
DEGF

TAG-0007

TAG-0008

TAG-0009

STATE2

STATE1

STATE1

TAG-0010

TAG-0011

TAG-0012

12345.67
PSI

12345.67
DEGC

12345.67
DEGF

ALARM

MESSAGE TEXT

HZ

RUN

Figure 91 Panel meter

Revision 12
11/08

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

273

Monitoring Displays
Panel Displays

Overview
Displays value and status of up to twelve analog and digital signals and variables in a list format. The
variables in an overview group can be edited.
OVERVIEW GROUP 1
TAGNAME1
TAGNAME2
TAGNAME3
TAGNAME4
TAGNAME5
TAGNAME6
TAGNAME7
TAGNAME8
TAGNAME9
TAGNAME10
TAGNAME11
TAGNAME12

11:30

0.00 DEGF
1000.00 DEGF
0.00 DEGF
ON
OFF
0.00 DEGF
0.00 DEGF
0.00 DEGF
0.00 DEGF
0.00 DEGF
0.00 DEGF
0.00 DEGF

Figure 92 Overview
Description
A signal tag is an identifier connected to a digital or analog output pin of a function block. It is read-only
on this display.
A variable tag is a digital or analog object connection to an input pin of a function block. It can be edited on
this display.
Table 173 Overview details
Feature

Description

TAG NAME n

Name of variable or signal.

Value or state

Current value or state of the variable or signal. Press Enter to edit a variable. A
popup window shows the tag name and value or state. You can change an
analog variable to any value within its configured limits, and a digital variable to
its ON or OFF state. Press Enter to keep the changes or press Escape to cancel
the changes.

TIP

If you enter a new value or state for a variable that is not accepted, the variable might be
getting its value or state from another source, namely, a Recipe Load function block within the
controllers configuration. Consider reconfiguring the controller.

274

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

Revision 12
11/08

Monitoring Displays
Other Monitoring Displays

Other Monitoring Displays

Help
Up to 10 pages of custom help messages may be accessed under the Help key. These displays may also be
configured for access by the Display Group keys.
MESSAGES
PAGE 1
START-UP NOTES:
USE RECIPE #1 AFTER SHUTDOWN.
CHANGE SETPT TO 450.
SHUT OFF PUMP#1.
TURN ON WATER VALVE.
RESET LIMIT CONTROL.
VERIFY WATER LEVEL ON TANK#1.

Figure 93 Help (messages) display

Revision 12
11/08

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

275

Monitoring Displays
Other Monitoring Displays

276

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

Revision 12
11/08

Maintenance
EXPLOSION HAZARD
Substitution of components may impair suitability for Class I, Division 2.
Replace parts with appropriate Honeywell parts only. Failure to do so may result in
explosion causing death or serious injury.

Overview
See Unit Setup (page 159) for common maintenance tasks.
See Parts below for hardware replacement.

Parts
The following parts may be ordered. To order, see the contact information in the front of this manual.

Table 174 Parts

Description

Revision 12
11/08

Part Number

Model

Firmware upgrade kit Floppy Disk

51451629-501

1042

Firmware upgrade kit Zip Disk

51451630-501

1042

Replacement display lamp

51451584-501

1042

Zip Disk Drive Kit

51451948-501

1042

Keypad

51500678-501

1042

Display

51404764-501

1042

RS485 communications cable (50 ft.)

51452101-050

All OIs

Terminal Board Assembly

51404600-501

All OIs

Disk Drive Kit

51404557-501

All OIs

Replacement display lamp

51404610-501

559 common

Cable Kit

51404797-501

559 common

Inverter Board

51404597-501

559 common

Mounting Kit

51404524-501

559-T12

Keypad

51404493-501

559-T12

Operator Interface Cover (Type 4)

51500452-501

559-T12

Bezel and Case

51404551-501

559-T12

Mounting Kit

51451322-501

559-T4

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

277

Maintenance
Parts

Description

278

Part Number

Model

Keypad

51451320-501

559-T4

Panel Gasket

51451315-501

559-T4

Keyboard Connector Kit

51404533-501

559-T4

LCD Color Display with Backlight

51404528-501

559-T4

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

Revision 12
11/08

Messages
Overview
The OI displays messages that guide, advise, and warn the operator.
Table 175 shows all messages, the function in which the message appears, and a description along with any
recommended action.
Table 175 Messages
Message

Function

Description/Action Recommended

FORMATTING DISK

Format Disk

Disk formatting is in progress.

INITIALIZING DISK

Data Storage disk

initialization

The function is in progress.

TEST IN PROGRSS

Disk Read/Write
Self-Test

The test is in progress.

AED REPORT FAIL

Status line

ALARM / EVENT LOST

Status line

1.

Cycle OI power off and on.

2.

Do an Operator Cold Start (page 20).

3.

Reload configuration.

4.

If message recurs, replace CPU.

The message will appear if the controller's internal

alarm or event buffer overflows before the OI has a
chance to upload this information.
Make sure that the OI is powered on and is
communicating correctly with the controller.

BAD STORAGE SETUP

Data storage disk

initialize

Initialization failed because there are no active data

storage groups. This will occur if the storage mode for
ALL of the data storage groups (Trend, Point Log,
Alarms, and Events) is set to Off. Note that if a Trend
or Point Log group has no Signal Tags defined, the
storage mode is Off by default when initialization
occurs.
Correct the Data Storage Setup and reinitialize.

BEGINNING OF BUFFER

Scrolling Trends

The beginning of the trend data buffer was reached

BEZEL OPEN

Status line

The door on the Oi that protects the disk drive is

currently open. Data will not be read from or written to
the disk while this door is open.

CHECKING DISK

Status line

The OI is currently validating the disk that was just

inserted.

CONTROLLER DIAG

Status line

The controller file has posted a diagnostic. Access

Controller Diagnostic display (page 142).

Revision 12
11/08

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

279

Messages
Overview

Message

Function

Description/Action Recommended

CONTROLLER DOES NOT

ACCEPT EDITS IN CURRENT
STATE/MODE

Edit Program
Edit Segment
Edit Segment
Events
Edit Schedule
Edit Sequence

DB ALLOC ERROR

Status line and

Panel Diagnostic
Log

1. Do an Operator Cold Start as described on page 20

Status line and

Panel Diagnostic
Log

1. Do an Operator Cold Start as described on page 20

DB RECORD ERROR

The controller will not accept edits to a

program/segment/events/schedule/sequence with the
associated programmer/scheduler/sequencer in its
current state.

2. Call the OI vendor for assistance.

2. Verify that the firmware versions of the OI and the

controller are compatible

3. Call the OI vendor for assistance

DB VERIFY ERROR

Status line and

Panel Diagnostic
Log

1. Do an Operator Cold Start as described on page 20

2. Verify that the firmware versions of the OI and the
controller are compatible

3. Verify that there are no loose wires in the cable that

connects the OI and the controller

4. Call the OI vendor for assistance

If the OI reports this diagnostic, the following conditions
may also be present:

1. The alarm help message on the alarm detail display

will show "?????" if help text was set for that alarm

2. The 16-character signal descriptor will default to the

8-character signal tag

3. OI security is turned off

4. The parameter "Frequency" will show a value of
"Error" on the controller status display.
DEVICE ERROR

Any disk operation

Unformatted or defective disk. Use a new, formatted

disk and retry the operation. If the error persists, the
cause is possibly faulty disk drive or disk drive interface.

DEVICE NEVER INITIALIZED

Data Storage
Initialization

Use the service "Start New Storage Settings" to initialize

the disk instead of using "Initialize Storage Disk".

DISK ERROR

Status line

Unformatted or defective disk. Use a new, formatted

disk and retry the operation. If the error persists, the
cause is possibly faulty disk drive or disk drive interface.

DISK ERROR

Status line

An error was encountered accessing the disk. The disk

may be bad or the interface to the disk drive is not
functional.

280

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

Revision 12
11/08

Messages
Overview

Message

Function

DISK FULL

Data Storage

DISK FULL

Store to disk:

Description/Action Recommended

No more space is available on one or more of the files

on the disk for storage of data as programmed. This
message will appear only if at least one partition on the
disk is programmed for non-rollover operation. The
message will disappear when a new disk is initialized,
or if data storage is disabled (turned off).
Maximum 224 files per disk. Use another disk.

Config
Store recipe
Store profile
Store schedule
Store sequence
DISK MISSING

Status line

Data storage is enabled, but no disk is installed in the

disk drive.

DISK WARNING

Status line

Floppy disk is not full but available space on one or

more disk files has reached the programmed warning
limit. The message will disappear when a new disk is
initialized, or if data storage is disabled (turned off).

DS INIT FAILED

Status line

Initialization failed. Possible reasons: disk has not been

formatted, is write-protected, or is defective.

DS STATUS LOST

Status line

1.

Check for bad floppy disk.

2.

Run disk diagnostic on the disk drive.

3.

Check seating of floppy cables.

4.

Replace CPU.

DSK NOT CURRENT

Status line

When a disk is initialized the OI marks it as the current

disk. The instrument will only store data to the current
disk. If any other disk is placed in the drive this
message will appear. The message will disappear when
the current disk is inserted or a new disk is initialized.

END OF BUFFER

Scrolling Trends

The end of the trend data buffer was reached

ERROR EDITS NOT SAVED

Edit Recipe

A write transaction to the controller failed.

Edit Program
ERROR READ FAILED

Edit Recipe

A read transaction to the controller failed.

Edit Program
FILE DATA ERROR

Any disk operation

The requested disk operation failed because:

The disk has not been formatted. Format the disk and
retry the operation.
The disk is defective. Use a new, formatted disk and
retry the operation.

FILE DATA ERROR

Revision 12
11/08

Format Disk

If the floppy diskette reported less than 1,457,664 bytes

following a format, it is likely that the diskette has bad
sectors. Replace floppy disk.

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

281

Messages
Overview

Message

Function

Description/Action Recommended

FILE NOT FOUND ON DISK

Any disk operation

The specified file name contains an illegal character,

such as a forward slash (e.g. FILE/01.RCP). Remove
the illegal character from the file name and retry the
operation.

FORMAT COMPLETE

Format Disk

Disk formatting successfully completed.

GENERAL ERROR
HANDSHAKE FAIL

This message will appear if the instrument encounters

any error not listed above.
Status line

1. Cycle OI power off and on.

2. Do an Operator Cold Start (page 20).
3. Reload configuration.
4. If message recurs, replace CPU.

INITIALIZATION COMPLETE

Data Storage disk

initialization

The function successfully completed.

INITIALIZATION FAILED BEZEL

OPEN

Data Storage disk

initialization

The requested disk operation failed because the front

bezel was opened.

INITIALIZATION FAILED
DEVICE ERROR

Data Storage disk

initialization

The requested disk operation failed because the disk,

the drive, or the drive interface is faulty.

INITIALIZATION FAILED WRITE

PROTECTED

Data Storage disk

initialization

The requested disk operation failed because the disk

was write protected..

INITIALIZING DSK

Status line

The OI is initializing the data storage disk for the current

data storage set.

LOAD COMPLETE

Load file from disk

The function successfully completed.

LOAD/STORE LOCKED BY PC
HOST

Load/store
controller
configuration
from/to disk

User attempts to load or store configuration data while a

configuration file is being downloaded via the PC over
another comm. port. The message will continue to
appear until the PC download is complete. Wait until the
PC download has completed, and then restart the
load/store from the OI menu.

LOADING CONFIG xx%

..WAIT..

Load controller
configuration from
disk

The function is in progress.

LOADING PROFILE

Load Profile from

disk

The function is in progress.

LOADING RECIPE

Load Recipe from

disk

The function is in progress.

LOADING SCHEDULE

Load Schedule
from disk

The function is in progress.

LOADING SEQUENCE

Load Sequence
from disk

The function is in progress.

LOADING STORAGE SET

Load data storage

set from disk

The function is in progress.

282

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

Revision 12
11/08

Messages
Overview

Message

Function

MUST BE IN PROGRAM MODE

Description/Action Recommended

Must be in Program mode to perform function.

MUST BE IN PROGRAM MODE

OR OFFLINE MODE

Calibrate AI

NO MASTER PORT

Communications
Ports display

The controller configuration contains at least one

Modbus slave block, but neither the RS-232 nor the RS485 port is set up as a Modbus Master port. Select
Modbus Master or Modbus Master Advanced protocol
for either the RS-232 or the RS-485 port.

OI COMMUNICATION FAILURE
THE OPERATOR STATION
CANNOT COMMUNICATE WITH
THE CONTROLLER FILE.
PLEASE CHECK THE CABLE
WHICH CONNECTS THE
OPER. STATION AND THE
CONTROLLER FILE.

Startup of OI

Check cable.

OPERATION FAILED

Disk operation

Configuration load failed. Retry function. If message

recurs, write down message along with version and
table numbers and contact Honeywell technical support.

Disk operation

Configuration store failed. Retry function. If message

recurs, write down message along with version and
table numbers and contact Honeywell technical support.

OPERATION FAILED BEZEL

OPEN

Disk operation

The requested disk operation failed because the front

bezel was opened.

OPERATION FAILED DEVICE

ERROR

Disk operation

The requested disk operation failed because the disk,

the drive, or the drive interface is faulty.

OPERATION FAILED ERROR

IN FILE RECORD DATA
VERSION x TABLE y

Load controller
configuration from
disk

The file content check failed. Retry function. If message

recurs, write down message along with version and
table numbers and contact Honeywell technical support.

OPERATION FAILED FILE

VERIFY FAILED VERSION x
TABLE y

Load controller
configuration from
disk

The file failed the data integrity check. Retry function. If

message recurs, write down message along with
version and table numbers and contact Honeywell
technical support.

OPERATION FAILED FILE

VERSION IS INCORRECT
VERSION x TABLE y

Load controller
configuration from
disk

The file version is incompatible with the controller. Retry

function. If message recurs, write down message along
with version and table numbers and contact Honeywell
technical support.

OPERATION FAILED MUST BE

IN PROGRAM MODE VERSION
x TABLE y

Load controller
configuration from
disk

The function requires the controller to be in PROGRAM

mode. Retry function. If message recurs, write down
message along with version and table numbers and
contact Honeywell technical support.

OPERATION FAILED NOT

ALLOWED IN CURRENT MODE

Load .DSS file

from disk

The function requires the controller to be in PROGRAM

or OFFLINE mode.

Calibrate AO

LOAD FAILED

The controller will not perform the function in the current

controller mode.

VERSION x TABLE y
OPERATION FAILED
STORE FAILED
VERSION x TABLE y

Revision 12
11/08

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

283

Messages
Overview

Message

Function

Description/Action Recommended

OPERATION FAILED
UNEXPECTED END OF FILE
VERSION x TABLE y

Load controller
configuration from
disk

The end of file mark was encountered before it was

expected. Retry function. If message recurs, write down
message along with version and table numbers and
contact Honeywell technical support.

OPERATION FAILED WRITE

PROTECTED

Disk operation

The requested disk operation failed because the disk

was write protected.

PRESS ENTER TO SAVE

CHANGES

Setting time and

date

Pressing enter will write the data to the controller.

Pressing escape will leave without writing the data to
the controller.

PROCESSOR EXCEP

Status line

1. Cycle OI power off and on.

2. Do an Operator Cold Start (page 20).
3. Reload configuration.
4. If message recurs, replace CPU.

PROCESSOR RESET

Status line

1. Cycle OI power off and on.

2. Do an Operator Cold Start (page 20).
3. Reload configuration.
4. If message recurs, replace CPU.

QUEUE READ FAIL

Status line

1. Cycle OI power off and on.

2. Do an Operator Cold Start (page 20).
3. Reload configuration.
4. If message recurs, replace CPU.

RAMP R/W ERROR

Edit Ramp block

data

REQUEST FAIL

Status line

The request to read or write Ramp block data to the

controller failed. Try to edit the segment again.

1. Cycle OI power off and on.

2. Do an Operator Cold Start (page 20).
3. Reload configuration.
4. If message recurs, replace CPU.

RESPONSE FAIL

Status line

1. Cycle OI power off and on.

2. Do an Operator Cold Start (page 20).
3. Reload configuration.
4. If message recurs, replace CPU.

SAVE IS NOT PERMITTED

SP Programmer,
SP Scheduler,
Sequencer

The SAVE feature has been disabled via the HC

Designer configuration software.

SEQ R/W ERROR

Edit Sequencer
steps

The request to read or write step data to the controller

failed. Try to edit the segment again.

284

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

Revision 12
11/08

Messages
Overview

Message

Function

Description/Action Recommended

SET TIME AND DATE

Data Storage Disk

Initialization

Go to the Unit Setup display and set the date to the

present year. Data storage cannot be started if the date
is less than Jan1, 1980.

SPP R/W ERROR

Edit Setpoint
Programmer
segments

The request to read or write SPP segment data to the

controller failed. Try to edit the segment again.

SPS R/W ERROR

Edit Setpoint
Scheduler
segments

The request to read or write SPS segment data to the

controller failed. Try to edit the segment again.

STAGE R/W ERROR

Edit Stage block

The request to read or write Stage block data to the

controller failed. Try to edit the segment again.

STORAGE FAILURE

Status line

1. Check for bad floppy disk.

2. Run disk diagnostic on the disk drive.
3. Check seating of floppy cables.
4. Replace CPU.

STORAGE FULL

Status line

The data storage RAM buffer is full. Data is

accumulating in this internal buffer (temporary storage)
because it is unable to store the data on the floppy disk.
Possible reasons include:
Disk is full and storage is programmed as non-

rollover.
There is no disk in the drive.
The disk is write-protected.
The disk is not current (see DSK NOT CURRENT).
The front bezel is open.

The message will disappear when the condition is

corrected, or if data storage is disabled (turned off).
STORE COMPLETE

Store file to disk

The function successfully completed.

STORING CONFIG xx%

WAIT

Store controller
configuration to
disk

The function is in progress.

STORING PROFILE

Store Profile to
disk

The function is in progress.

STORING RECIPE

Store Recipe to
disk

The function is in progress.

STORING SCHEDULE

Store Schedule to
disk

The function is in progress.

STORING SEQUENCE

Store Sequence to
disk

The function is in progress.

STORING STORAGE SET

Store data storage

set to disk

The function is in progress.

Revision 12
11/08

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

285

Messages
Overview

Message

TASK ERROR

Function

Status line

Description/Action Recommended

A software function (task) on the OI encountered a nonrecoverable error.

1. Cycle power off/on.

2. Do an Operator Cold Start (page 20)
TASK INIT FAIL

Status line

A software function (task) on the OI failed in its start-up

initialization..

TEST COMPLETE

Disk Read/Write
Self-Test

The test successfully completed.

TEST FAILED

Disk Read/Write
Self-Test

The test failed.

UPDATING DISK

Status line

Storage data is being written from RAM to the storage

disk.

WAIT

Edit Recipe
Set Security

A write transaction with the controller is in progress.

WAIT READING DATA

Select Recipe

A read transaction with the controller is in progress.

WARNING FILENAME
ALREADY EXISTS PRESS
ENTER TO OVERWRITE
PRESS ESC TO ABORT

Store file to disk

The selected file name already exists on the disk.

Continuing will overwrite the file found on the disk.

WARNING INITIALIZATION
WILL ERASE ALL EXISTING
DISK FILES AND DATA PRESS
ENTER TO INIT PRESS ESC
TO ABORT

Data Storage disk

initialization

Continuing will erase all data from the disk and initialize
the disk for the current storage set.

WARNING THE CONTROLLER

OUTPUTS ARE ACTIVE IN RUN
MODE, HELD IN OFFLINE
MODE AND DE-ENERGIZED IN
PROGRAM MODE.

Setting controller
mode

Changing the controller mode can result in its physical

outputs being activated (RUN) or disabled (OFFLINE or
PROGRAM).

WARNING THE CONTROLLER

OUTPUTS ARE ACTIVE IN THE
RUN MODE, HELD IN OFF-LINE
MODE, AND DE-ENERGIZED IN
PROGRAM MODE.

Calibrate AI and
AO

Change program mode to Off-line or Program

WARNING THIS TIME CHANGE

WILL ERASE TREND DISPLAY
DATA AND FLUSH STORAGE
DATA TO DISK PRESS ENTER
TO SAVE PRESS MENU TO
ABORT

Setting time and

date back

Proceeding to set the time/date backward will result in

the trend data being overwritten with new data. It will
also force storage buffers to be written to disk and the
storage disk to be closed out (marked full).

WARNING THIS UTILITY WILL

ERASE ALL EXISTING DISK
FILES AND DATA PRESS
ENTER TO BEGIN PRESS ESC
TO ABORT

Format Disk

Continuing will erase the contents of the disk.

286

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

Revision 12
11/08

Messages
Overview

Message

Function

Description/Action Recommended

WARNING THIS UTILITY WILL

OVERWRITE THE EXISTING
STORAGE SETTING. PRESS
ENTER TO LOAD PRESS ESC
TO ABORT

Load data storage

set from disk

Continuing will overwrite the data storage set currently

loaded in the controller.

WATCHDOG ERROR

Status line

A watchdog-timer reset occurred because of a software

or hardware failure. If the message recurs, contact
Honeywell technical support.

WRITE-PROTECTED

Status line
Disk operation

The disk in the drive has its write-protected tab set to

the protect position.

Revision 12
11/08

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

287

Messages

288

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

Revision 12
11/08

Appendix A - HC900-C70R Redundant Controller Displays

Overview
This section describes the displays and features within the OI that are used to support the HC900-C70R
Redundant Controller. The selections on the Main Menu that contain information about the redundant
controller are highlighted in Figure 94.
MAIN MENU

APRIL 14
11:30

RECIPES
SP PROGRAMMERS
SP SCHEDULERS
SEQUENCERS
LOOPS
ALARMS/EVENTS/DIAG
SUMMARY DISPLAYS
UNIT SETUP
DISK UTILITIES
DATA STORAGE
LOG OFF
ALARM

C ONTROLLER DIAG

RUN

Figure 94 Main Menu

Table 176 summarizes the items that are available to support redundant controllers.
Table 176 Location of Redundant Controller Displays
Main Menu Location

Redundant Controller Menu Prompts

Refer to page

Unit Setup

Communication Ports
Serial Port S1
Serial Port S2
Network Port E1
Network Port E2

290

Alarm/Event/Diags

Controller Diagnostics Overview

295

Alarm/Event/Diags

Lead CPU Diagnostics

299

Alarm/Event/Diags

Reserve CPU Diagnostics

299

Alarm/Event/Diags

Communication Ports
Serial Port S1
Serial Port S2
Network Port E1
Network Port E2

290

Alarm/Event/Diags

Rack Diagnostics

302

Note that the Redundant Controller Menu Prompts listed in Table 1 are only visible, and can only be
accessed, if the OI is connected to an HC900-C70R redundant controller.

Revision 12
11/08

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

289

Appendix A - HC900-C70R Redundant Controller Displays

Communication Ports Displays

Communication Ports Displays

Access
From Main Menu, select UNIT SETUP then select COMMUNICATION PORTS DISPLAY.
This display can also be reached from ALARM/EVENT/DIAG on the Main Menu by selecting
ALARM/EVENT/DIAG and then selecting COMMUNICATION PORTS.
Overview
This display allows you to access the status and setup displays for the network and serial ports on the Lead
CPU. It also shows the overall diagnostic status for each of these ports.
COMMUNICATION PORTS

SERIAL PORT S1
SERIAL PORT S2 (OI)
NETWORK PORT E1
NETWORK PORT E2
MODBUS SLAVE DEVICES

ALARM

MESSAGE TEXT

GOOD
GOOD
GOOD
GOOD

HZ

RUN

Figure 95 Communication Ports Display

The diagnostic condition of each port is displayed to the right of the port description. See Table 177 for an
explanation of these diagnostic conditions.
To access the detailed information for any port, scroll to the desired port and press ENTER.
Note: If you are using a Honeywell OI (OI-559 or OI-1042) it must be connected to Serial Port S2 to insure
proper operation of the OI. Also note that only one Honeywell OI may be connected to the controller (you
cannot connect a second OI-559 or OI-1042 to Serial Port S1).

290

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

Revision 12
11/08

Appendix A - HC900-C70R Redundant Controller Displays

Communication Ports Displays

Diagnostics and Statuses

Table 177 Communication Ports Diagnostics and Statuses
Class

SERIAL PORT S1
SERIAL PORT S2

NETWORK PORT E1
NETWORK PORT E2

Status
Possible Cause
GOOD
N/A
APPLICATION At least one response
ERROR
to a host resulted in
an exception code or
NAK.

DATA LINK
ERROR

A large number of
messages are
resulting in data link
errors.

HARDWARE
FAILURE

The DUART is failing

to operate properly.

GOOD
NETWORK
SETUP
ERROR

N/A
Controller/network
names determined on
network are illegal

Controller Action
N/A
1. Rack 1 monitor blocks
COMPORT DIAG is set to
WARNING.
2. Rack 1 monitor blocks
RACK OK pin is turned off.
3. SYSTEM MONITOR
blocks HW OK pin is
turned off.
1. Rack 1 monitor blocks
COMPORT DIAG is set to
FAILED.
2. Rack 1 monitor blocks
RACK OK pin is turned off.
3. SYSTEM MONITOR
blocks HW OK pin is
turned off.

N/A
Rack 1 monitor blocks
COMPORT DIAG is set to
FAILED.

Fix
N/A
At host, determine which
message is causing the
exception code and fix it.

1. Check baud rate.

2. Check connectors.
3. Check cable polarity.
4. Isolate cable from electrical
interference.
5. If RS232-to-RS485 converter
used, check its power,
switch/jumper settings, and
polarity.
Replace the controller CPU
module.
N/A
Correct the setup problem.

Rack 1 monitor blocks

RACK OK pin is turned off.

NO IP
ADDRESS
HARDWARE
FAILURE
MODBUS SLAVE
DEVICES

Revision 12
11/08

IP address is not
configured
Ethernet port tests
failed during powerup.

ASYS (SYSTEM
MONITOR) blocks HW
OK pin is turned off.
Same as above

Enter an IP address.

Same as above

Replace CPU Module

If the controllers Serial Port S1 is being used to host one or more Modbus Slave devices the
message NO MASTER PORT may appear next to the MODBUS SLAVE DEVICES menu
item. This message indicates that the Serial Port S1 protocol is set to a value other than
Modbus Master or Modbus Master Advanced. Call up the Serial Port S1 display and set
the protocol to Modbus Master or Modbus Master Advanced.

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

291

Appendix A - HC900-C70R Redundant Controller Displays

Communication Ports Displays

Serial Port S1
This selection will call up the Serial Port S1 display. This display contains setup, diagnostic, and status
information about the S1 port on the Lead CPU. Please refer to
Table 99 page 169, Table 100 page 170, and Table 101 - page171 for more information about this
display.
Serial Port S2 (OI)
This selection will call up the Serial Port S2 (OI) display. This display contains setup, diagnostic, and
status information about the S2 port on the Lead CPU. Please refer to Table 102, Page 172 for more
information about this display.
Network Port E1
This selection will call up the Network Ports E1 and E2 display. The details of this display are described
below.
Network Port E2
This selection will call-up the Network Ports E1 and E2 display. The details of this display are described
below.
Modbus Slave Devices
This selection calls up the Modbus Slave Devices display. This display gives you an overview of the
individual slave devices attached to the controllers Serial Port S1 when the port is set-up as a Modbus
Master. See Page 180 for more information about this display.

292

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

Revision 12
11/08

Appendix A - HC900-C70R Redundant Controller Displays

Communication Ports Displays

Network Ports E1 and E2 display

This display allows you to access setup, diagnostic, and status information about the E1 and E2 Ethernet
network ports on the Lead CPU. These ports are used to communicate with host PCs and Peer controllers.
Table 178 describes the diagnostic and status information available for these ports.
Table 178 Network Ports E1 and E2 display
Feature

Description

CONTROLLER NAME

Configured controller name

NETWORK NAME

The network name to which the controller belongs.

LOCAL ALIAS

A locally referenced alias for the controller.

PORT E1/E2 DOUBLE

REGISTER FORMAT

Each IEEE 32-bit floating point number requires two consecutive registers (four bytes,
MSB=4, LSB=1 in byte order below) starting with the register defined as the starting register
for the information. The stuffing order of the bytes into the two registers differs among
Modbus hosts. To provide compatibility, the Double register format is configurable.
Selections are:
FPB

Floating Point Big Endian Format Byte order 4, 3, 2, 1 (Default) *

FP BB Floating Point Big Endian with byte-swapped Byte order 3, 4, 1, 2

FP L

Floating Point Little Endian Format Byte order 1, 2, 3, 4

FP LB Floating Point Little Endian with byte-swapped Byte order 2, 1, 4, 3

* Required for use with Honeywell Hybrid Control Designer Software.

NETWORK PORT E1

Press ENTER to go to the Network Port E1 Display. (See Table 179)

NETWORK PORT E2

Press ENTER to go to the Network Port E2 Display. (See Table 179)

VIEW HOST
CONNECTIONS

Press ENTER to go to the network host connections display. See View Host Connections
in Table 104 on Page 174.
Note that there are 10 Host Connections on the C70R Redundant Controller.

VIEW PEER
CONNECTIONS

Press ENTER to go to the network peer connections display. See View Peer Connections
in Table 106 on Page 175.

Bold items are read only

Revision 12
11/08

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

293

Appendix A - HC900-C70R Redundant Controller Displays

Communication Ports Displays

Network Ports E1 and Network Port E2 Display Details

Table 179 Network Port E1 and Network Port E2 Display details
Feature

Description

PORT DIAGNOSTIC

Shows condition of network port. See Network Port diagnostics in Table 177
on page 291.

CONTROLLER NAME

Configured controller name

NETWORK NAME

The network name to which the controller belongs.

LOCAL ALIAS

A locally referenced alias for the controller.

MAC ADDRESS

The Media Access Control address assigned to this port on the controller.

IP ADDRESS

The Internet Protocol address assigned to this port on the controller.

SUBNET ADDRESS

The subnet mask address assigned to this port on the controller.

GATEWAY IP ADDRESS

The Internet Protocol address for the controllers gateway device.

DOUBLE REGISTER
FORMAT

Each IEEE 32-bit floating point number requires two consecutive registers (four bytes,
MSB=4, LSB=1 in byte order below) starting with the register defined as the starting
register for the information. The stuffing order of the bytes into the two registers differs
among Modbus hosts. To provide compatibility, the Double register format is
configurable. Selections are:
FPB

Floating Point Big Endian Format Byte order 4, 3, 2, 1 (Default)

FP BB Floating Point Big Endian with byte-swapped Byte order 3, 4, 1, 2

FP L

Floating Point Little Endian Format Byte order 1, 2, 3, 4

FP LB Floating Point Little Endian with byte-swapped Byte order 2, 1, 4, 3

All items are read only

294

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

Revision 12
11/08

Appendix A - HC900-C70R Redundant Controller Displays

Alarms/Events/Diags

Alarms/Events/Diags
Access
Main menu
Overview
Alarms/Events/Diags menu allows you to view the status of alarms, events, and diagnostics. For Redundant
Controllers there are five specific menu selections for Alarms/Events/Diags. These selections are
highlighted in Figure 96.
For all other selections, refer to the specific sections in the main manual.
ALARMS / EVENTS / DIAGS
ALARM SUMMARY
EVENT SUMMARY
CONTROLLER DIAGNOSTICS OVERVIEW
LEAD CPU DIAGNOSTICS
RESERVE CPU DIAGNOSTICS
COMMUNICATION PORTS
I/O MODULE DIAGNOSTICS
PANEL DIAGNOSTIC LOG

ALARM

MESSAGE TEXT

HZ

RUN

Figure 96 Alarm/Events/Diag Menu

For information on these menu selections, go to the page specified below:
CONTROLLER DIAGNOSTICS OVERVIEW

Page 296

LEAD CPU DIAGNOSTICS

Page 299

RESERVE CPU DIAGNOSTICS

Page 299

COMMUNICATION PORTS

Page 291

RACK DIAGNOSTICS

Page 303

Revision 12
11/08

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

295

Appendix A - HC900-C70R Redundant Controller Displays

Controller Diagnostics Overview

Controller Diagnostics Overview

This display summarizes the status of all of the major components of a redundant system. If there is a
problem in the system, this display will identify the affected component and then allow you go to a more
detailed display by pressing the Enter key.
Refer Table 180 for a description of the information contained on this display.
CONTROLLER DIAGNOSTICS OVERVIEW
RESERVE STATUS

RESERVE AVAILABLE

REDUNDANCY STATUS

GOOD

SYSTEM

GOOD

CPU

GOOD

MEMORY

GOOD

RTC

GOOD

I/O RACK COMM PORT

ERROR IN RESERVE CPU

RACK I/O MODULE

ERROR IN RACK 4

COMM PORTS E1/E2/S1/S2 GOOD

ALARM

RUN

CONTROLLER DIAG

Figure 97 Controller Diagnostics Overview

Table 180 Details of Controller Diagnostics Overview status messages

Class
RESERVE
STATUS

Status
RESERVE
AVAILABLE
RESERVE NOT
AVAILABLE

Possible Cause
Normal operation

1.
2.
3.

4.

5.

Controller Action
N/A

Reserve not
) The lead controller
installed in rack.
will continue to
Power not applied control the process,
but failover is not
to reserve CPU
possible.
Neither lead nor
reserve CPU has a
valid configuration
database
Firmware
mismatch (lead
and reserve CPUs
have different
firmware revisions
Database not
synchronized with
the lead

)
REDUNDANCY )
GOOD
STATUS
NO RSM MODULE
DETECTED

Normal operation
Switch on RSM is set
between two positions.
RSM Module is not
inserted

N/A
The controller will
continue to operate
with a missing RSM.
Automatic failover is
still possible if
required.

RSM Module has failed

296

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

Fix

N/A
Install reserve CPU
Apply power to reserve CPU
Download a configuration and
cold start the controller
Perform a firmware upgrade so
both CPUs have the same
version

Replace the reserve CPU. If

this doesnt help, replace the
lead CPU. If this doesnt help,
replace the backplane.
N/A
Make sure switch is in desired
position
Install RSM module

Replace RSM

Revision 12
11/08

Appendix A - HC900-C70R Redundant Controller Displays

Controller Diagnostics Overview

Class

Status
RSM SWITCH IS
BAD

Possible Cause
Switch is indicating an
invalid position

I/O COMM ERROR

ON RESERVE

Reserve CPU is unable

to communicate with
one or more of the I/O
racks.

DATABASE NOT
SYNCHRONIZED

Hardware failure on the

reserve CPU
Hardware failure on the
lead CPU

INVALID CONFIG.

SYSTEM

FIRMWARE
VERSION
MISMATCH

The reserve controller

does not have the same
version of controller
firmware installed

GOOD
FORCED OUTPUT

N/A
A block has an output
that is forced.
A configuration that
exceeds the loop
capacity of the controller
was downloaded or an
invalid configuration
exists.
RMS switch is indicating
an invalid position

INVALID CONFIG.

SWITCH FAULT

NO MASTER
PORT

Revision 12
11/08

Hardware failure on the

CPU rack backplane
Neither CPU has a valid
configuration database

Controller Action
Fix
The controller will
)
Replace RSM
continue to operate
with a bad RSM.
Automatic failover is
still possible if
required.
The lead controller
Verify all cabling between the
will continue to
reserve CPU and the scanners.
control the process.
Failover to the
Replace any Ethernet switches
reserve is still
between the reserve CPU and
possible if a
the I/O rack(s).
subsequent failure
renders the current
Replace the reserve CPU
lead less capable
than the reserve.
Replace the scanner CPU

The lead controller

will continue to
control the process,
but failover is not
possible.

Contact Honeywell service

Replace the reserve CPU

Replace the lead CPU

Replace the CPU rack backplane
Contact Honeywell service

An empty database
is created.
The lead controller
will continue to
control the process,
but failover is not
possible.
N/A
None
An empty database
is created.

The controller will

continue to operate
with a bad RSM.
Automatic failover is
still possible if
required.
The controller
The controller is not
configuration contains at scanning the
least on Modbus slave
Modbus slave
block, but Serial Port S1 devices.
is not set up as a
Modbus Master port.

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

Download the desired

configuration file and perform a
cold start.
Upgrade the CPU firmware so
both the lead and reserve have
the same version.

N/A
Remove force on block output..
Download a valid configuration.

Replace RSM

Select Modbus Master or

Modbus Master Advanced
protocol for either the RS-232 or
RS-485 port.

297

Appendix A - HC900-C70R Redundant Controller Displays

Controller Diagnostics Overview

Class

Status
RSM SWITCH
MISMATCH

Possible Cause
The lead and reserve
controller are both
reading the switch on
the RSM, but are getting
different values.

NO RSM MODULE
DETECTED

Switch on RSM is set

between two positions.
RSM Module is not
inserted

Controller Action
The controller will
continue to operate
with a bad RSM.
Automatic failover is
still possible if
required.

Fix
Replace the RSM

Replace the reserve CPU

Force a failover and replace the
new reserve CPU

Contact Honeywell service

The controller will
Make sure switch is in desired
continue to operate
position
with a missing RSM.
Automatic failover is Install RSM module
still possible if
)
required.

RSM Module has failed

BAD RSM SWITCH Switch is indicating an
(LEAD)
invalid position

BAD RSM SWITCH Switch is indicating an

(RESERVE)
invalid position

Class
CPU*
MEMORY*
RTC*
I/O RACK
COMM PORT*
RACK I/O
MODULES*
COMM PORTS
E1/E2/S1/S2*

Status
GOOD
ERROR IN RACK 1
ERROR IN RACK 2
ERROR IN RACK 3
ERROR IN RACK 4
ERROR IN RACK 5
ERROR IN LEAD CPU
ERROR IN RESERVE CPU
ERROR ON SERIAL PORT S1
ERROR ON SERIAL PORT S2
ERROR ON E1 NETWORK PORT
ERROR ON E2 NETWORK PORT
ERROR ON SCANNER I/O LINK

Replace RSM
Replace RSM

The controller will

continue to operate
with a bad RSM.
Automatic failover is
still possible if
required.
The controller will
continue to operate
with a bad RSM.
Automatic failover is
still possible if
required.

Force a failover and replace the

CPU (formerly the lead, now the
reserve)
Replace RSM
Replace the reserve CPU

Possible Cause
REFER TO Table 182
REFER TO Table 182
REFER TO Table 182
REFER TO Table 182
REFER TO Table 182
REFER TO Table 181
REFER TO Table 181
REFER TO Table 177
REFER TO Table 177
REFER TO Table 177
REFER TO Table 177
REFER TO Table 182

* indicates that these menu items will take you to the appropriate diagnostic detail display when you press
Enter. For example, if the RACK I/O MODULES item shows a status of ERROR IN RACK 4,
pressing the Enter key will take you to the Rack Diagnostics display for Rack 4.

298

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

Revision 12
11/08

Appendix A - HC900-C70R Redundant Controller Displays

Lead CPU Diagnostics Display

Lead CPU Diagnostics Display

Reserve CPU Diagnostics Display
These displays show the status of the Lead and Reserve CPU modules in the redundant system. The same
categories of status information are shown on each display. The CPU Position parameter on each display
identifies which physical CPU module is currently acting as the Lead or Reserve.
Refer to Table 181 for a description of the information contained on these displays.
LEAD CPU DIAGNOSTICS*
RESERVE STATUS

RESERVE AVAILABLE

CPU POSITION

CPU-A

CPU

GOOD

MEMORY
RTC

GOOD
GOOD

I/O RACK COMM PORT

GOOD

NETWORK PORT E1

GOOD

NETWORK PORT E2

GOOD

SERIAL PORT S1

GOOD

SERIAL PORT S2

GOOD

ALARM

RUN

CONTROLLER DIAG

* Or RESERVE CPU DIAGNOSTICS

Figure 98 Lead or Reserve CPU diagnostics

Table 181 Details of Lead or Reserve CPU diagnostics error status messages
Class
RESERVE
STATUS

Status
RESERVE
AVAILABLE
RESERVE NOT
AVAILABLE

Possible Cause
Normal operation

Controller Action
N/A

1.

The lead controller

will continue to
control the process,
but failover is not
possible.

2.
3.

4.

5.

Revision 12
11/08

Reserve not installed

in rack.
Power not applied to
reserve CPU
Neither lead nor
reserve CPU has a
valid configuration
database
Firmware mismatch
(lead and reserve
CPUs have different
firmware revisions
Database not
synchronized with
the lead

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

Fix

N/A
Install reserve CPU
Apply power to reserve CPU
Download a configuration and cold
start the controller
Perform a firmware upgrade so
both CPUs have the same version

Replace the reserve CPU. If this

doesnt help, replace the lead
CPU. If this doesnt help, replace
the backplane.

299

Appendix A - HC900-C70R Redundant Controller Displays

Reserve CPU Diagnostics Display

Class
Status
Possible Cause
CPU POSITION CPU-A
N/A
CPU-B
N/A
CPU IS MISSING Reserve CPU is not
installed or not powered.

CPU rack backplane

failure

CPU

GOOD
ADDRESS
ERROR
PREFETCH
ERROR

DATA ABORT
ERROR
S/W
INTERRUPT
ERR
UNDEFINED
INSTR ERROR
WATCHDOG
ERROR

MEMORY

300

VECTOR
ERROR
GOOD
5 DAY BATTERY
WARNING

N/A
The reserved exception
occurred for an unknown
reason.
CPU failed when
attempting to fetch an
instruction from the
prefetch register.

CPU failed when

attempting to access
data.
Software Interrupt that is
not supported by the
software occurred.
Bad Instruction Detected
Watchdog reset resulting
from software failure

Corrupted interrupt
vectors in RAM.
N/A
Estimated battery life is
less than 5 days.

Controller Action
Fix
Normal operation )
Normal operation
The lead controller
Install reserve CPU
will continue to
control the process, Apply power to reserve CPU
but failover is not
possible.
Replace CPU rack backplane

N/A
See PREFETCH
ERROR.
1. Controller
performs a restart
2. Associated rack
monitor blocks
RACK OK pin is
turned off.
3. SYSTEM
MONITOR
blocks HW OK
pin is turned off.
See PREFETCH
ERROR.

Call Honeywell service

N/A
See PREFETCH ERROR.

1. Force a cold start.

2. Isolate system from noise and
force a cold start.
3. Replace CPU board.

See PREFETCH ERROR.

See PREFETCH
ERROR.

See PREFETCH ERROR.

See PREFETCH
ERROR
1. Associated rack
monitor blocks
RACK OK pin is
turned off.
2. SYSTEM
MONITOR
blocks HW OK
pin is turned off.
Interrupt vectors
were restored.
N/A
1. Associated rack
monitor blocks
RACK OK pin is
turned off.
2. SYSTEM
MONITOR
blocks HW OK
pin is turned off.

See PREFETCH ERROR.

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

1. Force a cold start.

2. Upgrade controller module
software.
3. Replace CPU board.
4. Contact Honeywell Personnel.

See WATCHDOG ERROR.

N/A
Replace battery.

Revision 12
11/08

Appendix A - HC900-C70R Redundant Controller Displays

Reserve CPU Diagnostics Display

Class

RTC

Revision 12
11/08

Status
LOW BATTERY

Possible Cause
Battery voltage is low.

FLASH ERROR

Flash failed to burn

GOOD
NOT
PROGRAMMED

N/A
RTC not programmed

BAD DATA

Bad date and time

PROGRAMMIN
G FAILURE
READ FAILURE

RTC failed to program

Unable to read RTC

Controller Action
1. Associated rack
monitor blocks
RACK OK pin is
turned off.
2. SYSTEM
MONITOR
blocks LOW
BATTERY pin is
turned on.
3. SYSTEM
MONITOR
blocks HW OK
pin is turned off.
1. Associated rack
monitor blocks
RACK OK pin is
turned off.
2. SYSTEM
MONITOR
blocks HW OK
pin is turned off.
N/A
1. Time and date is
set to 00:00:00,
January 1, 1970.
2. Associated rack
monitor blocks
RACK OK pin is
turned off.
3. SYSTEM
MONITOR
blocks HW OK
pin is turned off.
See NOT
PROGRAMMED.

See NOT
PROGRAMMED.
See NOT
PROGRAMMED.

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

Fix
Replace battery.

1. Force a cold start.

2. Replace CPU board.

N/A
Program RTC.

1. Program RTC.
2. Cycle power.
3. Replace CPU.
4. Replace boards in rack.
5. Replace rack.
See BAD DATA.
See BAD DATA.

301

Appendix A - HC900-C70R Redundant Controller Displays

Communication Ports

Class
I/O RACK
COMM PORT

Status
GOOD
DATA LINK
FAILURE

HARDWARE
FAILURE

Possible Cause
Normal operation
Scanner2 address
switches are not in the
correct position
An I/O cable is
unplugged.
Cables are defective or
are not properly
shielded
If a hub is used, it may
be powered down.
The Scanner2 is
powered down.
The Scanner2 is
defective

) The I/O interface has a

hardware failure.

PORT A/B
CABLE
MISMATCH

NETWORK
PORT E1
NETWORK
PORT E2
SERIAL PORT
S1
SERIAL PORT
S2

Controller Action
N/A
Controller continues
to run but is not able
to access the I/O on
the associated rack

Controller continues
to run but is not able
to access any I/O.
Controller continues
to run but is not able
to access the I/O on
the associated rack

Fix

1. Verify that the address

switches on the scanner 2 are
set correctly.
2. If a hub is used, check that all
cables are properly connected
to the hub, proper crossover
cables are used, that the hub
is powered, and it supports
100 Base-T.
3. Check cable shielding for
proper grounding and noise
immunity.
4. Make sure the cables have the
correct pin out.
5. Cycle power to the Scanner 2.
6. Cycle power to the hub.
7. Cycle power to the C70R.
8. Replace the expansion racks
scanner module.
9. Replace the expansion racks
power supply.
10. Replace the expansion rack.
11.Replace the main CPU.
Replace the CPU.

The I/O cables from

Swap the cables so that I/O A is
CPUA and CPUB are
connected to I/O on CPUA and I/O
connected to the wrong
B is connected to I/O on CPUB
ports on the I/O scanner
CPU
PROTOCOL
The firmware version in
Controller continues Upgrade the firmware in the CPU
MISMATCH
the controller CPU is not to run but is not able and/or scanner to be compatible
compatible with the
to access the I/O on versions
firmware version in the I/O the associated rack
scanner
REFER TO Table 177 Communication Ports Diagnostics and Statuses
REFER TO Table 177 Communication Ports Diagnostics and Statuses
REFER TO Table 177 Communication Ports Diagnostics and Statuses
REFER TO Table 177 Communication Ports Diagnostics and Statuses

Communication Ports
This display can also be reached from the Unit Setup Menu by selecting the COMMUNICATION PORTS
menu item. Refer to Page 290 of this appendix for a description of this display.
For Communication Ports Diagnostics and Statuses, refer to Table 177.

302

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

Revision 12
11/08

Appendix A - HC900-C70R Redundant Controller Displays

Rack Diagnostics Displays

Rack Diagnostics Displays

These displays show diagnostic and status information about the I/O Racks used in a redundant control
system. There is one display for each of the five I/O Racks. Use the Page Up and Page Down keys to
access the complete set of displays.
Page 1 of 5

RACK DIAGNOSTICS
Rack 1

CPU

GOOD

MEMORY

GOOD

POWER SUPPLY DIAG

GOOD

POWER SUPPLY STATUS

BOTH ARE GOOD

LEAD CPU POSITION

CPU-A

LEAD I/O COMM DIAG

GOOD

LEAD I/O COMM STATUS

GOOD: PORT I/O A

RESERVE I/O COMM DIAG

RESERVE I/O COMM STATUS

GOOD
GOOD: PORT I/O B

I/O MODULE DIAGNOSTICS

GOOD

ALARM

RUN

C ONTROLLER DIAG

BOLD is read only

Figure 99 Rack Diagnostics Display

If a rack is not referenced in the controller configuration, the message Not Configured will appear at the
top of the display.
Refer to Table 182 for a description of the information contained on these displays.
Table 182 Details of Rack diagnostics error status messages
Class

CPU

Status
GOOD
ADDRESS ERROR

Possible Cause
N/A
The reserved
exception occurred for
an unknown reason.
PREFETCH ERROR CPU failed when
attempting to fetch an
instruction from the
prefetch register.

DATA ABORT
ERROR
S/W INTERRUPT
ERR

UNDEFINED INSTR
ERROR

Revision 12
11/08

CPU failed when

attempting to access
data.
Software Interrupt
occurred which is not
supported by the
software.
Bad Instruction
Detected

Controller Action
N/A
See PREFETCH
ERROR.

Fix
N/A
See PREFETCH ERROR.

1. Controller
performs a restart
2. Associated rack
monitor blocks
RACK OK pin is
turned off.
3. SYSTEM
MONITOR
blocks HW OK
pin is turned off.
See PREFETCH
ERROR.

1. Force a cold start.

2. Isolate system from noise and
force a cold start.
3. Replace CPU board.

See PREFETCH ERROR.

See PREFETCH
ERROR.

See PREFETCH ERROR.

See PREFETCH
ERROR

See PREFETCH ERROR.

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

303

Appendix A - HC900-C70R Redundant Controller Displays

Rack Diagnostics Displays

Class

Status
WATCHDOG
ERROR

VECTOR ERROR
MEMORY

GOOD
5 DAY BATTERY
WARNING

LOW BATTERY

FLASH ERROR

304

Possible Cause
Watchdog reset
resulting from software
failure

Controller Action
1. Associated rack
monitor blocks
RACK OK pin is
turned off.
2. SYSTEM
MONITOR
blocks HW OK
pin is turned off.
Corrupted interrupt
Interrupt vectors
vectors in RAM.
were restored.
N/A
N/A
Estimated battery life is 1. Associated rack
less than 5 days.
monitor blocks
RACK OK pin is
turned off.
2. SYSTEM
MONITOR
blocks HW OK
pin is turned off.
Battery voltage is low.
1. Associated rack
monitor blocks
RACK OK pin is
turned off.
2. SYSTEM
MONITOR
blocks LOW
BATTERY pin is
turned on.
3. SYSTEM
MONITOR
blocks HW OK
pin is turned off.
Flash failed to burn
1. Associated rack
monitor blocks
RACK OK pin is
turned off.
2. SYSTEM
MONITOR
blocks HW OK
pin is turned off.

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

Fix
1. Force a cold start.
2. Upgrade controller module
software.
3. Replace CPU board.
4. Contact Honeywell Service.

See WATCHDOG ERROR.

N/A
Replace battery.

Replace battery.

1. Force a cold start.

2. Replace CPU board.

Revision 12
11/08

Appendix A - HC900-C70R Redundant Controller Displays

Rack Diagnostics Displays

Class
POWER
SUPPLY DIAG

Status
GOOD
POWER SUPPLY
PS-1 FAILED

POWER SUPPLY
PS-2 FAILED

Possible Cause
N/A
A scanner has
redundant power
supplies installed and
the one identified as
PS-1 is not working

Controller Action
Fix
N/A
N/A
I/O rack continues to Verify that the power supply is
function normally
connected to a power source
using the remaining
power supply

Failed Power Supply

Replace power supply

Failed Redundant
Power Backplane
detection circuit

Requires unit shutdown replace

redundant power backplane

Failed Rack backplane

status signal

Requires unit shutdown replace

rack backplane.

Failed Scanner2 status

input

Requires unit shutdown replace

Scanner2.

A scanner has
redundant power
supplies installed and
the one identified as
PS-2 is not working

I/O rack continues to

function normally
using the remaining
power supply

Contact Honeywell Service.

Verify that the power supply is
connected to a power source

Failed Power Supply

Replace power supply

Failed Redundant
Power Backplane
detection circuit

Requires unit shutdown replace

redundant power backplane

Failed Rack backplane

status signal

Requires unit shutdown replace

rack backplane.

Failed Scanner2 status

input

Requires unit shutdown replace

Scanner2.
Contact Honeywell Service.

Revision 12
11/08

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

305

Appendix A - HC900-C70R Redundant Controller Displays

Rack Diagnostics Displays

Class
POWER
SUPPLY
STATUS

Status
UNKNOWN

Possible Cause
No Rack
communication

REDUNDANT P/S IS Single Power Supply

NOT PRESENT
configuration

Controller Action
If under power, I/O
will switch to failsafe
values

Fix
Determine and correct cause of
communication failure.

Loss of Comms

Determine and correct cause of

communication failure.

If not powered (unpowered outputs)

Restore rack operation

Loss of AC mains

Restore AC mains power, reset

breaker

Bad Power Supply

Replace Power Supply

Failed Scanner2

Replace Scanner2

Rack continues to
function properly

No action required if single power

supply rack

Redundant Power
Backplane not
detected

POWER SUPPLY
PS-1 FAILED

POWER SUPPLY
PS-2 FAILED

A scanner has
redundant power
supplies installed and
the one identified as
PS-1 is not working

I/O rack continues to

function normally
using the remaining
power supply

If dual power supply is installed:

Replace Redundant Power
Backplane
Replace rack backplane
Replace Scanner2
Verify that the power supply
is connected to a power
source

Failed Power Supply

Replace power supply

Failed Redundant
Power Backplane
detection circuit

Requires unit shutdown

replace Redundant Power
Backplane

Failed Rack backplane

status signal

Requires unit shutdown

replace rack backplane.

Failed Scanner2 status

input

Requires unit shutdown replace

Scanner2.

A scanner has
redundant power
supplies installed and
the one identified as
PS-2 is not working

I/O rack continues to

function normally
using the remaining
power supply

Contact Honeywell Service.

Verify that the power supply
is connected to a power
source

Failed Power Supply

Replace power supply

Failed Redundant
Power Backplane
detection circuit

Requires unit shutdown

replace redundant power
backplane

Failed Rack backplane

status signal

Requires unit shutdown

replace rack backplane.

Failed Scanner2 status

input

Requires unit shutdown

replace Scanner2.
Contact Honeywell Service.

306

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

Revision 12
11/08

Appendix A - HC900-C70R Redundant Controller Displays

Rack Diagnostics Displays

Class

LEAD CPU
POSITION

Status
BOTH POWER
SUPPLIES ARE
GOOD
CPU-A

CPU-B
CPU IS MISSING

Possible Cause
N/A

Controller Action
None

None

CPU-A is currently the

lead
CPU-B is currently the
lead
Reserve CPU is not
installed or not
powered.

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

The lead controller

will continue to
control the process,
but failover is not
possible.

Install reserve CPU

CPU rack backplane

failure

Fix

Apply power to reserve CPU

Replace CPU rack backplane
Contact Honeywell Service.

LEAD I/O
COMM DIAG

GOOD
DATA LINK
FAILURE

Normal operation
Scanner2 address
switches are not in
the correct position
An I/O cable is
unplugged.
Cables are defective
or are not properly
shielded
If a hub is used, it
may be powered
down.
The Scanner2 is
powered down.
The Scanner2 is
defective

N/A
Controller continues
to run but is not able
to access the I/O on
the associated rack

HARDWARE
FAILURE

The I/O interface has a

hardware failure.

Controller continues
to run but is not able
to access any I/O.
Controller continues
to run but is not able
to access the I/O on
the associated rack

PORT A/B CABLE

MISMATCH

PROTOCOL
MISMATCH

Revision 12
11/08

The I/O cables from

CPUA and CPUB are
connected to the
wrong ports on the I/O
scanner CPU
The firmware version
in the controller CPU is
not compatible with the
firmware version in the
I/O scanner

Controller continues
to run but is not able
to access the I/O on
the associated rack

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

1. Verify that the address

switches on the scanner 2 are
set correctly.
2. If a hub is used, check that all
cables are properly connected
to the hub, proper crossover
cables are used, that the hub
is powered, and it supports
100 Base-T.
3. Check cable shielding for
proper grounding and noise
immunity.
4. Make sure the cables have the
correct pin out.
5. Cycle power to the Scanner 2.
6. Cycle power to the hub.
7. Cycle power to the C70R.
8. Replace the expansion racks
scanner module.
9. Replace the expansion racks
power supply.
10. Replace the expansion rack.
11. Replace the main CPU.
Replace the CPU.

Swap the cables so that I/O A is

connected to I/O on CPUA and
I/O B is connected to I/O on
CPUB
Upgrade the firmware in the CPU
and/or scanner to be compatible
versions

307

Appendix A - HC900-C70R Redundant Controller Displays

Rack Diagnostics Displays

Class
LEAD I/O
COMM
STATUS

308

Status
Possible Cause
NO
Possible causes are
COMMUNICATIONS defined by the LEAD
I/O COMM DIAG that
is being reported.
MARGINAL: PORT
Rack communication
I/O A
with CPU-A is
experiencing a high
error rate

Controller Action
Controller continues
to run but is not able
to access the I/O on
the associated rack
Controller continues
to run but is
marginally
accessing the I/O
on the associated
rack

MARGINAL: PORT
I/O B

Rack communication
with CPU-B is
experiencing a high
error rate

Controller continues
to run but is
marginally
accessing the I/O
on the associated
rack

GOOD: PORT I/O A

GOOD: PORT I/O B
NOT USED IN THIS
CONFIGURATION

Normal operation
N/A
Normal operation
N/A
None of the I/O
N/A
modules contained in
this rack are being
used to execute the
control configuration
that is currently running
in the controller.

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

Fix
See the fix defined for the LEAD
I/O COMM DIAG that is being
reported.

1. Check cable shielding for

proper grounding and noise
immunity.
2. Check connectors of all
cables.
3. If a hub/switch is being used,
verify that it is one that is
recommended by Honeywell
4. Replace cables.
1. Check cable shielding for
proper grounding and noise
immunity.
2. Check connectors of all
cables.
3. If a hub/switch is being used,
verify that it is one that is
recommended by Honeywell
4. Replace cables
N/A
N/A
N/A

Revision 12
11/08

Appendix A - HC900-C70R Redundant Controller Displays

Rack Diagnostics Displays

Class
RESERVE I/O
COMM DIAG

RESERVE I/O
COMM
STATUS

Revision 12
11/08

Status
GOOD
DATA LINK
FAILURE

Possible Cause
N/A
Scanner2 address
switches are not in
the correct position
An I/O cable is
unplugged.
Cables are defective
or are not properly
shielded
If a hub is used, it
may be powered
down.
The Scanner2 is
powered down.
The Scanner2 is
defective

HARDWARE
FAILURE

The I/O interface has a

hardware failure.

Controller Action
N/A
Controller continues
to run but is not able
to access the I/O on
the associated rack

Controller continues
to run but is not able
to access any I/O.
PORT A/B CABLE
The I/O cables from
Controller continues
MISMATCH
CPUA and CPUB are to run but is not able
connected to the wrong to access the I/O on
ports on the I/O
the associated rack
scanner CPU
PROTOCOL
The firmware version in Controller continues
MISMATCH
the controller CPU is
to run but is not able
not compatible with the to access the I/O on
firmware version in the the associated rack
I/O scanner
NO
Possible causes are
Controller continues
COMMUNICATIONS defined by the
to run but is not able
RESERVE I/O COMM to access the I/O on
DIAG that is being
the associated rack
reported.
MARGINAL: PORT
Rack communication
Controller continues
I/O A
with CPU-A is
to run but is
experiencing a high
marginally
error rate
accessing the I/O
on the associated
rack

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

Fix
N/A
1. If LEAD I/O COMM DIAG is
also DATA LINK FAILURE,
follow the Fix defined for that
diagnostic.
2. If a hub is used, check that all
cables are properly connected
to the hub, proper crossover
cables are used, that the hub
is powered, and it supports
100 Base-T.
3. Check cable shielding for
proper grounding and noise
immunity.
4. Make sure the cables have the
correct pin out.
5. Cycle power to the hub.
6. Cycle power to the C70R.
7. Replace the main CPU.
8. Cycle power to the Scanner 2.
9. Replace the expansion racks
scanner module.
10. Replace the expansion racks
power supply.
11.Replace the expansion
rack.

Replace the CPU.

Swap the cables so that I/O A is

connected to I/O on CPUA and
I/O B is connected to I/O on
CPUB
Upgrade the firmware in the CPU
and/or scanner to be compatible
versions

See the fix defined for the

RESERVE I/O COMM DIAG that
is being reported.

1. Check cable shielding for

proper grounding and noise
immunity.
2. Check connectors of all
cables.
3. If a hub/switch is being used,
verify that it is one that is
recommended by Honeywell
4. Replace cables.

309

Appendix A - HC900-C70R Redundant Controller Displays

Rack Diagnostics Displays

Class

I/O MODULE
DIAGNOSTICS

310

Status
MARGINAL: PORT
I/O B

Possible Cause
Rack communication
with CPU-B is
experiencing a high
error rate

GOOD: PORT I/O A

GOOD: PORT I/O B
NOT USED IN THIS
CONFIGURATION

Normal operation
Normal operation
None of the I/O
modules contained in
this rack are being
used to execute the
control configuration
that is currently running
in the controller.

GOOD
MODULE ERROR
MODULE HI CJ
TEMP
FAILURE
NO COMM
BAD VERSION

Controller Action
Fix
Controller continues 1. Check cable shielding for
to run but is
proper grounding and noise
marginally accessing
immunity.
the I/O on the
2. Check connectors of all
associated rack
cables.
3. If a HUB/switch is being used,
verify that it is one that is
recommended by Honeywell
4. Replace cables.
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A

The detailed information for the I/O MODULE DIAGNOSTICS entry in

the table above is also shown in Table 82 in the main part of the manual,
under the I/O Class.

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

Revision 12
11/08

Appendix B
Security Bypass Procedure

Appendix B
Security Bypass Procedure
Overview
Your instrument has a security bypass code, which allows you to enter secured areas of the product. Use
this bypass code if you have forgotten or lost the Engineer and/or Operator security code.
Bypass procedure
Step

Action

When you are prompted for the engineer or operator security code, use Increment and
Decrement keys to select the bypass code 783.

With 783 displayed, press the Display 5 key (under the display) to display the forgotten
engineer or operator code.

To return to the previous menu without entering the secured area, press Escape. To enter the
secured area, press Enter.

ATTENTION

Remove this page for security.

Revision 12
11/08

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

311

Appendix B

312

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

Revision 12
11/08

Index
Alarm
acknowledge ......................................................139
auto acknowledge defined .................................139
defined ...............................................................137
detail ..................................................................140
indication ...........................................................137
investigating ......................................................137
manual acknowledge defined ............................139
Alarm Group..........................................................139
Alarm Summary ....................................................138
Alarms/Events/Diag...............................................295
Alarms/Events/Diagnostics
Controller Diagnostics .......................................143
Panel Diagnostic Log.........................................154
Alternator...............................................................252
Analog input summary ..........................................129
Analog output summary ........................................131
architecture
components............................................................3
AT keyboard................................................21, 22, 23
Auto/Manual
switching loop mode....................................25, 105
auto/manual bias ....................................................128
Autotuning Output Low Limit Value ....................117
Bar Graph displays ................................................270
bias
auto/manual .......................................................128
ratio....................................................................114
Brightness
adjusting ............................................................207
Calibrate AI ...........................................................185
cold junction ......................................................189
example..............................................................188
example of CJ calibration ..................................190
set controller mode ............................................186
Calibrate AO..........................................................193
Calibrate Motor .....................................................198
Calibration
restore to AI factory...........................................191
restore to AO initial ...........................................197
restore to CJ factory...........................................192
Carbon loop ...........................................................115
cold start ..................................................................20
Cold Start
defined .......................................................161, 219
Communication Ports ............................................302
Communication Ports Diagnostics and Statuses....291
Communication Ports Displays .............................290

Revision 12
11/08

Communications....................................................168
expansion I/O port .............................................179
network port.......................................................173
Serial Port S2 (OI) .............................................172
view host connections........................................174
view network peer connections..........................175
view network peer statistics...............................176
Controller Diagnostics...........................................143
Controller Diagnostics Overview ..........................296
controller modes ......................................................34
Controller status.....................................................160
Data storage
calculate disk capacity .......................................222
controls ..............................................................233
enabling .............................................................227
file name conventions ........................................234
initialize .............................................................234
intervals .............................................................225
load settings .......................................................235
modes.................................................................225
operation ............................................................230
overview ............................................................221
start new storage settings ...................................237
store settings ......................................................238
view settings ......................................................236
view status .........................................................231
Date
setting ................................................................163
Diagnostic
communications.................................................155
configuration port ..............................................156
controller............................................................143
expansion I/O port .............................................158
I/O......................................................................147
network port.......................................................157
OI port ...............................................................156
panel log ............................................................154
types...................................................................142
Digital input summary ...........................................132
Digital output summary .........................................133
Disk
format ................................................................218
Disk File
list ......................................................................209
Disk Files
data storage naming convention ........................234
file types ............................................................209
Disk Utilities..........................................................208

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

313

Display
adjust brightness ................................................207
areas defined........................................................33
user-assignable.....................................................36
Display Group keys
relabeling .............................................................31
Environmental Conditions .........................................6
error messages .......................................................279
Escape......................................................................25
Event summary ......................................................141
Events
Setpoint schedule.................. See Setpoint schedule
F1-F4 buttons.........................................242, 243, 244
File Name Selection...............................................183
Files
customizing available filenames........................183
firmware
revision number .................................................239
FLASH UPDATE FAILED ................................162
Floating Point Big Endian .....................173, 293, 294
Floating Point Little Endian...................173, 293, 294
Format Disk ...........................................................218
Four Selector Switch .....................................243, 244
H indicator ...............................................................34
Hand/Off/Auto Switch...........................................246
HC900-C70R Redundant Controller Displays.......289
Help .......................................................................275
High output limiting .....................................See Loop
HOA display..........................................................246
I/O Diagnostics ......................................................147
Ignore changes to a number
how to ..................................................................25
Keys.........................................................................21
Tasks using standard keys ...................................25
Keys 1 - 8
displays accessed .................................................35
Labeling keys...........................................................31
Language ...............................................................167
Lead CPU Diagnostics...........................................299
Lead or Reserve CPU diagnostics error status
messages ............................................................299
log off/log on .........................................................239
Log scale trending .................................................267
Loop
1 loop numeric ...................................................125
1 loop w/loop trend display ...............................126
alarm setpoints...................................................116
auto/manual bias ................................................128
autotune .....................................................108, 112
carbon ................................................................115
control................................................................121
control setup ......................................................114
high output limiting ...........................................118
limits ..................................................................117
Menu..................................................................106
314

modes.........................................................103, 119
Multiloop faceplate display ...............................124
setup...................................................................106
trend...................................................................107
tune constants ............................................113, 127
Loop capacity ........................................................160
Loop output
changing ......................................................26, 105
Main menu...............................................................39
tree .......................................................................40
Main Menu ............................................................289
Maintenance ..........................................................277
Messages from system...........................................279
Modbus Slave Devices ..........................................292
mode
controller modes defined ...................................161
Mode
setting ........................................................160, 219
modes of operation ..................................................34
Mounting .............................................................8, 15
Network port details ..............................................294
Network Port E1 ....................................................292
Network Port E2 ....................................................292
Network Ports E1 and E2 ......................................293
Overview display...................................................274
Panel display
interacting with ..................................................271
meter ..................................................................273
multi-point .................................................272, 273
single .................................................................271
part number
of operator interface...........................................239
parts
replacement........................................................277
PID
high output limiting ...........................................118
power supply ...........................................................16
Profile
load/store ...........................................................210
Pushbuttons............................................................242
Rack Diagnostics Displays ....................................303
Rack diagnostics error status messages .................303
Ramp display .........................................................249
Recipe
load ......................................................................45
load/store ...........................................................216
Recipes ....................................................................44
Redundant Controller Diagnostics error status
messages ............................................................296
Redundant Controller Diagnostics Overview ........296
Redundant Controller Displays Overview .............289
replacement parts...................................................277
Reserve CPU Diagnostics......................................299
revision number
firmware ............................................................239

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

Revision 12
11/08

Index

S indicator................................................................34
Security..................................................................163
how to access secured area ................................164
Security Bypass Procedure ....................................311
Sequence
load from disk....................................................214
store to disk........................................................214
Sequencer operation ..................................97, 98, 257
edit steps/edit step details ............................96, 102
View/edit ...........................................................101
Sequencers.......................................................87, 256
edit .......................................................................89
edit step details ....................................................91
edit steps ..............................................................90
select state............................................................94
setup.....................................................................88
view outputs.........................................................93
view step details...................................................92
Serial Port S1.........................................................292
Serial Port S2.........................................................292
Set language...........................................................167
setpoint
switch.................................................................114
Setpoint
switch.................................................................121
Setpoint program
auxiliary start value .............................................63
change state ........................................................55
clear program...............................................55, 58
edit .......................................................................49
edit segments .....................................51, 55, 58, 63
elapsed time .........................................................58
fast forward..........................................................50
load ......................................................................60
operate menu .......................................................58
operation ..............................................................53
overview ..............................................................46
popup menu .........................................................58
PV#2 through PV#4.............................................58
save..........................................................52, 55, 58
setup.....................................................................47
states .............................................................54, 56
states vs. actions ..................................................59
time remaining.....................................................58
view events ....................................................58, 59
Setpoint schedule
clear from scheduler ..... 79, 99, 258, 259, 260, 261,
262, 264
defined .................................................................65

Revision 12
11/08

edit .......................................................................67
edit guarantee hold...............................................71
edit guarantee hold limits.....................................73
edit segment events..............................................70
edit segments ...........................................68, 79, 85
edit setpoints..................................................69, 85
load ..............................................................81, 100
load from disk....................................................212
operate menu . 79, 99, 258, 259, 260, 261, 262, 263
operation ........................................................75, 80
overview ..............................................................65
popup menu ... 79, 99, 258, 259, 260, 261, 262, 263
save.................. 72, 79, 99, 258, 259, 261, 262, 264
setup...............................................................66, 88
states .............................................................75, 77
states vs. actions ..................................................80
store to disk........................................................212
view auxiliary setpoints .......................................79
view details..........................................................84
view events ....................................................79, 83
Site preparation..........................................................8
Specifications ............................................................5
Stage ......................................................................247
Standard Keys
names and functions ............................................23
Startup .....................................................................20
status line .................................................................33
Testing
disk read/write ...................................................184
display................................................................184
keypad................................................................184
Time
setting ................................................................163
Trend .....................................................................266
detail ..................................................................268
hold....................................................................268
log scale .............................................................267
popup menu .......................................................268
scroll ..................................................................268
scrolling ...............................................................28
zoom ..................................................................268
Unit Setup..............................................................159
Variable summary..................................................134
Warm Start
defined .......................................................161, 219
Wiring......................................................................16
Write Database to Flash Memory ..........................162
Z indicator ...............................................................34

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

315

316

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

Revision 12
11/08

Sales and Service

For application assistance, current specifications, pricing, or name of the nearest Authorized Distributor,
contact one of the offices below.
ASIA PACIFIC
Control Products
Asia Pacific Headquarters
Phone: +(65) 6355-2828
Fax: +(65) 6445-3033
Asia Pacific Global
Technical Support
Field Instruments
Phone: +65 6580 3156
Fax: +65 6445-3033
Process Instruments
Phone: (603) 76950 4777
Fax: (603) 7958 8922
Australia
Honeywell Limited
Phone: +(61) 7-3846 1255
FAX: +(61) 7-3840 6481
Toll Free 1300-36-39-36
Toll Free Fax:
1300-36-04-70
China PRC - Beijing
Honeywell China Inc.
Phone: +(86-10) 8458-3280
Fax: +(86-10) 8458-4650
China PRC - Shanghai
Honeywell China Inc.
Phone: (86-21) 5257-4568
Fax: (86-21) 6237-2826
China PRC - Chengdu
Honeywell China Inc.
Phone: +(86-28) 8678-6348
Fax: +(86-28) 8678-7061
China PRC - Xian
Honeywell China Ltd Xian.
Phone: +(86-29) 8833-7490
Fax: +(86-29) 8833-7489
China PRC - ShenzhenHoneywell China Inc.
Phone: +(86) 755-2518-1226
Fax: +(86) 755-2518-1221
Indonesia
PT Honeywell Indonesia
Phone: +(62) 21-535-8833
FAX: +(62) 21-5367 1008
India
Automation India Ltd.
Honeywell Ltd.
Phone:+(91) 5603-9400
Fax: +(91) 5603-9600
Japan
Honeywell Inc.
Phone: +(81) 3 6730 7150
Fax: +(81) 3 6730 7228

Malaysia
Honeywell Engineering
Sdn Bhd
Phone: +(60-3) 7950-4776
Fax: +(60-3) 7958-8922

Bulgaria
Honeywell EOOD
Phone: +(359) 2 40 20 900
FAX: +(359) 2 40 20 990

Slovak Republic
Honeywell s.r.o.
Phone: +421-2-58247 410
FAX: +421-2-58247 415

Czech Republic
Honeywell spol. s.r.o.
Phone: +420 242 442 232
FAX: +420 242 442 131

Spain
Honeywell S.A.
Phone: +34 (0)91313 61 00
FAX: +34 (0)91313 61 30

Denmark
Honeywell A/S
Phone: +(45) 39 55 55 55
FAX: +(45) 39 55 55 58

Sweden
Honeywell AB
Phone: +(46) 8 775 55 00
FAX: +(46) 8 775 56 00

Finland
Honeywell OY
Phone: +358 (0) 20752 2753
FAX: +358 (0) 20752 2751

Switzerland
Honeywell AG
Phone: +41 18552448
FAX: +(41) 1 855 24 45

Singapore
Honeywell Pte Ltd.
Phone: +(65) 6580 3278
Fax: +(65) 6445-3033

France
Honeywell SA
Phone: +33 (0)1 60198075
FAX: +33 (0)1 60198201

Turkey
Honeywell Turkey A.S.
Phone: +90 216 578 71 00
FAX: +90 216 575 66 35

South Korea
Honeywell Korea Co Ltd
Phone: +(822) 799 6315
Fax: +(822) 792 9015

Germany
Honeywell AG
Phone: +49 (69)8064-299
FAX: +49 (69)806497336

Ukraine
Honeywell
Tel: +380-44-201 44 74
Fax: +380-44-201-44-75

Thailand
Honeywell Systems
(Thailand) Ltd.
Phone: +(662) 693-3099
FAX: +(662) 693-3089

Hungary
Honeywell Kft.
Phone: +36-1-451 4300
FAX: +36-1-451 4343

United Kingdom
Honeywell Control Systems
Ltd.
Phone: +44 (0)1344 655251
FAX: +44 (0) 1344 655554

New Zealand
Honeywell Limited
Phone: +(64-9) 623-5052
Fax: +(64-9) 623-5060
Toll Free (0800) 202-088
Philippines
Honeywell Systems
(Philippines) Inc.
Phone: +(63-2) 633-283031/
636 1661-62
Fax: +(63-2) 638-4013

Taiwan R.O.C.
Honeywell Taiwan Ltd.
Phone: +(886-2) 2245-1000
FAX: +(886-2) 2245-3241
SE Asia Countries
see Honeywell Pte Ltd
(Singapore)
for:
Pakistan
Cambodia
Guam
Laos
Myanmar
Vietnam
East Timor
SE Asia Countries
see Honeywell Automation
India Ltd for:
Bangladesh
Nepal
Sri Lanka
EUROPE
Austria
Honeywell Austria GmbH
Phone: +43 (316)400123
FAX: +43 (316)40017
Belgium
Honeywell SA/NV
Phone: +32 (0) 2 728 24 07
FAX: +32 (0) 2 728 22 45

Revision 12
11/08

Italy
Honeywell S.p.A.
Phone: +39 02 92146 307/
395
FAX: +39 0292146377
The Netherlands
Honeywell B.V.
Phone: +31 (0) 20 5656200
FAX: +31 (0) 20 5656210
Norway
Honeywell A/S
Phone: (45) 39 55 55 55
Poland
Honeywell Sp. zo.o
Phone: +48-22-6060900
FAX: +48-22-6060901
Portugal
Honeywell Portugal Lda
Phone: +351 21 424 5000
FAX: +351 21 424 50 99
Romania
Honeywell Bucharest
Phone: +40 (0) 21 2316437
FAX: +40 (0) 21 2316439
Russian Federation (RF),
ZAO "Honeywell"
Phone: +7 (095) 796 98 00
FAX: +7 (495) 797 99 64

MIDDLE EAST
Abu Dhabi U A E
Middle East Headquarters
Honeywell Middle East Ltd.
Phone: +971 2 4041246
FAX: +971 2 4432536
Sultanate of Oman
Honeywell & Co Oman LLC
Phone: +968 24 701153/
Ext.33
FAX +968 24 787351
Saudia Arabia
Honeywell Turki Arabia Ltd
Jubail Office
Phone: +966-3-341-0140
Fax: +966-3-341-0216
Honeywell - ATCO
Dammam Office
Phone: 0096638304584
Fax: 0096638338059
Kuwait
Honeywell Kuwait KSC
Phone: +965 242 1327 to 30
Fax: +965 242 8315
and
Phone: +965 326 2934/1821
Fax: +965 326 1714

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

AFRICA
Mediterranean & African
Distributors
Honeywell SpA
Phone: +39 (02) 250 10 604
FAX: +39 (02) 250 10 659
South Africa (Republic of)
and sub saharan
Honeywell Southern Africa
Honeywell S.A. Pty. Ltd.
Phone: +27 11 6958000
FAX +27 118051504

NORTH AMERICA
Canada
Honeywell LTD
Phone: 1-800-737-3360
FAX: 1-800-565-4130
USA
Honeywell Process
Solutions,
Phone: 1-800-343-0228
FAX: 1-717-771-8251
Email:sc-cp-appssales@
honeywell.com
LATIN AMERICA
Argentina
Honeywell S.A.I.C.
Phone: +(54-11) 4383-3637
FAX: +(54-11) 4325-6470
Brazil
Honeywell do Brasil & Cia
Phone: +(55-11) 7266-1900
FAX: +(55-11) 7266-1905
Chile
Honeywell Chile, S.A.
Phone: +(56-2) 233-0688
FAX: +(56-2) 231-6679
Mexico
Honeywell S.A. de C.V.
Phone: +(52) 55 5259-1966
FAX: +(52) 55 5570-2985
Puerto Rico
Honeywell Inc.
Phone: +(809) 792-7075
FAX: +(809) 792-0053
Trinidad
Honeywell Inc.
Phone: +(868) 624-3964
FAX: +(868) 624-3969
Venezuela
Honeywell CA
Phone: +(58-2) 238-0211
FAX: +(58-2) 238-3391

317

Revision 12
11/08

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

318

Honeywell Process Solutions

Honeywell
512 Virginia Drive
Fort Washington, PA 19034
51-52-25-108 Rev.12 11-08 Printed in USA

www.hpsweb.honeywell.com